JP2021180739A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve amusement of games.SOLUTION: Provided is a game machine which makes a notification of a winning/losing result using presentation symbols by varying and then stopping the presentation symbols that are in a plurality of columns. In the game machine, the presentation symbols are composed of numerical images and in each column of the plurality of columns, a variable display is preformed using special presentation symbols in which specific numerical images among the numerical images are smaller than residual numerical images. The specific numerical images are to be numerical images indicating odd numbers and the residual numerical images are to be numerical images indicating even numbers. Alternatively, when making a notification that the winning/losing result is a winning, the specific numerical images are to be numerical images with which a shift to a specific game state via a special game capable of acquiring game balls is definitely determined.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 113

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball wins a prize at the starting port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application Example 1]
It is a gaming machine that notifies the winning result by the effect symbols by changing and stopping the effect symbols in a plurality of rows.
The effect pattern is composed of numerical images.
In each of the plurality of columns, the variable display is performed with a special effect symbol in which the numerical image indicating an odd number is larger than the numerical image indicating an even number among the numerical images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination table T1 to T4, T10. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the advance determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the basic effect pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 3rd movable accessory 13. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display effect of a sub-display screen 64. It is 1st figure for demonstrating hold icon switching effect A. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating the hold icon switching effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon switching effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the change icon acquisition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the change icon acquisition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the change icon acquisition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific icon stock effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific icon stock effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific icon stock effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation stock production A (first half). It is a figure for demonstrating operation stock effect A (the latter half). It is a figure for demonstrating operation stock effect B (the latter half). It is a figure for demonstrating the icon numerical symbol effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon numerical symbol effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon numerical symbol effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon effect A at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon effect B at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon effect C at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the special hold effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special hold effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the special hold effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon success or failure effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon success or failure effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon success or failure effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon selection effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon selection effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon selection effect C. It is a figure which showed the jackpot expectation degree table by icon. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon special change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon special change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation icon jump effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation icon jump effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation icon jump effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means appearance effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means appearance effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means appearance effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the component assembly production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the component assembly production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the component assembly production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern effect A at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern effect B at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern effect C at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating group promotion production A. It is a figure for demonstrating group promotion production B. It is a figure for demonstrating group promotion production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the stop decoration pattern appearance effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the stop decoration symbol appearance effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the stop decoration symbol appearance effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern color change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern color change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern color change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the color change reach effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the color change reach effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the color change reach effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the character attack effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the character attack effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the character attack effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern color change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern color change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern color change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern visibility change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern visibility change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern visibility change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation degree numerical display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation degree numerical display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation degree numerical display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific effect execution suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific effect execution suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the special direction suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special direction suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the special direction suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating effect sound effect effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating effect sound effect effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating effect sound effect effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the lyrics image production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the lyrics image production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the lyrics image production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific area variable effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific area variable effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific area variable effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the reliability in character appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the reliability change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the reliability change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating item superimposition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating item superimposition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating item superimposition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the game board by a transparent acrylic board. It is a continuation figure for demonstrating the game board of FIG. 146. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect of decorative light emission of a movable accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating the W mode display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the W mode display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the W mode display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the lock method to the upper plate of a sword member. It is a figure for demonstrating the moving part operation warning effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the moving part operation warning effect B.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction seen by the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a gaming ball based on a player's launch operation, and when the gaming ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. be. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, the effect button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, and the like. It is equipped with. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores the game ball. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores the game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are arranged at a paired position via the game board 2. The upper sub display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is arranged above the front frame 53 to produce light emission during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the right sub display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the left sub display screen 64L. The speaker 67 is arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the front frame 53, and produces sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , Gate (through chucker) 28, 1st big winning device (1st attacker) 31, 2nd big winning device (2nd attacker) 36, big winning opening open start opening 17, and general winning opening 27 ( It is provided with a normal winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a reserved digestion image display area (the reserved digestion display area) on which the reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C, the hold icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. In the symbol display area inside, the medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, if a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublets such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a random eye such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the mode of variable display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In this decorative symbol variation effect, the effect in the period from the start to the stop of the special symbol variation (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change to the stop of the special symbol, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the effect of the change of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the hold images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special symbol hold or the first 2 It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

On the right side and the left side of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semiring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to be close to each other (the first movable accessory 14 is stationary). It is possible to advance) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative portion when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves downward (advances) from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the right side and the left side of the image display device 7, a movable third board movable body 13 (also referred to as a third movable accessory 13), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The third movable accessory 13 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left-right direction. A ring-shaped decorative portion is formed on each of the two members, and a circular transmissive portion having transparency is provided inside the ring shape. The third movable accessory 13 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to be close to each other (the third movable accessory 13 is stationary). It is possible to advance) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. In the third movable accessory 13, when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, the two ring-shaped decorative portions are close to each other to form eyeglasses, and cover a part of the image display device 7.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion into which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion in which the game ball flows out, and the game ball flowing in from the inlet portion is discharged from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. A mouth, a fixed starting port) 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a big hit random number or the like and determining a big hit.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (small hit and big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It should be noted that the electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the second starting port 21 is required. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a jackpot random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired jackpot random number is used. A process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot by comparing it with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but a variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is performed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "special symbol small hit lottery", when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting opening 21, a small hit random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired small hit random number is predetermined. It is a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made by comparing with a value corresponding to the "small hit". The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 41b described later, and the lottery is performed when a predetermined variable time has elapsed. The special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the small hit. ..

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not it is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines the predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball to the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball to the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to move the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state). In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probabilistic actuation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic actuation port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small hit attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special). It is equipped with a winning opening) 35. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. This second big winning device is a small hit attacker that operates when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 21 and is won by a small hit lottery.

The large winning opening opening opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes through.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3. The out opening 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning openings is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 displays the ordinary symbol in a variable manner. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 as an opportunity. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as an opportunity. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery (big hit lottery) based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. Notify the result. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 has an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) in the big hit game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays the result of the lottery (small hit lottery) based on the winning of the second starting port 21. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, a special game (small hit game) in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern is performed. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If a small hit is won, the small hit symbol with the first and second LEDs from the left lit is displayed, such as "○○ ●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , Is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the prize is won in the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is in the second starting port 21. , Is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the middle or special game execution, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then displaying the stop. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a hit, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern with only the right LED lit, such as "● ○", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. As for the mode of variable display, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is set as the normal figure hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, and the first Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large winning opening open start opening 17, and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening open start opening 17. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second big winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second big winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

Display units 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and also receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114, and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 by the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. CPU 92 and. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols Etc. (including the effect pattern) and image data such as a background image are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. do. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13, and the operation pattern data. According to this, the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 are controlled. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be allowed to execute lamp lighting control or operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern in the ROM.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, a V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9, and a small hit determination table T10 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each judgment table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5 (B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-determination command, a hold ball count command, and a command. A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, and the like. A small hit flag, a V flag, a probability change flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (holding information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. In the second special figure hold storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure hold is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (holding information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer or the like is provided.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area (described later) in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later). It is an output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)", and a "small hit random number". Is configured to be acquired at the timing described later. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed out of a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of effect symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is performed. Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "small hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (small hit determination) for whether or not it is a small hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The "small hit random number" is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21. The random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored. The second special figure is stored in the reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The "look-ahead effect random number" is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the fact that the pre-determination command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8E shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4. , A diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10 is shown.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "missing". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164" in the "normal probability state", it is determined as "big hit" (about probability 1/397), and the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164". In the case of "a numerical value other than (165 to 65535)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit" (about probability 1/101), and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than "0 to 649" (650). In the case of "~ 65535)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. It should be noted that this reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the above-acquired jackpot random number value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8B, when the reach random value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined to be "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined as "with reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is less likely that the reach in the time-shortened state will be reached in the lost time state than in the non-time-shortened state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "missing". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time reduction state or time reduction state). The table referenced to do so. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". It is shown that.

In the small hit determination table T10, the small hit random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "small hit" or "missing". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. The small hit determination table T10 is not referred to when the above-mentioned acquired big hit random value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8 (E), when the small hit random value is "0 to 63" in all states (regardless of the gaming state), it is determined as "small hit" (probability 1/2), and the small hit randomness. When the numerical value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". The small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when the game ball wins in the second start opening 21 (not referred to when the game ball wins in the first start opening 20). Further, the small hit determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when it is determined to be a "big hit".

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 has "big hit type" and "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol of 1 (special stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot", and the special figure 2 shows. The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "41-82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the stop symbol of special figure 2 (special figure stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". .. When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game are used. "Command" can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). ..
In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In addition, the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted in the non-time saving state (since it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 in the non-time saving state, the time saving state (high accuracy and high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state). When the time is shortened (low probability low base state), the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted), the jackpot determination table T1 determines "big hit", and the jackpot type determination table T5 "16RV scheduled passage jackpot". , "Big hit symbol 2 (21H)", and when the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P22". Further, in the non-time saving state, the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted, and it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is " It is shown that it is determined as "P34".

In FIG. 11, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "no reach", and the number of reserved balls is "3 to". 4 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 127 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P56 ”. In addition, a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in a short time state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1 and "16RV planned passage jackpot" and "big hit symbol 2 (21H)" in the jackpot type determination table T5. , Fluctuation pattern When the random value is "0 to 127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62". Further, in the time saving state, the second starting port 21 is won, and when it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10 and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P74". It has been shown to be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. For example, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted in the non-time saving state and it is determined to be a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 15000 msec. Further, when the second starting port 21 is won in a time-saving state and a small hit is determined, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high probability high base state), it is also during the small hit rush (RUSH) period described later until the next big hit, that is, during the small hit rush period, when the second starting port 21 is won. Since the fluctuation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small hits occur frequently in a short time. Then, during the small hit rush period, you can aim for a big hit while increasing the number of game balls you have. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream. In particular, SP5 has a variation pattern of a dedicated reach in which a pseudo-big hit suggestion effect is performed by winning a prize at the second starting port 21 during the small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in the time saving state (high accuracy high base state) described later. "P62"). It should be noted that SP5 also occurs during the hold digestion of the second starting port 21 when the time saving state (high accuracy high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state, low accuracy low base state) is reached. In some cases, a pseudo-big hit suggestion effect may be performed in this case as well (variation pattern "P22").

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. It is shown that. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (prescribed number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, as the big winning opening opening pattern in the big hit game, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “20H”, or “21H”, the first big winning opening 30 and The opening pattern of the 2nd prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize are won. The opening pattern of the opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is "opening pattern 23". It has been shown to be determined. Further, in FIG. 13A, as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game, when the special figure stop symbol data is “20H”, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 is determined to be “opening pattern 25”. It is shown that when the special figure stop symbol data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".
FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23 as the big winning opening opening pattern in the big hit game. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the opening number is once and the first big winning opening 30 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is opened (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th round, the opening time is opened. Open the 2nd big winning opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, open the 2nd big winning opening 35 once with 1 opening time and 29.5 seconds opening time (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (prescribed number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.
FIG. 13C shows the contents of the opening pattern 25 and the opening pattern 26 as the large winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game. In the opening pattern 25, the second large winning opening 35 is opened once, with an opening time of 1.0 second. In the opening pattern 26, the second large winning opening 35 is opened 5 times and the opening time is 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is not opened, and only the second big winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern 25 is the second during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game and the second after the end of the small hit rush when the "16RV passing planned big hit" is made by the big hit symbol 1 (20H) of the special figure 2. The start port 21 is held during digestion. The opening pattern 26 is the second starting port during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game and after the end of the small hit rush when the "16RV passing planned big hit" is made by the big hit symbol 2 (21H) of the special figure 2. 21 hold is made during digestion. That is, the opening pattern 26 is a small hit game performed after the big hit game when the big hit is made via the fluctuation pattern (“P62”) of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which the pseudo big hit suggestion effect described later is performed. It is an open pattern. In other words, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game is different between when the jackpot is hit via the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect and when the jackpot is reached without going through the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “20H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33". It is shown that when the stop symbol data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is set. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. At the 8th and 10th rounds, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, and the opening time is when the second prize is won. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. When the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..

4. Explanation of big hits, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "misses" as a result of the big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win a big hit, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 and 2nd big winning opening 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of big hit) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. If you win a small hit, a "small hit game" that opens the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is executed with the opening pattern according to the type of big hit that triggered the occurrence of the small hit rush described later. NS.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot".
The "V-passing scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and is an opening / closing member 32, an opening / closing member 37, and a V opening / closing member. It is a big hit that activates 71. In addition, in the "V-passing planned jackpot (probability variable jackpot)", the game state is in the high probability high base state from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, and during that period, the second starting port 21 is used. It will be a small hit rush period when you win frequently and small hits occur. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H, 20H, and 21H correspond to the "V-passing scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 It is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. In addition, in the "V non-passing planned jackpot (normal jackpot)", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state after the end of the jackpot game, and it becomes difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 during that period. There is no small hit rush period after the big hit game is over. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39.
As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The total number of rounds of the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the jackpot scheduled to pass through V (big hit with small hit rush), V. The non-passing jackpot is 60/128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the jackpot scheduled to pass V (big hit with small hit rush), and scheduled to not pass V. The jackpot is 45/128 (about 35.2%). In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Explanation of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation. The uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by making a big hit judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state in the time reduction state. Judge the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the variable time shortening control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. This makes it possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment in which the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control are executed at the same time is shown.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be a hit is larger in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a short time state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 10,000 times. That is, the high-accuracy high-base state is substantially terminated when the next big hit (next big hit) is won and the big hit game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low-probability state), a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is this low probability and low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there is also a gaming state of a normal probability state (non-high probability state, that is, a low probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state (electric support control state), and this gaming state is particularly "low". "Probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state" (a state controlled to at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is called a "specific game state"). Further, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handed strike. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. be. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the second starting port 21) and to generate small hits frequently, rather than hitting left. In the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. This is because the electric support control is not executed in the low base state, so that the electric chew 22 is harder to open than in the high base state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21. That is, it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to make the first starting port 20 win a game ball. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the first starting port 20) rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to a hit / fail determination means (FIG. 23) and a hit / fail predetermination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main processing from the main ROM 83. Main control In the main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 has various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7A. , Ordinary symbol random number value, small hit random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig.). 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 has a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a hold ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of holding balls of special figure 2 described later, and the first special drawing is based on the number of holding balls of special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and uses the acquired random number value as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area according to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. 7: the label). -The value of TRND-RC), the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-T1), and the value of the small hit random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-K) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired according to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reserved storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a preliminary determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 uses the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot determination table T1. You may make a preliminary judgment using the jackpot judgment table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the random value and the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is preliminarily determined from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach pre-determination result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1 to 2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 is used. Pre-judgment may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from that of.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a variation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination with reference to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 is the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164” in the jackpot determination table T1. ”) To determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a normal symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the general figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit by using the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is not, it is determined to be "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the game has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and in the case of "missing" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected open pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, a variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the processing during special symbol change, the output of the change stop command and the like are executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

In the special operation process, the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display 41b are independently executed, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. It may be configured to allow simultaneous fluctuations. In this case, the processing related to the first special symbol display 41a and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is set to the "special figure 1 operation status". Called "1", "2", "3", "4". In addition, the processing related to the second special symbol display 41b and the grand prize device is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1", "2", "3", and "4" of "Special Figure 2 Operation Status", respectively. Call. The initial setting of "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not any of the "special figure 1 operation status" and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" or "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "4", special electric accessory processing is performed. In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special figure 1 is "4", the big hit game by the big hit of the special figure 1 is executed. When the operation status of the special figure 2 is "4", the big hit game or the small hit game by the big hit of the special figure 2 is executed. If neither "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" nor "Special Figure 2 Operation Status" is "4", the game control microcomputer 81 has "Special Figure 1 Operation Status" of "1", "2", or "3". "Is it judged. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", the special figure 1 standby process is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, the hit determination and the fluctuation pattern selection of the special figure 1 are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", the special figure 1 changing process is performed. In the special figure 1 changing process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", the special figure 1 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 1 confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. After determining whether the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" or "2". Make a judgment as to whether it is "3". When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1", the special figure 2 standby process is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, the hit determination of the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", the special figure 2 changing process is performed. In the special figure 2 changing process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 2 confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of the present embodiment, the standby process, the variable process, and the final process of the special figure 1 and the standby process, the variable process, and the final process of the special figure 2 are executed in parallel. NS. On the other hand, the big hit game and the small hit game are executed in preference to the standby processing, the variation processing, and the final processing of the special figures 1 and 2.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1400). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the small hit determination process (step S1401). In the small hit determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a small hit determination with reference to the small hit determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the small hit random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. It is read, and it is determined whether or not it is a small hit by using the read small hit random value and the small hit determination table T10. Next, when the result of the small hit determination is "small hit", the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the small hit symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , End this process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the hold digestion image display area side and is displayed as the hold digestion image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the small hit determination process (step S1401) and the big hit determination process. Information on the special figure stop symbol data set in (step S1402) and information on the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information on the fluctuation time) are included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a to the side read from the current position by one. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) is displayed. It shifts to the hold digestion image display area side and is displayed as the hold digestion image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information on the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (big hit scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402, S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "649") in the big hit judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since it is a normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is "missing" (the result of the small hit determination is also "missing"), the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and this process is terminated.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). The determination of whether or not the time reduction state is performed is performed by whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1610). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small hit flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the non-time saving state small hit table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Do this (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first stores the fluctuation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as the table for the non-time saving state small hit, the portion corresponding to the small hit (the portion where the variation pattern is “P34”) in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 is referred to. (The address is set). "P34" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a V-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates with reference to the table for the jackpot scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern is "P1". "The part of" P3 ", the part of which the fluctuation pattern is" P21 "and" P22 "in the special figure 2) is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P21" or "P22" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The part from which "P4" to "P6" is referred to, and the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P23" in the special figure 2) is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

In step S1610, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is performed based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P32" and "P33" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is in the reduced working hours state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processes of steps S1604 to S1611 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605 and S1606. It is different from S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621. , The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in FIG. 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern of "P61" or "P62" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P61" or "P62" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. In No. 1, the portion where the fluctuation pattern is “P44” to “P46”, and in the special figure 2, the portion where the fluctuation pattern is “P63”) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small hit, the portion corresponding to the small hit (the portion of “P74”) in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is referred to. "P74" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

After selecting the fluctuation pattern (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621) as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected fluctuation pattern. (Step S1630) This process is completed. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the big hit game and the small hit game are not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the big hit determination, the small hit determination, and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the big hit with the winning small hit rush (step S1811). .. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this process.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "10000" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). When "10000" is set in the probability variation counter, the value of the substantial probability variation counter does not become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. Here, "10000" is set in the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). When "10000" is set in the time reduction counter, the value of the actual time reduction counter does not become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is a probability change state, a probability change counter value, whether or not it is a time reduction state, a time reduction counter value, and the like).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period at the time of winning the predetermined th game ball. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for opening the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2203). As a condition for opening the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not there is a ball in the big winning opening opening start opening 17. If there is no ball entering the large winning opening opening start opening 17, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied. When there is a ball entering the large winning opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the large winning opening. The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening of the big winning opening is temporarily closed after opening, the big winning opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If the above conditions are not satisfied (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When the above conditions are satisfied (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a large winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, the predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, when it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the closing of the big winning opening. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not been exhausted yet, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" is "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing schedule". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V area 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot", the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V planned passage jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process is completed.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231) and turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

Further, in the special electric accessory processing, in addition to the opening processing of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35) in the big hit game as described above, the big winning opening (the first) in the small hit game. The opening process of the two major winning openings 35) is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small hit flag is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 has a big winning opening (FIG. 13) according to an opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit with a winning small hit rush. The second large winning opening 35) is opened, and then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening (FIG. 13) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied, the closing condition is satisfied. The big winning opening is closed (closed) (small hit game ends). After that, the small hit flag is turned off and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to sometimes execute a short release (here, 0.1 second). In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 causes the V opening / closing member 71 to be short-opened (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And set the V validity period to 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is detected. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), the second ball is generally won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening / closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "10000" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "10000". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "10000" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.
In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost a jackpot before the 10,000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the jackpot scheduled to pass V (special symbol stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is the jackpot game. If V is passed inside, the gaming state after the big hit will be a high accuracy and high base state until the next big hit, and it is almost guaranteed that the small hit rush will occur.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, and 12th round. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates the random number. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs reception command analysis processing (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute a specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The "look-ahead effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned look-ahead effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end process is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command, which is set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between the openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is a high probability state, whether or not it is a time saving state, probabilistic change). The counter, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-passing command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the information that has passed through the V. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “miss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in Special Figure 2. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in special figure 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth hold of special figure 2. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas in Special Figure 2 and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The pre-determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 has a "big hit" as the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information). If the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "loss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter for the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is performed are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "miss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type, content, and range of the selected random number value of the look-ahead effect pattern can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable production is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing an SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing an SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing an SP3 effect are shown. Multiple types of core production patterns for SP4 production, multiple types of core production patterns for SP5 production (dedicated reach production pattern for pseudo-big hit suggestion production described later), and multiple types of core production for non-reach loss production A pattern and a plurality of types of basic production patterns for performing small hit effects are set. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P74", the basic effect pattern for performing the small hit effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation pattern is "P21" to "P34" "P41" to "P56" "P61" to "P74". It may or may not be prepared.

In FIG. 43, “2-NO”, “2-SP1”, “2-SP2”, “2-SP3”, “3-NO”, “3-SP1”, “3-SP2”, “3-SP3”, and “3-SP3” are used as chance-up effect patterns. 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combines the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is being produced (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the effect pre-end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command in which the effect control microcomputer 91 informs the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , Switch the production contents and display a specific image according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of the fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the region, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a notice fade effect for fading the notice image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The buffer and the like that appear in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). When receiving (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads out a predetermined variation effect image instructed by the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). When receiving (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command before the end of the fluctuation, and when the command before the end of the fluctuation includes the look-ahead effect pattern information, reads a predetermined look-ahead effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Further, even if the pre-reading effect pattern information is not included in the command before the end of the fluctuation, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the preview fade effect for fading the preview image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When receiving (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out a predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and reads out the predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is terminated.

9. Operation of the board movable body and display effect of the sub display screen 64 Using FIGS. 46 to 49, the board movable body (first movable accessory 14, second movable accessory 15, and third movable accessory 13) The operation and the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 to operate during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. Take control. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the third movable accessory 13. The third movable accessory 13 includes the left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R. The left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and a ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have a ring shape. The left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are each provided with a circular transmission part having transparency inside the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the third movable accessory 13 has a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 13L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 13R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, a part of the left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R can be visually recognized. In the third movable accessory 13, as shown in FIG. 46, the left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) from the state of FIG. By moving, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are close to each other at the advance position (deployment position), and one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed (second aspect). Here, the coalesced accessory forms spectacles. That is, the left decorative portion and the transmissive portion correspond to the left frame and lens, and the right decorative portion and the transmissive portion correspond to the right frame and lens. In this second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united covers a part near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a is visually recognized from the transmission part. Stand still where possible. The third movable accessory 13 can move from the advance position in FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still there.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 includes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 has a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, a part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can be visually recognized. In the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. 47, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) from the state of FIG. By moving, the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united at the advance position (deployment position), and one decorative member (combination accessory) is formed (second aspect). Here, the coalesced accessory forms the contour of the face. In this second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united covers a part near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7, and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the united accessory is configured so that only the outline of the face is formed, there is no central portion of the face, and the display screen 7a can be visually recognized instead. Then, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united accessory, so that the human face is completed as a whole. That is, a combination effect of the character and the image that completes one object (for example, a human face) by displaying the insufficient part (for example, the central part of the face) in the combined character as an image on the display screen 7a. Can be done. The first movable accessory 14 can move from the advance position in FIG. 47 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 48 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position in FIG. 48 to the retreat position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U can display images independently. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of the present embodiment Each effect example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example.

Hereinafter, the hold icon switching effects A and B will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. This hold icon switching effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon switching effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a.

[Hold icon switching effect A]
50 and 51 are diagrams for explaining the hold icon switching effect A. The hold icon switching effect is an effect in which the modes of a plurality of hold icons are switched. The mode of the hold icon includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon. In the hold icon switching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the normal state, the three hold icons 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) are displayed. ) 9C is displayed. The three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C all have a round shape (spherical shape). In this state, when the game ball wins the fixed winning device (navel) 19, a new fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side as shown in FIG. 50 (B). At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a star shape (star shape).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), of the three round hold icons 9A displayed before the fourth hold icon 9A is added, the leftmost hold icon (3 from the right). Second hold icon) The shape of 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the shape of the second hold icon 9A from the right changes from a round shape to a star shape, and as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the first one from the right (1). The shape of the hold icon 9A on the right side) changes from a round shape to a star shape. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E, when the fourth hold icon 9A is newly additionally displayed in a star shape, all the hold icons 9A displayed before the fourth hold icon 9A are displayed as 4 The shape changes from a round shape to a star shape in order from the side closest to the second hold icon. Here, the shapes of the three hold icons that have been displayed from the front are sequentially changed by the look-ahead at the time of winning corresponding to the fourth hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the round variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the four star-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A is the variable icon display area (the hold display area and the hold digestion image display area). ) To become the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. Here, along with the variable display of the decorative pattern, a mini-game image is produced in which a humanoid character catches a star-shaped icon falling from above. The shape (star shape) of the icon falling from above corresponds to the shape (star shape) of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. That is, at the time of fluctuation corresponding to the star-shaped fluctuation icon (during the pending digestion of the star-shaped fluctuation icon), the mini-game effect in which the star-shaped icon falls is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. When a humanoid character catches four star-shaped icons in a mini-game, the same number of points as the caught icon is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of points is represented by the number of black stars. Here, a prize is generated for the fixed winning device (navel) 19 of the game ball during this fluctuation, and the fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, it is newly displayed after the star-shaped hold icon (the star-shaped hold icon 9A in FIG. 50 (B) and the third hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50 (H)) that is the target of pre-reading. The hold icon is represented by a circle.

As shown in FIG. 50 (I), one round and three star-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star) is the variable icon display area (the hold display). Move to the area) and become the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. When the fluctuation is started, the production of the mini-game image similar to that in FIG. 50 (G) is executed. That is, since the time of change corresponding to the star-shaped variable icon 9C is performed this time as well, a mini-game effect in which the star-shaped icon corresponding to the variable icon and the shape falls is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. If the doll character fails to catch the star-shaped icon (catch 0) in the mini-game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a do not change. That is, the number of black stars does not change. Here, a prize is generated for the fixed winning device (navel) 19 of the game ball during this fluctuation, and the fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the hold icon newly displayed after the star-shaped hold icon (the second hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50 (J)) that is the target of the look-ahead is represented by a circle shape. It becomes the second round hold icon.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the two round and two star-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star) is the variable icon display area (the rightmost hold icon 9A (star)). Move to the hold display area) and become the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. When the fluctuation is started, the production of the mini-game image similar to that in FIG. 50 (G) is executed. That is, since the time of change corresponding to the star-shaped variable icon 9C is performed this time as well, a mini-game effect in which the star-shaped icon corresponding to the variable icon and the shape falls is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. When the doll character catches two icons in the mini game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a are increased by two to 6. That is, the number of black stars stored is six. Here, a prize is generated for the fixed winning device (navel) 19 of the game ball during this fluctuation, and the fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, since the hold icon newly displayed after the star-shaped hold icon (the first hold icon 9A in FIG. 51 (B)) that is the target of pre-reading is represented by a circle shape, there are three. It becomes a hold icon with a round eye shape.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the three round and one star-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star) is the variable icon display area (the rightmost hold icon 9A (star)). It moves to the hold display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. That is, the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead becomes a variable icon, and the corresponding variation is started. When the fluctuation is started, an icon image ICG larger than the hold icon 9C imitating the round hold icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, six black star-shaped images representing points move toward the icon image ICG and are absorbed by the icon image ICG. The color of the icon image ICG changes in order according to the number of absorbed black star-shaped images. The order in which the colors change is from the color with the lowest expectation of the jackpot to the color with the highest expectation. For example, the order is blue → green → red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a higher expectation of a jackpot as the number of absorbed black star-shaped images increases.

As shown in FIG. 51 (D), the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed when the absorption of the point (black star-shaped image) is completed. Here, a prize is generated for the game ball during this fluctuation, and the fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the hold icon newly displayed after the star-shaped hold icon (variable icon 9C in FIG. 51 (D)) that is the target of pre-reading is represented by a round shape, and therefore is a fourth round shape. Becomes a hold icon.

The icon image ICG moves while being reduced and comes into contact with the variable icon 9C to become the variable icon 9C as shown in FIG. 51 (E). After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (F), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variation corresponding to the variation icon 9C ends.

In FIG. 51 (G), the four round hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (round) moves to the variable icon display area (the hold display area) and changes. Icon 9C. At the same time, while the next fluctuation is started, the production of the mini-game image is not executed. That is, since this time the fluctuation corresponds to the round variable icon 9C, the mini-game effect in which the star-shaped icon whose shape does not correspond to the variable icon falls is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 51 (H), the shapes of the three hold icons 9A change from a round shape to a star shape all at once (simultaneously) at a specific timing during fluctuation. After that, when the game ball wins during this fluctuation, the fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side as shown in FIG. 51 (I). At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a round shape. That is, the hold icon newly displayed after the shape of the hold icon 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape all at once is represented by a round shape. After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the round variable icon 9C disappears.

[Hold icon switching effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon switching effect B. The hold icon switching effect is an effect in which the modes of a plurality of hold icons are switched. The mode of the hold icon includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon. In the hold icon switching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the normal state, the three hold icons 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) are displayed. ) 9C is displayed. The three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C all have a round shape (spherical shape).

In this state, when the game ball wins the fixed winning device (navel) 19, a new fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side as shown in FIG. 52 (B). At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a shape representing the Roman character "G". At the same time as the new display of the fourth hold icon 9A, the shape of all other hold icons 9A changes from a round shape to a G shape. Here, the shapes of the three hold icons that have been displayed from the front change at the same time depending on the look-ahead at the time of winning corresponding to the fourth hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the round variable icon 9C disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), the four G-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A is the variable icon display area (the hold display area and the hold digestion image display area). ) To become the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. Here, along with the variable display of the decorative pattern, the production of the battle image between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is executed. The name of the ally character CRA (here, "GORO") corresponds to the shape (G shape) of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. That is, when the variation corresponding to the G-shaped variation icon, the image related to this "G" (here, G is included in the name of the ally character CRA) is displayed (including the ally character CRA). Battle production) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the ally character CRA wins (wins) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins (points) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of wins (points) is represented by the number of black stars. Here, a prize is generated for the fixed winning device (navel) 19 of the game ball during this fluctuation, and the fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the hold icon newly displayed after the G-shaped hold icon (the third hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52 (E)) that is the target of pre-reading is represented by a circle shape.

As shown in FIG. 52 (F), one round shape and three G-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G shape) is a variable icon display area (the hold display). Move to the area) and become the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. When the fluctuation is started, the same battle image production as in FIG. 52 (D) is executed. That is, since the fluctuation time corresponding to the G-shaped variable icon 9C is performed this time as well, the effect that the variable icon and the corresponding image appear is executed. That is, a battle effect in which the ally character CRA of the name "GORO" including the Roman character "G" represented by the variable icon appears is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, if the ally character CRA loses (defeats) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a does not change. That is, the number of black stars does not change. Here, a prize is generated for the fixed winning device (navel) 19 of the game ball during this fluctuation, and the fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the hold icon newly displayed after the G-shaped hold icon (the second hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52 (G)) that is the target of pre-reading is represented by a circle shape. It becomes the second round hold icon.

Subsequently, the two round and two G-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shape) moves to the variable icon display area (the pending display area) and changes. Icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. When the fluctuation is started, the same battle image production as in FIG. 52 (D) is executed. That is, since the fluctuation time corresponding to the G-shaped variable icon 9C is performed this time as well, the effect that the variable icon and the corresponding image appear is executed. That is, a battle effect in which the ally character CRA of the name "GORO" including the Roman character "G" represented by the variable icon appears is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the ally character CRA wins (wins) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a increases by one to two. That is, the number of black stars stored is six.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 52 (I), the two round and one G-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shape) is the variable icon display area ( It moves to the hold display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. That is, the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead becomes a variable icon, and the corresponding variation is started. When the fluctuation is started, an icon image ICG larger than the hold icon 9C imitating the round hold icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, two black star-shaped images representing the number of wins move toward the icon image ICG and are absorbed by the icon image ICG. The color of the icon image ICG changes in order according to the number of absorbed black star-shaped images. The order in which the colors change is from the color with the lowest expectation of the jackpot to the color with the highest expectation. For example, the order is blue → green → red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a higher expectation of a jackpot as the number of absorbed black star-shaped images increases.

As shown in FIG. 52 (J), the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed when the absorption of the point (black star-shaped image) is completed. The icon image ICG moves while being reduced and comes into contact with the variable icon 9C to become the variable icon 9C.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon switching effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 (C) to 50 (E), the first effect in which the three round-shaped hold icons 9A are switched from the round shape to the star shape, and the first effect. After the effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (H), a new round-shaped hold icon is additionally displayed in the second effect, and after the second effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), is added. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the displayed round hold icon, the three star-shaped hold icons, and the shift movement are performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), in the first effect, the three round-shaped hold icons are changed from the round shape to G at the timing when a new hold icon is additionally displayed. Switch to shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 51, in the first effect, the three round-shaped hold icons are changed from a round shape to a star shape by pre-reading corresponding to the new hold icon. It will switch and a new hold icon will also be displayed in a star shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 (G) to (J) and 51 (A) to (B), after the third effect, the star-shaped hold icon is held and digested. During the fluctuation, a fourth effect using the image corresponding to the image represented by the star-shaped hold icon is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 (C) to 51 (E), in the fourth effect, points are accumulated during a plurality of fluctuations, and the last of the star-shaped hold icons is accumulated. During the change corresponding to the hold icon, the last hold icon is changed to the mode corresponding to the accumulated points. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 (H), (J), 51 (B), and (D), if there is a new prize during the fourth production, a new prize is created. According to this configuration in which the hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved by the novel production which has not been performed in the past. The same applies to FIG. 52.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon switching effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon switching effect A, as shown in FIGS. 50 (A) to 50 (E), when the fourth hold icon 9A is newly additionally displayed in a star shape, all the holds displayed before that are held. It is assumed that the icon 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape, while the variable icon 9C does not change. However, in FIGS. 50 (A) to 50 (E), the fourth hold icon 9A is newly additionally displayed in a star shape, and all the hold icons 9A displayed before that are changed from a round shape to a star shape. When doing so, the variable icon 9C may also change to a star shape. The same applies to the hold icon switching effect B (FIG. 52).

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon switching effect A, as shown in FIGS. 50 (A) to 50 (E), when the fourth hold icon 9A is newly additionally displayed in a star shape, all the holds displayed before that are held. It is assumed that the icon 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape. However, in FIGS. 50 (A) to 50 (E), the fourth hold icon 9A is newly additionally displayed as a circle, then changes to a star shape, and then all displayed before that. The hold icon 9A may change from a round shape to a star shape. The same applies to the hold icon switching effect B (FIG. 52). In FIG. 52, the fourth hold icon 9A is newly additionally displayed as a circle, and then all the hold icons 9A including the newly added hold icon change from a circle shape to a star shape all at once (simultaneously). You may.

[Modification 3]
The hold icon switching effects A and B are assumed to be executed in the normal state. However, the hold icon switching effects A and B may be executed in the time saving state. In this case, the effect executed by the hold icon 9A of the hold icon switching effects A and B may be executed by the hold icon 9B.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
A first effect in which the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first aspect to the second aspect, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which a new hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed, and
After the second effect, a third effect in which the hold icon of the first aspect and the plurality of hold icons of the second aspect that are additionally displayed are shifted and moved can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
In the first effect, the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first aspect to the second aspect at the timing when a new hold icon is additionally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-2.
In the first effect, the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first aspect to the second aspect by the look-ahead corresponding to the new hold icon, and the new hold icon is also the second aspect. Displayed in,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
After the third effect, during the plurality of variations corresponding to the hold digestion of the plurality of hold icons of the second aspect, the image corresponding to the image represented by the hold icon of the second aspect is used. The production of 4 is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-4.
In the fourth effect, points are accumulated during the plurality of fluctuations, and the last hold icon is accumulated during the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold icon among the plurality of hold icons of the second aspect. Change to the mode corresponding to the point
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-4 or the aspect A1-5.
If there is a new prize during the fourth effect, a new hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the change icon acquisition effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In FIGS. 53 to 55, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. It is omitted from the above.

This change icon acquisition effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by decorative symbols. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command) and includes an instruction to execute a change icon acquisition effect, the ROM 103. The corresponding image data is read from from and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image (referred to as "specific background image") used in the change icon acquisition effect is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image, and is, for example, a specific image such as a moon surface image, a space image, or an image inside a spacecraft. It has become. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, and an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a moving image.

Here, the change icon acquisition effect A will be described first, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C will be described in order.

[Change icon acquisition effect A]
The change icon acquisition effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect A. The change icon acquisition effect A is performed over a plurality of variation effects (variation display) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal direction). It is larger than the distance dimension (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 53 (A), the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and the change icon acquisition effect A is started by the look-ahead effect, FIG. 53 (B). ), The variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed, and the peripheral area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). Since the game ball enters the first starting port 20, there are two hold icons 9A.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 53 (B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image represented by white lines only at the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 53 (C). It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 53B, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The shapes of the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 53 (C), while the rectangular image is arranged below. In addition, only the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are represented by white lines.

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of the specific display positions used as the effect in the change icon acquisition effect A, and the flash. By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the FH is displayed and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed so as to be different. It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. It should be noted that the start of the change icon acquisition effect A can be notified to the player by changing the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad.

Further, before the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 53 (B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed. The variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in the above are, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), an effect button image (state in which the effect button 63 is turned off) imitating the effect button 63. This effect button image is an image that urges the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, does not indicate the degree of expectation of a hit, and is a specific icon used as an effect in the change icon acquisition effect A. That is, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition effect A.

In FIG. 53C, the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the like. When is changed, the message MG1 "Press the button to acquire the change icon!" Is displayed in one line on the display screen 7a in small letters above the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. At this point, all the effect button images of the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are turned off, and even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, it is not reflected in the effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". When the display is stopped, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. In FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (D), the city image THG1 is usually displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as a specific background image, and is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 53 (E). When the hold icon 9A that has been held moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the effect button image that is the variable icon 9C blinks, and the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation). Tells that is valid and prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. At this time, the message MG1 "Press the button to get the change icon!" Is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a with large characters (about four times the size of the small characters) in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are changed at high speed ( (Variable display). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the fluctuation are difficult to see.

After that, the message MG1 "Press the button to get the change icon!" With the large characters (about 4 times the size of the small characters) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is displayed this time. It moves to the upper right corner of the screen 7a while being reduced, and is displayed in two lines in a size smaller than a large character and larger than a small character (about twice the size of a large tree of a small character). As described above, as the display mode of the message MG1, the small characters shown in FIG. 53 (C) are displayed in one line, and the large characters (about 4 compared to the size of the small characters) shown in FIG. 53 (E). One that is displayed in two lines (double the size) and one that is displayed in two lines after Fig. 53 (E) in a size larger than the small characters (about twice the size of a large tree with small characters). There are three display modes in total, and the content of the message MG1 is played by an unprecedented expression method in which the same content is represented by three display modes when the change icon acquisition effect A is performed. It can be emphasized and communicated to people in an easy-to-understand manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53 (F), when the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), or the player does not operate the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the effect button 63 is not operated (pressed operation) for a predetermined period (for example, the left decorative symbol). After 3 seconds have passed since 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R started the variable effect (variable display), a message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon was acquired is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. NS. Here, the change icon cannot be acquired and the message MG2 "Sorry!" Is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display).

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the effect button image which is the change icon 9C blinks. It informs the player that the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is effective, and prompts the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely produced (variable display) at high speed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53 (G), when the player operates the effect button 63 (pressing operation), or the player does not operate the effect button 63 (pressing operation), the effect button 63 is not operated (pressed operation) for a predetermined period (for example, the left decorative symbol). After 3 seconds have passed since 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R started variable effect (variable display), the message MG2 telling whether or not the change icon was acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Will be done. Here, the change icon can be acquired and the message MG2 "Acquired!" Is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are still varied at high speed (variable display), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 53 (H). After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (I), the white spherical icon displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light. Then, by activating the stocked change icon HI, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward this appearing white spherical icon, and the size of this appearing white spherical icon increases and is displayed as an icon at the maximum. Compared to the size of the white spherical icon that was used, it is about four times as large.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a, the white spherical icon is switched to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the star-shaped icon blinks. The effect button image, which is the variation icon 9C, is displayed, and the variation icon 9C is reduced and moved toward the variation display position 9Cd.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (K), the effect button image which is the variable icon 9C is switched to the star-shaped icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold in which the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines. The display position 9Ad and disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Although the star-shaped icon is reduced during movement, it is larger than the size of the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 53 (a), and is about 1.5 times larger. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (L), the moon image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image as the normal background image). The THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to the original variable region. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the change icon acquisition effect A ends. After the change icon acquisition effect A, various effects may be continued. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then. While the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is out of order.

[Change icon acquisition effect B]
Next, the change icon acquisition effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect B. The change icon acquisition effect B is performed over a plurality of variation effects (variation display) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal direction). It is larger than the distance dimension (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 54 (A), the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and the change icon acquisition effect B is started by the look-ahead effect, FIG. 54 (B). ), The variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed, and the peripheral area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). Since the game ball enters the first starting port 20, there are two hold icons 9A.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 54 (B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image represented by white lines only at the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 54 (C). It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 54B, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The shapes of the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 54 (C), while the rectangular image is arranged below. In addition, only the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are represented by white lines.

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of the specific display positions used as the effect in the change icon acquisition effect B, and the flash. By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the FH is displayed and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed so as to be different. It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. It should be noted that the start of the change icon acquisition effect B can also be notified to the player by changing the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad.

Further, before the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 54 (B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed. As shown in FIG. 54 (C), the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in the above are sword images imitating the sword member 65, and are specific icons used as an effect in the change icon acquisition effect B. That is, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the change icon acquisition effect B. Although the sword image imitates the sword member 65, even if the player pushes the sword member 65, it is not reflected in the effect in the change icon acquisition effect B.

In FIG. 54 (C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the like. When is changed, the message MG1 "Repel and acquire the change icon!" Is displayed in one line on the display screen 7a in small letters above the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". When the display is stopped, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. In FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (D), the city image THG1 is usually displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as a specific background image, and is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 54 (E). When the holding icon 9A that had been held moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a large character (about four times the size of a small character) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to "repel". The message MG1 "Get the change icon!" Is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a, and the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and left. The decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely produced (variable display) at high speed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the fluctuation are difficult to see.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight, and after that, the large characters (about four times the size of the small characters) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a are displayed. The message MG1 "Repel and get the change icon!" Moves to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced to a smaller size than a large character and a larger size than a small character (compared to a large tree with a small character). It is about twice as large) and is displayed in two lines. As described above, as the display mode of the message MG1, the small characters shown in FIG. 54 (C) are displayed in one line, and the large characters (about 4 compared to the size of the small characters) shown in FIG. 54 (E). One that is displayed in two lines (double the size) and one that is displayed in two lines after that in FIG. 54 (E) in a size larger than the small characters (about twice the size of a large tree with small characters). There are three display modes in total, and the content of the message MG1 is played by an unprecedented expression method in which the same content is represented by three display modes when the change icon acquisition effect B is performed. It can be emphasized and communicated to people in an easy-to-understand manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54 (F), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start the variable effect (variable display)) elapses. A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the change icon cannot be acquired, and the message MG2 "Sorry!" Is arranged on the left side of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display).

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are at high speed. It is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). As a result, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start the variable effect (variable display)) elapses. The message MG2 telling whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the change icon can be acquired, and the message MG2 "Acquire!" Is arranged on the left side of the ally character CRA and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are still varied at high speed (variable display), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 54 (H). After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (I), the white spherical icon displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light. Then, by activating the stocked change icon HI, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward this appearing white spherical icon, and the size of this appearing white spherical icon increases and is displayed as an icon at the maximum. Compared to the size of the white spherical icon that was used, it is about four times as large.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a and does not switch from the white spherical icon to another icon, that is, the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 54 (a). It becomes the same as the icon of, and the change of the icon fails, and this white spherical icon moves while reducing toward the variable display position 9Cd where the sword image which is the variable icon 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (K), the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is switched to a white spherical icon reduced to the original size. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold in which the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines. The display position 9Ad and disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (L), the moon image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image as the normal background image). The THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to the original variable region. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the change icon acquisition effect B ends. After the change icon acquisition effect B, various effects may be continued. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then. While the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is out of order.

[Change icon acquisition effect C]
Next, the change icon acquisition effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect B. The change icon acquisition effect C is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal direction). It is larger than the distance dimension (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold icon 9A is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there are three stocked icons.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 55 (A), the game ball enters the first start port 20, and the change icon acquisition effect C is started by the look-ahead effect, FIG. 55 (B). ), The variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed, and the peripheral area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). Since the game ball has entered the first starting port 20, there are four hold icons 9A.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 55 (B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image represented by white lines only at the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 55 (C). It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 55B, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The shapes of the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 55 (C), while the rectangular image is arranged below. In addition, only the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are represented by white lines.

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of the specific display positions used as the effect in the change icon acquisition effect C, and the flash. By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the FH is displayed and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed so as to be different. It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. It should be noted that the start of the change icon acquisition effect C can be notified to the player by changing the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad.

Further, before the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 55 (B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed. As shown in FIG. 55 (C), the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in the above are sword images imitating the sword member 65, and are specific icons used as an effect in the change icon acquisition effect C. That is, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition effect C. Although the sword image imitates the sword member 65, even if the player pushes the sword member 65, it is not reflected in the effect in the change icon acquisition effect C.

In FIG. 55 (C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, and the like. When is changed, the message MG1 "Repel and acquire the change icon!" Is displayed in one line on the display screen 7a in small letters above the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". When the display is stopped, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. In FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (D), the city image THG1 is usually displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as a specific background image, and is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 55 (E). When the holding icon 9A that had been held moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a large character (about four times the size of a small character) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to "repel". The message MG1 "Get the change icon!" Is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a, and the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and left. The decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely produced (variable display) at high speed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the fluctuation are difficult to see.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight, and after that, the large characters (about four times the size of the small characters) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a are displayed. The message MG1 "Repel and get the change icon!" Moves to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced to a smaller size than a large character and a larger size than a small character (compared to a large tree with a small character). It is about twice as large) and is displayed in two lines. As described above, as the display mode of the message MG1, the small characters shown in FIG. 55 (C) are displayed in one line, and the large characters (about 4 compared to the size of the small characters) shown in FIG. 55 (E). It is displayed in two lines (double the size) and in two lines after Fig. 55 (E) in a size larger than the small characters (about twice the size of a large tree with small characters). There are three display modes in total, and the content of the message MG1 is played by an unprecedented expression method in which the same content is represented by three display modes when the change icon acquisition effect C is performed. It can be emphasized and communicated to people in an easy-to-understand manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start the variable effect (variable display)) elapses. A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the change icon cannot be acquired, and the message MG2 "Sorry!" Is arranged on the left side of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display).

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are at high speed. It is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). As a result, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (G), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start the variable effect (variable display)) elapses. The message MG2 telling whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the change icon can be acquired, and the message MG2 "Acquire!" Is arranged on the left side of the ally character CRA and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display).

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 55 (H), and subsequently displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad. When the reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variable-produced (variable display) at high speed. As a result, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (I), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start the variable effect (variable display)) elapses. The message MG2 telling whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the change icon cannot be acquired, and the message MG2 "Sorry!" Is arranged on the left side of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display).

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are at high speed. It is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). As a result, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (J), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start the variable effect (variable display)) elapses. The message MG2 telling whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the change icon can be acquired, and the message MG2 "Acquire!" Is arranged on the left side of the ally character CRA and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are still varied at high speed (variable display), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, another change icon HI is stocked above the change icon HI already stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55 (K). It is displayed, and the change icons HI and HI are arranged side by side in two, and after that, the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon becomes about 1.5 times larger in size and with a flash of light. Appears in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, by activating the two change icons HI and HI that are arranged side by side and stocked, the two change icons HI and HI that are arranged side by side and lightning bolt toward the white spherical icon that appeared. The size of the white spherical icon that appeared becomes larger, and at the maximum, it is about four times as large as the size of the white spherical icon displayed as an icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (L), the two change icons HI and HI arranged side by side disappear from the display screen 7a, and the white spherical icon is switched to the smiling sphere icon having red and appears. Then, the smiling sphere icon blinks and moves toward the variable display position 9Cd where the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is displayed while reducing the size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (M), the sword image which is the variable icon 9C is switched to the icon of a smiling sphere. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold in which the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines. The display position 9Ad and disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Although the icon of the smiling sphere is reduced during movement, it is larger than the size of the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 55 (a), and is about 1.5 times larger. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (N), the moon image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image as the normal background image). The THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to the original variable region. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the change icon acquisition effect C ends. After the change icon acquisition effect C, various effects may be continued. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then. While the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is out of order.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the change icon acquisition effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 20 (entrance port) and an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images are provided, and are related to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 (entrance port). With the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A as the same specific icon, the change icon acquisition effect A can execute a look-ahead effect of switching to an effect button image imitating the effect button 63 and displaying the change icon acquisition effects B and C. Then, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that switches to a sword image that imitates the sword member 65 and displays it. The first effect in which HI can be acquired (FIGS. 53 (F) and (G) in the change icon acquisition effect A, FIGS. 54 (F) and (G) in the change icon acquisition effect B, and FIG. 55 in the change icon acquisition effect C). (F), (G), (J)) can be executed. According to this configuration, by switching the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A to the same specific icon, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the hold icon 9A with respect to the digestion mode, and the degree of expectation of winning can be reduced. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to acquire the changeable icon HI that can be changed (up possible). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. It has become like. According to this configuration, even if a single or a plurality of hold icons 9A exist, the first effect can be executed. If there is one or more hold icons 9A, the first effect can be executed. Therefore, even if there is only one hold icon 9A, the player is expected to win. It is possible to continue to give the expectation of an opportunity to acquire the change icon HI that can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the number of hold icons 9A.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55, the number of specific icons changes. You can get an opportunity to get Icon HI. According to this configuration, since it is possible to obtain an opportunity to acquire the change icon HI by the number of specific icons, the degree of expectation of winning due to the occurrence of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of up. It should be noted that the number of hold icons 9A (that is, the number of specific icons) and the number of changeable icons that can be acquired do not have to match, even when only one hold icon 9A exists. When the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C are performed, the change icon may not be acquired, or one change icon may be acquired. Sometimes you can get two change icons, and sometimes you can get three change icons.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the first effect, the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55. When the variable icon 9C switched to the specific icon is digested and disappears at the end of the variable effect (variable display), the hold icon 9A switched to the specific icon is displayed in a certain direction (the variable display displaying the variable icon 9C). It is possible to shift and move toward the position 9Cd). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually tell the player how the number of specific icons is decreasing and to inform the player of the remaining number of opportunities to acquire the changing icon.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the first effect, the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55. The change icon HI cannot be acquired during the change effect (during the change display) at the time when the look-ahead effect switches the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A to the specific icon. Although the variable icon 9C may be used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) during the variable effect (during the variable display), the variable icon 9C in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is It is not a notice for the variable effect (during the variable display), but is also used as a notice to notify the start of the first effect (that is, in the next variable effect (next variable display)), and in this respect, the variable effect is being performed. It is different from the one that uses the fluctuation icon 9C as a notice for (during variable display).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55, the icon is switched to a specific icon. When the hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C and the variable effect (variable display) is started, the change icon HI can be acquired during the variable effect (during the variable display), and the acquired change icon HI can be stocked. It has become. According to this configuration, the acquired change icon HI is not immediately digested at the time of acquisition, but is stocked, so that the player can grasp the number of acquired change icon HI and the stocked change. Expectations for the effect of activating Icon HI, that is, expectations for increasing the expectation of winning, will increase.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55, the first effect is achieved. A second effect (FIG. 53 (I) in FIG. 53 (I) in the change icon acquisition effect A) is to switch from the change icon 9C, in which a lightning bolt is emitted from the change icon HI stocked by the above, to an icon that suggests the degree of expectation of a hit. FIG. 54 (I) can be executed in the change icon acquisition effect B, and FIG. 55 (K) can be executed in the change icon acquisition effect C. According to this configuration, when the second effect is performed, the effect of activating the already stocked change icon HI is exhibited, so that the player can increase the number of stocked change icon HI and the expectation of hitting. You can find the relationship (law) by yourself.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the change icon acquisition effect.
[Modification 1]
The change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and is started by the look-ahead effect. However, it may be decided whether or not to perform by an original lottery by the sub control board 90 without using the look-ahead effect. In this case, in order to execute one of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C over a plurality of variation effects (variation display) by the decorative symbol, the sub control board. In 90, it is necessary to adjust the progress of the change icon acquisition effect in real time in consideration of the effect time indicated by the variation effect start command from the main control board 80.

[Modification 3]
In the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, the change icon HI was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, it may be displayed on the display screen of another image display device provided separately from the image display device 7. The other image display device may be provided on the game board 2 together with the image display device 7, or may be provided on the front frame 53. By doing so, since there are a plurality of image display devices, it is possible to increase the variation in the display mode by the plurality of image display devices.

[Modification 4]
In the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, the change icon HI was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the game board 2 or the front frame 53 is provided with a plurality of structures having a three-dimensional shape imitating a change icon, and the number of change icons acquired by the number of light emitted by this structure is transmitted to the player. You may do it.

[Modification 5]
In the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55, lightning is emitted from the stocked change icon HI and disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Was there. At this time, the stocked change icon HI may disappear from the display screen 7a depending on the display mode in which it explodes due to the lightning emitted by itself, or the stocked change icon HI runs out of energy due to the lightning emitted by itself and its own structure is destroyed. It may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display mode in which it peels off into pieces.

[Modification 6]
In the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are all white spheres with the lowest expectation of hitting. It was supposed to be done when it was an icon. However, for example, it may be performed when the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are different icons. For example, when the variable icon 9C is a smiling sphere icon and the hold icon 9A is a white spherical icon, one of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C is performed. You may. This is because the variable icon 9C may be used as a notice for the variable effect (during the variable display) (“change effect” that changes the display mode), but is used as a notice during the variable effect (during the variable display). Instead, it is used as a notice to notify the start of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C that are started in the next variation display (next variation display).

[Modification 7]
The change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55 do not have to include a part of the described effects, and other effects are added. You may.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
It is a gaming machine provided with an entrance for a gaming ball and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect in which the variable icon and the hold icon are switched to the same specific icon and displayed in connection with the entry of the game ball into the entrance.
When switched to the specific icon, it is possible to display a change icon that can change the degree of expectation of a hit and execute the first effect that can acquire the change icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
The hold icon may be single or multiple.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1 or the aspect A2-2.
In the first effect, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to acquire the change icon by the number of the specific icons.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3.
In the first effect, when the variable icon switched to the specific icon is digested and disappears at the end of the variable effect, the hold icon switched to the specific icon shifts in a certain direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4.
In the first effect, the change icon cannot be acquired during the variation effect at the time when the look-ahead effect switches the change icon and the hold icon to the specific icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5.
In the first effect, when the hold icon switched to the specific icon becomes the variable icon and the variable effect is started, the change icon can be acquired during the variable effect, and the acquired change icon is stocked. do,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-6.
After the first effect, a lightning bolt is emitted from the change icon stocked by the first effect, and the variable icon switched to the specific icon is switched to an icon suggesting a hit expectation. It is possible to perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the hold icon movement change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. This hold icon movement change effect can be executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon movement change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect A. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which the mode changes while the image representing the hold icon moves. The aspect here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), in the normal state, during the change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon (change) are displayed. Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are collectively referred to as “hold icons 9A, 9C”. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 56B, the character image of "pending change pseudo-continuous start !!" is displayed on the display screen 7a at a certain timing during the fluctuation. At the same time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (they are not displayed). After that, as shown in FIG. 56C, the hold icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The first position is located to the left of the reserved display area. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6 ↓ 6".

As shown in FIG. 56 (D), the hold icon 9C moves from the first position toward the hold display area in the right direction. As for the decorative symbol in the reach state, the character image of "pending change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative symbol 8C. The color of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of the "hold change". That is, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped instead of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-continuous production, the mode of the hold icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the hold icon 9C changes. The order in which the colors of the hold icon 9C change is from the color with the lowest expectation of the jackpot to the color with the higher expectation. For example, the order is blue → green → red.

As shown in FIG. 56 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start to change again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at "567". This time, since the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not temporarily stopped by the character image of "hold change", the color of the hold icon 9C does not change. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right.

As shown in FIG. 56 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start re-variating as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the reach state of "3 ↓ 3", the character image of "pending change" is temporarily stopped in place of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon 9C change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of the "hold change". That is, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-continuous production, the color and shape of the hold icon 9C change to a mode with a higher degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 56 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start re-variating as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right, reaches the hold display area, and stops. That is, the hold icon 9C returns to the original position. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the mode of the jackpot of "333".

[Hold icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect B. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which the mode changes while the image representing the hold icon moves. The aspect here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), in the normal state, during the change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon (change) are displayed. Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are collectively referred to as “hold icons 9A, 9C”. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57 (B), a character image of "pending change pseudo-continuous start !!" is displayed on the display screen 7a at a certain timing during the fluctuation. At the same time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (they are not displayed). After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the hold icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, a specific image BG is newly displayed below the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, and the left end corresponds to the first position and the right end corresponds to the reserved display area. A new numerical image SG is displayed on the upper left of the hold icon 9C. The numerical image SG represents the remaining number of times of the pseudo-ream. Here, "4" is represented. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6 ↓ 6".

As shown in FIG. 57 (D), the hold icon 9C moves on the specific image BG from the left end to the right end. That is, it moves from the first position toward the reserved display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the hold icon 9C with respect to the specific image BG indicates (notifies) the remaining period during which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The numerical image SG moves with the movement of the hold icon 9C. That is, the numerical image SG moves while maintaining the same distance with respect to the holding icon 9C being moved. As for the decorative symbol in the reach state, the character image of "pending change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative symbol 8C. The color of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of the "hold change". That is, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped instead of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-continuous production, the mode of the hold icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the hold icon 9C changes. The order in which the colors of the hold icon 9C change is from the color with the lowest expectation of the jackpot to the color with the higher expectation. For example, the order is blue → green → red. The temporary stop of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C completes one of the pseudo-reams, and the numerical image SG changes from "4" to "3".

As shown in FIG. 57 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start re-variating as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5" and "7", and then temporarily stopped at the character image of "G!" Instead of the middle decorative symbol 8C. Along with the temporary stop of the character image of "Get points!", Black star-shaped points are displayed on the specific image BG. This black star-shaped point increases (accumulates) by one each time it is temporarily stopped with the character image of "Point get!" Instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C during the pseudo-ream period. Then, an effect using this point is executed at the time of the final fluctuation of the pseudo-people. The temporary stop of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C completes one of the pseudo-reams, and the numerical image SG changes from "3" to "2".

As shown in FIG. 57 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start to change again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state of "3 ↓ 3", the character image of "pending change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon 9C change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of the "hold change". That is, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-continuous production, the color and shape of the hold icon 9C change to a mode with a higher degree of expectation. The temporary stop of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C completes one of the pseudo-reams, and the numerical image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 57 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start re-variating as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right and stops there when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG. Almost at the same time, the specific image BG disappears. As a result, the hold icon 9C stops at the hold display area. That is, the hold icon 9C returns to the original position. Due to the final fluctuations of the pseudo-people, a production using the accumulated black star-shaped points is performed. Here, the black star-shaped points move while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed at the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the mode of the jackpot of "333".

[Hold icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect C. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which the mode changes while the image representing the hold icon moves. The aspect here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the normal state, during the change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon (change) are displayed. Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are collectively referred to as “hold icons 9A, 9C”. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), a character image of "pending change pseudo-continuous start !!" is displayed on the display screen 7a at a certain timing during the fluctuation. At the same time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the three hold icons 9A disappear (not displayed) from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the hold icon image 9D representing the hold icons 9A and 9C is newly displayed at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image 9D may be the hold icons 9A and 9C, or may be an image imitating the hold icons 9A and 9C. A new specific image BG is displayed below the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, and the left end corresponds to the first position and the right end corresponds to the reserved display area. A new numerical image SG is displayed on the upper left of the hold icon image 9D. A part of the numerical image SG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon image 9D. The numerical image SG represents the remaining number of times of the pseudo-ream. Here, "4" is represented. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6 ↓ 6".

As shown in FIG. 58 (D), the hold icon image 9D moves on the specific image BG from the left end to the right end. That is, it moves from the first position toward the reserved display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the hold icon image 9D with respect to the specific image BG indicates (notifies) the remaining period during which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The numeric image SG moves with the movement of the hold icon image 9D. That is, the numerical image SG moves in a state of being overlapped with the upper left of the moving hold icon image 9D. As for the decorative symbol in the reach state, the character image of "pending change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative symbol 8C. The color of the hold icon image 9D changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of the "hold change". That is, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped instead of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-continuous production, the mode of the hold icon image 9D changes. Here, the color of the hold icon image 9D changes. The order in which the colors of the hold icon image 9D change is from the color with the lowest expectation of the jackpot to the color with the higher expectation. For example, the order is blue → green → red. The temporary stop of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C completes one of the pseudo-reams, and the numerical image SG changes from "4" to "3".

As shown in FIG. 58 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start to change again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon image 9D continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5" and "7", and then temporarily stopped at the character image of "Point get!" Instead of the middle decorative symbol 8C. Along with the temporary stop of the character image of "Get points!", Black star-shaped points are displayed on the specific image BG. This black star-shaped point increases (accumulates) by one each time it is temporarily stopped with the character image of "Point get!" Instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C during the pseudo-ream period. Then, an effect using this point is executed at the time of the final fluctuation of the pseudo-people. The temporary stop of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C completes one of the pseudo-reams, and the numerical image SG changes from "3" to "2".

As shown in FIG. 58 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start to change again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon image 9D continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state of "3 ↓ 3", the character image of "pending change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon image 9D change according to the temporary stop of the character image of the "hold change". That is, when the character image of "hold change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo-continuous production, the color and shape of the hold icon image 9D change to a mode with a higher degree of expectation. The temporary stop of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C completes one of the pseudo-reams, and the numerical image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 58 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start to change again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon image 9D continues to move to the right and stops there when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG. Almost at the same time, the specific image BG disappears. Then, the hold icon 9C having the same aspect as the hold icon image 9D is displayed in the hold display area. That is, the effect is performed as if the hold icon 9C has returned to the original position. If the hold icon image 9D is the hold icon 9C itself, it means that the position has returned to the original position. Due to the final fluctuations of the pseudo-people, a production using the accumulated black star-shaped points is performed. Here, the black star-shaped points move while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed at the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the mode of the jackpot of "333".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon movement change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, a first effect in which the color of the hold icon 9C (an image representing the hold icon) changes while moving, and after the first effect. , The hold icon 9C in the changed color can be executed with the second effect displayed in the hold display area. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, after the first effect in which the color changes while the hold icon image 9D (image representing the hold icon) moves, and after the first effect. The hold icon image 9D of the changed color can be executed with the second effect displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (A), 57 (A), and 58 (A), the hold icon 9C (an image representing the hold icon) is used before the first effect. Can execute the third effect displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area), and after the third effect, the first effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the first effect, the hold icon 9C (image representing the hold icon) is the hold display area (variable icon) from the first position. Move toward the display area (display area, reserved digestion image display area). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the hold icon image 9D (image representing the hold icon) is the hold display area (variable icon display) from the first position. Move toward the area (reserved digestion image display area). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the first effect, a pseudo-continuous effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol 8C is replaced with the “pending change”. When the character image of "" is displayed, the color of the hold icon 9C (image representing the hold icon) changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, a pseudo-continuous effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol 8C is replaced with the “pending change”. When the character image of "" is displayed, the color of the hold icon 9D (the image representing the hold icon) changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first effect, the numerical image SG representing the remaining number of times of the pseudo-ream moves together with the hold icon 9C (the image showing the hold icon). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the numerical image SG representing the remaining number of times of the pseudo-ream moves together with the hold icon 9D (the image representing the hold icon). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first effect, the hold icon 9C (an image representing the hold icon) moves on the specific image BG, and the hold icon 9C is placed on the specific image BG. Depending on the display position of the icon 9C (an image representing the hold icon), the remaining period during which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is notified. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the hold icon 9D (an image representing the hold icon) moves on the specific image BG and with respect to the specific image BG. Depending on the display position of the hold icon 9D (image representing the hold icon), the remaining period during which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is notified. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon movement change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the color of the hold icon 9C is assumed to change while moving as an image representing the hold icon. However, in the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon whose color changes while moving may be an image (icon image) imitating the hold icon 9C instead of the hold icon 9C.

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the color of the hold icon 9C is assumed to change while moving as an image representing the hold icon. However, in the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon whose color changes while moving may be the hold icons 9A and 9B instead of the hold icon 9C. In this case, the hold icons 9A and 9B may be configured to face the hold image display area instead of the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) from the first position. ..

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon 9C whose color changes while moving and the hold icon 9C displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) are the same. It does not have to be. That is, the hold icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a once when moving from the hold display area or when arriving at the hold display area, and is displayed during movement and in the hold display area. The size, shape, and color may change depending on the time of arrival, and the position may shift slightly before and after arrival.

[Modification 4]
The hold icon movement change effects A to C are assumed to be executed in the normal state. However, the hold icon movement change effects A to C may be executed in the time saving state. In this case, the hold icon C of the hold icon movement change effects A to C may move to the right and then to the left.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an image representing a hold icon.
The first effect that the color changes while the image representing the hold icon moves,
A gaming machine characterized in that after the first effect, an image representing the hold icon in a changed color can perform a second effect displayed in the hold icon display area.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1.
Prior to the first effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which an image representing the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is executed after the third effect.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1 or the aspect A3-2.
In the first effect, the image representing the hold icon moves from a first position different from the hold icon display area toward the hold icon display area.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
In the first effect, a pseudo-continuous effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and when a predetermined image is displayed in place of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the color of the image representing the hold icon changes. A featured gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-4.
In the first effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that an image showing the remaining number of times of pseudo-ream moves together with an image showing the hold icon.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-4 or the aspect A3-5.
In the first effect, the image representing the hold icon moves on the specific image, and the display position of the image representing the hold icon with respect to the specific image informs the remaining period during which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized by doing.

Hereinafter, the specific icon stock effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. In FIGS. 59 to 61, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. It is omitted from the above.

This specific icon stock effect is one of a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects, and the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times during the variable effect (during the variable display). It is something that is said. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a specific icon stock effect, the corresponding image is taken from the ROM 103. The data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image (referred to as "specific background image") used in the specific icon stock effect is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image, and is, for example, a specific image such as a moon surface image, a space image, or an image inside a spacecraft. It has become. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, and an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a moving image.

Here, first, the specific icon stock effect A will be described, and then the specific icon stock effect B and the specific icon stock effect C will be described in order.

[Specific icon stock production A]
The specific icon stock effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect A. The specific icon stock effect A is one of a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects, and the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times during the variable effect (during the variable display). It is something that is said.

First, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and so on. The right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed. The decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is varied and produced (variable display) in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. It will be started. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 59 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2". , The right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as a specific background image, and is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A that had been moved to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C, a numerical image (here, numerical value 4) 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C. In the display mode, the message MG1 "Stock the icon!" Is displayed in one line in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a.

The size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the numerical image 9Cz may be the same, or one of them may be large. Further, when the numerical image 9Cz is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the numerical image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C from the visibility of the numerical image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream. That is, in the variable effect (variable display) at this point in time, the player is informed that the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed for the remaining four times.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the first (first) decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) by the pseudo-ream starts, and the variable effect (variable display) by the first (first) decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream disappears. ) Is started, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), after that, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right. The decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. It becomes. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed three times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the second variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is started, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" as shown in FIG. 59 (D), and the right decoration is displayed. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the fluctuation area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the change icon HI is activated in order to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the white spherical change icon 9C does not change to an icon having another shape due to this collision, and the change of the change icon 9C fails.

As shown in FIG. 59 (F), the change of the variable icon 9C fails, the second variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream ends, and the numerical image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C is a number from the number 3. It becomes 2. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed for the remaining two times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the third decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is started, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decoration is displayed. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", the change icon HI reappears as a specific icon from the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the change icon HI is activated in order to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the white spherical change icon 9C does not change to an icon having another shape due to this collision, and the change of the change icon 9C fails again.

As shown in FIG. 59 (I), the change of the variation icon 9C fails, the variation effect (variation display) by the third decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C is a number from the number 2. It becomes 1. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is performed only once in the variation effect (variation display).

When the fourth (last) decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is started, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5". , The middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the fourth (last) decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is displayed. After finishing, as shown in FIG. 59 (K), the moon image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city as the normal background image). The image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image), the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (L), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "7". It is stopped and displayed, and as a result, the white spherical variable icon 9C that could not be changed from the white spherical icon to another icon in the specific icon stock effect A disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific icon stock production B]
Next, the specific icon stock effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect B. The specific icon stock effect B is one of a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects, and the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times during the variable effect (during the variable display). It is something that is said.

First, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and so on. The right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed. The decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is varied and produced (variable display) in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. It will be started. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 60 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2". , The right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as a specific background image, and is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A that had been moved to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C, a numerical image (here, numerical value 4) 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C. In the display mode, the message MG1 "Stock the icon!" Is displayed in one line in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the numerical image 9Cz may be the same, or one of them may be large. Further, when the numerical image 9Cz is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the numerical image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C from the visibility of the numerical image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream. That is, in the variable effect (variable display) at this point in time, the player is informed that the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed for the remaining four times.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the first (first) decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) by the pseudo-ream starts, and the variable effect (variable display) by the first (first) decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream disappears. ) Is started, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), after that, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right. The decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. It becomes. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed three times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the second variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is started, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" as shown in FIG. 60 (D), and the right decoration is displayed. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the fluctuation area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the change icon HI is activated in order to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When the change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the white spherical change icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the change icon 9C changes. It will be a success.

The change of the variation icon 9C becomes successful, the variation effect (variation display) by the second decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed for the remaining two times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the third decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is started, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decoration is displayed. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. In order to stock the battle effect icon AI without digesting it, FIG. 60 (H) ), The battle effect icon AI is displayed so as to pass between the right decorative symbol 8R on which the battle effect icon AI is temporarily stopped and the variable icon 9C, and a curve is drawn toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Move like. The battle effect icon AI suggests a battle effect that is developed (started and developed) after the end of the specific icon stock effect B, and in this battle effect, two characters (friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB) are used. It is a production that fights, and it is a production with high expectations for big hits.

When the battle effect icon AI moves to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the character image AIa having a predetermined color (for example, red) above the battle effect icon AI is on the left. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a downward tilt (upward tilt to the right) display mode, and the stock of the battle effect icon AI becomes successful.

The stock of the battle effect icon AI is successful, the second variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is performed only once in the variation effect (variation display).

When the fourth (last) decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) by the pseudo-ream is started, the character image AIa disappears from the display screen as shown in FIG. 60 (J), and then the left decorative symbol 8L appears. Temporary stop display is displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with the number "6", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "7", and the fourth (last) decoration by the pseudo-ream. After the variation effect (variation display) by the symbol is completed, as shown in FIG. 60 (K), the moon image THG2 is switched again to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a. (At this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image), the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (L), the fluctuation by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started again, and the stocked battle effect icon AI is activated to activate FIG. 60 (M). , (N), the battle effect is developed (started, developed), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C (in the present embodiment, the hold icon 9A does not exist at this point, but the hold icon 9A exists). In that case, the hold icon 9A also disappears from the display screen 7a, and when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R have the same symbol. When the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right are displayed. The decorative symbol 8R is not displayed as a stop with the same symbol, and is out of order. When the battle effect is completed and the jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. In the embodiment, although the hold icon 9A does not exist at this point, if the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A is also displayed again on the display screen 7a.

[Specific icon stock production C]
Next, the specific icon stock effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect C. The specific icon stock effect C is one of a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects, and the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times during the variable effect (during the variable display). It is something that is said.

First, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed. The decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is varied and produced (variable display) in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. It will be started. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 61 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2". , The right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 61B, the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as a specific background image, and is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A that had been moved to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C, a numerical image (here, numerical value 4) 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C. In the display mode, the message MG1 "Stock the icon!" Is displayed in one line in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the numerical image 9Cz may be the same, or one of them may be large. Further, when the numerical image 9Cz is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the numerical image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C from the visibility of the numerical image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream. That is, in the variable effect (variable display) at this point in time, the player is informed that the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed for the remaining four times.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the first (first) decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) by the pseudo-ream starts, and the variable effect (variable display) by the first (first) decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream disappears. ) Is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), after that, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right. The decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. It becomes. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed three times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the second variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is started, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" as shown in FIG. 61 (D), and the right decoration is displayed. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the fluctuation area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the change icon HI is activated in order to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When the change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the white spherical change icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the change icon 9C changes. It will be a success.

The change of the variation icon 9C becomes successful, the variation effect (variation display) by the second decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is continuously performed for the remaining two times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the third decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decoration is displayed. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the button effect icon BI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. In order to stock the button effect icon BI without digesting it, FIG. 61 (H). ), The button effect icon BI is displayed so as to pass between the right decorative symbol 8R on which the button effect icon BI is temporarily stopped and the variable icon 9C, and a curve is drawn toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Move like. The button effect icon BI suggests a button effect that is developed (started, developed) after the end of the specific icon stock effect C, and in this button effect, the player is required to operate (press) the effect button 63. It is a production that can intervene in the production that is urged and progresses to generate a change in the production image, and although the expectation of a big hit is low compared to the battle production described later, the player's production button 63 Since the effect image can be changed by the operation (pressing operation) of, the player can fully enjoy the sense of accomplishment for the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 due to the change in the effect image. It has become.

When the button effect icon BI moves to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the character image BIa having a predetermined color (for example, red) above the button effect icon BI is on the left. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a downward tilt (upward tilt to the right) display mode, and the stock of the button effect icon BI is successful.

The stock of the button effect icon BI is successful, and the second variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative symbol is performed only once in the variation effect (variation display).

When the fourth (last) decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) by the pseudo-ream is started, the character image BIA disappears from the display screen as shown in FIG. 61 (J), and then the left decorative symbol 8L appears. Temporary stop is displayed with the number "5", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "7", and the battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the battle effect icon AI is digested. Instead of stocking, the battle effect icon AI is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative symbol 8R on which the battle effect icon AI is temporarily stopped and the variable icon 9C. The button effect icon BI that is already in stock is moved upward in a curved line. The battle effect icon AI suggests a battle effect that is developed (started, developed) after the end of the specific icon stock effect C, and in this battle effect, two characters (friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB) are used. It is a production that fights, and it is a production with high expectations for big hits.

When the battle effect icon AI moves above the button effect icon BI, as shown in FIG. 61 (K), the character image AIa having a predetermined color (for example, red) above the battle effect icon AI is on the left. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in the display mode of downward inclination (upward right inclination), and the stock of the battle effect icon AI is successful.

After that, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7". The temporary stop is displayed at, and the fourth (last) decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) by the pseudo-ream is completed, and as shown in FIG. 61 (L), as a specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a. Switching from the lunar surface image THG2 to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image again (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as a normal background image), and the variable display position 9Cd. And the hold display position 9Ad is displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock effect C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (M), the variation due to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started again, and the button effect icon stocked first is first stocked in the order of stocking. By activating BI, as shown in FIG. 61 (N), the button effect is expanded (started, developed), and a large button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the button image BG is displayed. The message MG2 "Push!" Is displayed on the display screen 7a upward. As a result, the development (start, development) of the button effect is notified to the player, and the player is further urged to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. At this time, the button effect icon BI disappears from the display screen 7a, and instead of the button effect icon BI, the character "corner" image CI indicating the completion of activation is displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the button effect is completed, the battle effect is developed (started, developed), although not shown, by the activation of the second stocked battle effect icon AI. At this time, the battle effect icon AI disappears from the display screen 7a, and instead of the battle effect icon AI, the character "corner" image CI indicating the completion of activation is displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, the "corner" image CI is displayed in a state of being arranged side by side in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the battle production is developed (started, developed), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will fight. In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and after that, the jackpot game ( When the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol. It will be off.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the specific icon stock effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, an image display device capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. Equipped with 7 (display means), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect, and the change icon HI etc. is displayed as a specific icon that can change (up possible) the expectation of hitting each time a pseudo-ream is performed, and a specific icon is acquired. The first possible effect (FIGS. 59 (D) to (I) for the specific icon stock effect A, FIGS. 60 (D) to (J) for the specific icon stock effect B, and FIG. 61 (D) for the specific icon stock effect C). ~ (K)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to acquire a specific icon that can change (up) the expectation of hitting each time a pseudo-ream is performed, so it can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the production. It is possible to give the player the acquisition of a change icon HI or the like as a specific icon whose expectation of winning can be changed (up possible). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, when a specific icon is acquired as the specific icon. It is possible to include a first specific icon (change icon HI) that is digested in, and a second specific icon (battle production icon AI, etc.) that is stocked without being digested when a specific icon is acquired. There is. According to this configuration, the player does not know what kind of specific icon is displayed, and even if the specific icon stock effect is started, it is possible to predict the specific icon that will appear. Since it is not possible to do so, it is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the specific icon stock effect, and it is possible to increase the variation in the specific icon effect.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. 61, the first specific icon (change). When the icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode. According to this configuration, when the first specific icon (change icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode so that the degree of expectation can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the appearance of the first specific icon (change icon HI).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. When present, the reach by a plurality of symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is not formed. According to this configuration, by performing the pseudo-ream without forming a reach, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed with respect to the progress of the specific icon stock effect, and suppress the player's frustration with the pseudo-ream. Can contribute to doing so.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60 and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, when the pseudo-ream is completed and the first effect is completed, the stock is stocked by the first effect. Second effects related to the second specific icon (battle effect icon AI, button effect icon BI, etc.) (FIGS. 60 (G) to (J) for the specific icon stock effect B, FIG. 61 for the specific icon stock effect C). (G) to (K)) can be executed. According to this configuration, in the pseudo-ren, the period of the effect of stocking the second specific icon by the first effect, and in the end of the pseudo-ren, the period of the effect by activating the second specific icon stocked by the second effect. And, the player can experience continuously, and since other productions are continuously developed (started, developed) after the specific icon stock production, expectations for big hits for other productions are expected. The feeling can be enhanced in the previous stage production called the specific icon stock production.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. The hold icon 9A may be displayed in. According to this configuration, when the presence of the hold icon 9A does not interfere with the progress of the second effect, for example, when expressing the world view, it can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is held. If the presence of the icon 9A is an obstacle, it can be erased from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, it is possible to prevent the hold icon 9A from interfering with the second effect by displaying the hold icon 9A on the display screen 7a or removing it from the display screen 7a when the hold ball is present. The variable icon 9C can also be displayed on the display screen 7a or erased from the display screen 7a to prevent the hold icon 9A from interfering with the second effect. Further, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad can also be displayed on the display screen 7a or erased from the display screen 7a to prevent the hold icon 9A from interfering with the second effect. ..

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variable specific icon stock effect.
[Modification 1]
The specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. 61 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the first effect in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the variable icon 9C is the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position). It was displayed without moving from to another position. However, in the first effect, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, it approaches the variable display position 9Cd every time a pseudo-ream is performed. You may do so. In this way, each time the pseudo-ream is performed, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position), so that the variation icon 9C displays the remaining number of pseudo-reams. It is possible to intuitively and easily convey to the player a sense of distance between the position and the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position). The "other position" may be, for example, from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to the left side or the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or the image display device 7. It may be near the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, or may be near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Modification 3]
In the first effect in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the variable icon 9C is the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position). It was displayed without moving from to another position. However, in the first effect, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, each time the pseudo-ream is performed, the variable icon 9C approaches the variable display position 9Cd. Further, even if the reserved ball exists, the reserved icon 9A may not be displayed in the area where the variable icon 9C moves. In this way, each time the pseudo-ream is performed, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position), so that the variation icon 9C displays the remaining number of pseudo-reams. The sense of distance between the position and the variable icon 9Cd (the variable icon display position) can be intuitively and easily conveyed to the player, and further, the presence of the reserved ball is shown in the area where the variable icon 9C moves. When the hold icon 9A is displayed, the hold icon 9A interferes with the moving change icon 9C by removing the hold icon 9A from the display screen 7a so as not to interfere with the visibility of the change icon 9C. Can be prevented. The "other position" may be, for example, from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to the left side or the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or the image display device 7. It may be near the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of.

[Modification 4]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the number of pseudo-reams was four. However, the number of pseudo-reams may be 5, 6, 7, or 8 times. In this way, it is possible to increase the chances of acquiring a specific icon (change icon HI, etc.).

[Modification 5]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the number of pseudo-reams is fixed to 4 times in advance. However, each time the specific icon stock effect is performed, the number of pseudo-reams may be changed to any of 4 to 8 times. By doing so, the chance of acquiring a specific icon (change icon HI, etc.) can be changed each time the specific icon stock effect is performed, so that the variation of the specific icon stock effect can be increased.

[Modification 6]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the numerical image 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C as the number of pseudo-reams. It was. However, the indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a (for example, a position above the variation icon 9C) to display the number of pseudo-reams. In this way, each time a pseudo-ream is performed, the level gauge of the indicator is reduced, so that the remaining number of pseudo-reams can be intuitively and clearly communicated. The indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with the display mode in which the numerical image 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, or the numerical image 9Cz may be removed from the variable icon 9C (a state in which the numerical image 9Cz is removed from the variable icon 9C. It may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with the variable icon 9C alone).

[Modification 7]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the numerical image 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C as the number of pseudo-reams. It was. However, the variable icon 9C may move the square of "Sugoroku" every time the pseudo-ream is performed. In this case, the variable icon 9C may be advanced one by one for each square to reach the goal each time a pseudo-ream is performed, or the dice image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the dice image appears. You may try to advance the number of squares toward the goal.

[Modification 8]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the various symbols were numerical symbols and no character image was provided. However, character images are provided for odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9", respectively, and character images are provided for even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8". Further, when the specific icon stock effect is started, the character images provided in the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" may be deleted. In this way, the player can easily emphasize the state of switching to a special production called a specific icon stock production. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" all have the same bright green color, and the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" have the same bright green color. , If all have the same bright blue color, even if the specific icon stock effect is started, various colors of the numerical pattern are inherited and do not change to other colors. As a result, by switching to a special effect called a specific icon stock effect, even if the character images provided in the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" are deleted, the numbers are displayed. It is possible to reduce the influence on the discrimination of the symbol.

[Modification 9]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, when the pseudo-ream is performed, a plurality of symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, The reach by the right decorative icon 8R) was not formed. However, reach may be formed. In this way, when performing a pseudo-ren, the player can be given a sense of speed to the progress of the specific icon stock effect until the reach is formed, and the player's feeling of frustration with the pseudo-ren is suppressed. Can contribute to doing so. In addition, when the reach is formed, the specific icon stock effect is stopped, the variable effect (variable display) is continued, and the second specific icon (battle effect) that is stocked without being digested when the specific icon is acquired. When there is an icon AI etc.), the second specific icon (battle production icon AI etc.) is activated and digested.

[Modification 10]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is intuitively easy to understand. Further, since the other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and displayed behind the frontmost image of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, when the specific icon stock effect is started, the numerical image 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C. The numeric image 9Cz showed the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream. As a result, the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a may be misunderstood by the player as the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, the sub display screen 64U) is used. The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number displayed with the number of reserved balls described above as a numerical value. By doing so, the number displayed as the number of reserved balls is not likely to be misunderstood by the player as the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-ream, and the number of reserved balls is displayed as a numerical value. The numbers can be confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it difficult to distinguish them, and making them intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 11]
The specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. 61 do not have to have a part of the described effects, and other effects are added. You may.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
It is possible to display a specific icon that can change the degree of expectation of a hit each time a pseudo-ream is performed, and execute the first effect that can acquire the specific icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
The specific icon may include a first specific icon that is digested when the specific icon is acquired, and a second specific icon that is stocked without being digested when the specific icon is acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1 or the aspect A4-2.
In the first effect, it is possible to change the display mode of the (corresponding) variable icon to another display mode when the first specific icon is acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3.
In the first effect, reach by a plurality of symbol images may not be formed when the pseudo-ream is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4.
In the first effect, when the (corresponding) variable icon moves from the (corresponding) variable icon display position to another position, each time the pseudo-ream is performed, the (corresponding) variable icon display position is approached. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-5.
In the first effect, even if the holding ball exists, the holding icon is not displayed in the area where the (corresponding) fluctuation icon moves.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-2 to A4-6.
When the pseudo-ream is finished and the first effect is completed, the second effect related to the second specific icon stocked by the first effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-8]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-7.
In the second effect, the hold icon may be displayed when the hold ball is present.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation stock effect A (first half), the operation stock effect A (second half), and the operation stock effect B (second half) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. This operation stock effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation stock effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation stock production A (first half)]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect A (first half).
First, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B) or FIG. 62 (D), the temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 62 (B), the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62 (B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C. I showed how it was done. The special design is a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63. For example, the changing effect symbol temporarily stops in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the stock effect is executed as shown in FIG. 62 (C). That is, the stock effect is an effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the stock effect, the button image BG as a special symbol is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side as shown by the arrow Y. Then, the reduction button image BGS is displayed at the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62 (D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3". The situation was shown. For example, the changing effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → middle effect symbol 8C.

After the stock effect shown in FIG. 62 (C) or after the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62 (D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. Will be. In the present embodiment, a repetitive pseudo-continuous effect in which such a pseudo-continuous effect is repeated seven times is executed. Then, in the repeated pseudo-continuous effect, the button image BG as the special symbol is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62 (B)), so that the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62 (C)). In the repeated pseudo-continuous production, the following description will be continued assuming that the stock production has been executed four times.

After the end of the iterative pseudo-continuous effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 62 (E). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". At this time, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the stocked reduced button image BGS is displayed so as to be stacked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the top reduced button image BGS among the reduced button image BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, the message image MSG "press" is displayed above the button image BG. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the player presses the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from the normal reach production to the super reach production. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also at this time as well, the reduced button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so as to be stacked. Even if the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect of FIG. 62 (F), the development effect is executed after the valid period of the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the battle effect (start) is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. Then, if the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle effect (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed so as to face each other in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Operation stock production A (second half)]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect A (second half).
First, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the top reduced button image BGS among the reduced button image BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, the message image MSG "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves to the ally character CRA side, and the enemy character CRB becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduced button image BGS is displayed so as to be stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63 (A), the message image MSG "chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63 (A), the message image MSG of "chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the top reduced button image BGS among the reduced button image BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, the message image MSG "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA moves to the enemy character CRB side, and the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduction button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63 (C), the message image MSG "Great chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63 (C), the message image MSG of "great chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the button image BG displaying the characters "PUSH" is displayed. Further, the message image MSG "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), the battle effect (final stage) is executed. In the battle production (final stage), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center. When the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63 (E), the message image MSG "extreme heat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63 (E), the message image MSG of "super heat" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "victory" is displayed. In the case of loss, for example, an enemy character is displayed and a message image of "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "5". In the case of loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at "6".

[Operation stock production B (second half)]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect B (second half). The operation stock effect B (first half) is the same as the operation stock effect A (first half), and the description thereof will be omitted.
In the operation stock effect B (second half), first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the top reduced button image BGS among the reduced button image BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, the message image MSG "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle production (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves to the ally character CRA side, and the enemy character CRB becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduced button image BGS is displayed so as to be stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64 (A), the message image MSG "chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64 (A), the message image MSG of "chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the top reduced button image BGS among the reduced button image BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, the message image MSG "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the battle effect (mid-term) is executed. In the battle production (mid-term), the ally character CRA moves to the enemy character CRB side, and the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduction button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64 (C), the message image MSG "Great chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64 (C), the message image MSG of "great chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the button image BG displaying the characters "PUSH" is displayed. Further, the message image MSG "press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the hit confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is an effect that deterministically notifies that the hit is a hit. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the message image MSG "Hit" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation stock effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the temporary stop effect (FIGS. 62 (B) (D)), the variable start effect (FIG. 62 (A)) is executed to repeat the pseudo-continuous effect. To execute. Then, in this repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, the button image BG as a special symbol is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62 (B)), so that the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62 (C)). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation promotion effect is executed by the number of the reduced button image BGS stocked in the stock effect (FIG. 62 (B)), and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes effective (FIG. FIG. 62 (F), FIGS. 63 (A) (C) (E), FIGS. 64 (A) (C) (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give expectations to the player so that the reduced button image BGS is stocked, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BG as a special symbol is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C in the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect composed of seven pseudo-continuous effects (FIG. 62 (B)). ), The stock effect is executed (FIG. 62 (C)). According to this configuration, expectations are raised for a predetermined number of pseudo-continuous productions, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BG as a special symbol is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C in the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 62 (B)), so that the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62 (FIG. 62). C)). In the stock effect, the button image BG as a special symbol is reduced and is moved and held from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side as indicated by an arrow Y. According to this configuration, the number of stocks can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the button image BG displaying the characters "PUSH" is displayed. It is displayed (FIGS. 62 (F), 63 (A) (C) (E), 64 (A) (C) (E)). According to this configuration, the operation of the effect button 63 can be effectively promoted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation promotion effect (FIG. 62 (F), FIG. 63 (A) (C) (E), FIG. 64 (A) (C) (E)) is the reach formation effect (FIG. It is executed after 62 (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the reach formation and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation stock effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the example in which the button image BG as a special symbol temporarily stops instead of the middle effect symbol 8C is given, but even if the special symbol temporarily stops instead of the left effect symbol 8L or the right effect symbol 8R. good.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the repeated pseudo-continuous production is composed of 7 times of pseudo-continuous production, but it may be composed of the number of times less than 7 times or more than 7 times. Furthermore, the number of pseudo-continuous effects may be dynamically changed. For example, the higher the number of pseudo-continuous productions, the higher the expectation for hitting.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the case where four stock productions are performed has been described as an example, but the number of stock productions is not particularly limited. For example, the higher the number of stock productions, the higher the expectation for winning.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 has been given as an example, but the operation unit is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63 as long as it is an operation unit that can be operated by the player.

[Modification 5]
In the above, the effect of the first special figure hold is given as an example, but the effect of the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player.
In a repetitive pseudo-continuous production in which the effect symbol that has started the fluctuation is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous production that starts the fluctuation again is repeated, the operation unit image that imitates the operation unit is displayed and the operation unit image is held in the screen. Is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1.
After the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, it is possible to execute the operation unit effect in which the operation of the operation unit is effective according to the number of the operation unit images held in the screen by the stock effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1 or the aspect A5-2.
The repeated pseudo-continuous effect is composed of the pseudo-continuous effect a predetermined number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3.
In the stock effect, the operation unit image is displayed as a special symbol when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect, and then the operation unit image is reduced and held.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-2 to A5-4.
In the operation unit effect, the operation unit image held in the screen is enlarged to promote the operation of the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-2 to A5-5.
The operation unit effect is executed after the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, followed by a reach formation effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6.
When the operation unit is operated during the period in which the operation of the operation unit is effective in the operation unit effect, it is possible to execute a definite notification effect for deterministically notifying that the operation unit is a hit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The icon number pattern effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. This icon number symbol effect can be executed during a variable effect of a special symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when it has a predetermined variation pattern, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a. It is a production realized in.

[Icon number pattern production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the icon numerical symbol effect A. In this icon number pattern effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number symbol 8X having the same mode (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, one hold icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. .. The number symbol 8X is a symbol having the same aspect as the decorative symbol of one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and in the example of FIG. 65 (B), the decorative symbol "6". A symbol having the same aspect as the symbol is displayed. Further, the numerical symbol 8X randomly moves or stops the display screen 7a. Further, one hold icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one hold icon among the hold icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 65 (B), FIG. 65 ( In A), it corresponds to the hold icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A is arranged inside the cylinder. Then, the hold icon 9A moves a predetermined distance toward the variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon, and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number symbol 8X randomly moves to the right and to the left and stops. Further, in the icon movement effect 2, the hold icon 9A moves a predetermined distance toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the icon movement effect 3 is performed. In the icon movement effect 3, the hold icon 9A moves along the guide rail image XA1 while the number symbol 8X moves randomly, reaches the variable icon display area, and stops. In this case, thereafter, the hold icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop fluctuating and form a stop symbol array. In the example of FIG. 65 (E), the stop symbol arrangement is "6 7 6", which is a lost symbol arrangement. Further, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the hold icon 9A that was moved in the icon move effect becomes the variable icon 9C.

In this icon number symbol effect A, the larger the number of times the hold icon 9A is moved / stopped, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

[Icon number pattern production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the icon numerical symbol effect B. In this icon number pattern effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number symbol 8X having the same mode (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, one hold icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. .. The number symbol 8X is a symbol having the same aspect as the decorative symbol of one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and in the example of FIG. 66 (B), the decorative symbol "6". A symbol having the same aspect as the symbol is displayed. Further, the number symbol 8X and one hold icon 9A are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. One hold icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one of the hold icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 66 (B), FIG. 66 (A). Corresponds to the hold icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A (numerical symbol 8X) is arranged inside the cylinder. The hold icon 9A (numerical symbol 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon and stops. The hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number symbol 8X and the hold icon 9A are continuously arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, the number symbol 8X is changed from the "6" symbol to the "5" symbol. Further, the hold icon 9A has changed from white to blue (usually shown by hatching in FIG. 66 (C)). In the icon movement effect 2, the hold icon 9A moves toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the icon movement effect 3 is performed. In the icon movement effect 3, the hold icon 9A associated with the number symbol 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1 to reach the variable icon display area and stop. In this case, thereafter, the hold icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9A has changed from blue to green (indicated by cross-hatching in FIG. 66 (D)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop fluctuating and form a stop symbol array. In the example of FIG. 66 (E), the stop symbol arrangement is "6 7 6", which is a lost symbol arrangement. Further, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the hold icon 9A (green) that was moved in the icon move effect is the variable icon 9C.

In this icon number symbol effect B, the larger the number of times the hold icon 9A is moved / stopped, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, the greater the number of times the hold icon 9A is moved / stopped, the greater the chance that the hold icon 9A will change.

[Icon number pattern production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the icon numerical symbol effect C. In this icon number pattern effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number symbol 8X having the same mode (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, one hold icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. .. The number symbol 8X is a symbol having the same aspect as the decorative symbol of one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and in the example of FIG. 67 (B), the decorative symbol "6". A symbol having the same aspect as the symbol is displayed. Further, the number symbol 8X is arranged in one hold icon 9A. In this case, it can be said that the number symbol 8X is associated with the hold icon 9A. One hold icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one of the hold icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 67 (B), FIG. 67 (A). Corresponds to the hold icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A (numerical symbol 8X) is arranged inside the cylinder. The hold icon 9A (numerical symbol 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon and stops. The hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number symbol 8X is continuously arranged in the hold icon 9A. In this case, the number symbol 8X is changed from the "6" symbol to the "5" symbol. Further, the hold icon 9A has changed from white to blue (usually shown by hatching in FIG. 67 (C)). In the icon movement effect 2, the hold icon 9A moves toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the hold icon 9A including the number symbol 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1 to reach the variable icon display area and stop. In this case, thereafter, the hold icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9A has changed from blue to green (in FIG. 67 (D), it is indicated by cross-hatching). Further, the hold icon 9A includes the numerical symbol 8X even when the variable icon display area is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop fluctuating and form a stop symbol array. In the example of FIG. 67 (E), the stop symbol arrangement is "6 7 6", which is a lost symbol arrangement. Further, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the hold icon 9A (green) that was moved in the icon move effect is the variable icon 9C. Even in this case, the hold icon 9C includes the numerical symbol 8X even when the variable icon display area is reached.

In this icon number symbol effect C, the larger the number of movements / stops of the hold icon 9A, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, the greater the number of times the hold icon 9A is moved / stopped, the greater the chance that the hold icon 9A will change.
Further, the above-mentioned icon number pattern effect is an effect performed with the same fluctuation.

[Modification example]
In the icon number pattern production of the above embodiment, the number pattern 8X has the same aspect as the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number pattern 8X has the same aspect as a part of the decorative pattern, but a part thereof is a decorative pattern. It may be a different aspect from.
In the icon number symbol effects B and C of the above embodiment, when the icon movement effect 2 is performed from the icon movement effect 1, the hold icon 9A changes, and the number symbol 8X associated with the hold icon 9A also changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical symbol 8X may not change even when the hold icon 9A changes.

[Effect example]
In the icon number symbol effect of the above embodiment, the hold icon 9A and the number symbol 8X move. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an interesting production by the movement of the hold icon 9A and the number symbol 8X, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, in the icon number symbol effects B and C, the hold icon 9A and the number symbol 8X are associated with each other and move together, so that the player can emphasize the movement of the hold icon 9A and the number symbol 8X. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, since the number symbol 8X has the same mode (shape, color) as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, it is possible to display a new effect in which the hold icon and the decorative symbol collaborate, which is a hobby of the game. Can be improved.
Further, in the icon number symbol effects B and C, after the hold icon 9A and the number symbol 8X are associated and moved, the mode (color, shape) of the hold icon 9A changes, so that the hold icon and the number symbol 8X are used. The more the player moves, the more the player can increase the expectation for the pending change and improve the interest of the game.
Further, in the icon number symbol effects B and C, even if the mode (color, shape) of the hold icon 9A changes after the hold icon 9A and the number symbol 8X are associated with each other and moved, the mode of the number symbol 8X remains. Since it does not change, the change of the hold icon 9A can be more impressed on the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, in the icon number symbol effects B and C, when the hold icon 9A and the number symbol 8X move in association with each other, when the number symbol 8X changes, the hold icon 9A may also change. According to this configuration, when the number symbol changes, the hold icon 9A can be expected to change, so that the player pays close attention to both the number symbol and the hold icon, which can improve the interest of the game. can.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, the first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of varying a decorative pattern.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined icon, which is an icon representing a hold or the change, and a numerical symbol including a number.
The third display effect is an effect of moving the predetermined icon.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the number symbol moves.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect and the fourth display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-1.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed, and the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number in the fourth display effect. Move in association with the symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-2.
The number symbol has the same aspect as the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-3.
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the numerical symbol in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, the predetermined icon changes after the movement.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-4.
In the combination effect, the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number symbol in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, and the predetermined icon changes after the movement. The number pattern does not change,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-5.
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number symbol in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, the number symbol may change, and the number may change. When the design changes, the predetermined icon also changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the reach hold icon effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. This hold icon effect at the time of reach can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the reach hold icon effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon production A at reach]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon effect A at the time of reach. In the reach effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is new from the state where no hold icon is displayed. It is a production displayed in. First, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of “2 ↓ 2”), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Will be done. The hold icons 9A and 9B are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C has a rectangular shape and is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 68 (B), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, all the hold icons (hold icons 9A and 9B, the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, among the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and the hold icons 9A and 9B are not displayed. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C displayed again has the same mode as before disappearing. The aspect here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the mode of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a character image showing the mode of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C after the change is displayed. Here, "representing an aspect" means not only the shape, color, operation, and size of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. ), Names, etc. are also included. The order in which the mode of the hold icon 9C changes is from the mode in which the expectation of the jackpot is low to the mode in which the expectation of the jackpot is high. Here, the color of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a "square red" character image representing the shape and color of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image are rotated together. .. During the rotation, as shown in FIGS. 68 (F), (G), and (H), the effect of changing the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two, and a new star-shaped hold icon (variable icon) 9C appears from the split, and a new hold icon (variable) is displayed. Icon) A character image representing the aspect of 9C is displayed. Here, a "star-shaped" character image representing the shape of the new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. The two broken square fragments and the "square red" text image are framed out. The new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area).

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image are rotated together. .. During the rotation, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the effect of changing the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image are enlarged and displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Hold icon production B at reach]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon effect B at the time of reach. In the reach effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is new from the state where no hold icon is displayed. It is a production displayed in. First, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are collectively referred to as “hold icons 9A, 9C”. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of “2 ↓ 2”), and the hold icons 9A, 9B and the hold display area are displayed from the display screen 7a. The rectangular image for showing the position of is disappeared, and only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 69 (C), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, all the hold icons (hold icons 9A and 9B, the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG that imitates the shape of the bomb is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves to the left while drawing a parabola. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, among the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area are not displayed. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C displayed again has the same mode as before disappearing. The aspect here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 69 (E) to 69 (G), the effect of changing the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), a specific image TG imitating the shape of a bomb explodes, and as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C becomes two. It breaks (is divided). Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C of the new doll appears, and a character image showing the mode of the new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing an aspect" means not only the shape, color, operation, and size of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. ), Names, etc. are also included. Here, a character image of "character hold" representing the content of the new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image are rotated together. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (I), the character image "character hold" is in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continue to reach and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate. Disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Hold icon production C at reach]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon effect C at the time of reach. In the reach effect executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is new from the state where no hold icon is displayed. It is a production displayed in. First, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are collectively referred to as “hold icons 9A, 9C”. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digestion image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2 ↓ 2"), and the hold icons 9A, 9B and the hold display area are displayed from the display screen 7a. The rectangular image for showing the position of is disappeared, and only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70 (C), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, all the hold icons (hold icons 9A and 9B, the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG imitating a person holding a sword is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and runs to the left to move. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, among the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area are not displayed. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C displayed again has the same mode as before disappearing. The aspect here includes the shape, color, movement, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 70 (E) to 70 (G), an effect of changing the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), a specific image TG imitating a person holding a sword passes through the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, and then as shown in FIG. 70 (F). , The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C having a new face shape appears, and a character image showing the mode of the new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing an aspect" means not only the shape, color, operation, and size of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. ), Names, etc. are also included. Here, a character image of "face hold" representing the content of the new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image are rotated together. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (I), the character image "face hold" is in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continue to reach and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate. Disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), an effect of displaying the background image corresponding to the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, a background image of the same face as the face represented by the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon effect at the time of reach.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B), (C), 69 (C), (D), 70 (C), and (D), the display screen 7a is displayed during the reach effect. From the state in which no hold icon is displayed, the first effect in which only the hold icon (variation icon) 9C corresponding to the change is newly displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 (E) to (H), FIGS. 69 (E) to (G), and FIGS. 70 (E) to (G), after the first effect, A second effect in which the hold icon (variable icon) 9C changes can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 (E) to (H), FIGS. 69 (E) to (G), and FIGS. 70 (E) to (G), the second effect is the same. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C changes to the second aspect after the hold icon 9C of the first aspect is divided into a plurality of parts. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69 (C) to (G) and 70 (E) to (G), in the second effect, the specific image TG moves and the hold icon 9C is moved. After passing through, the hold icon 9C of the first aspect is divided into a plurality of pieces. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 (H), 69 (G), and 70 (G), in the second effect, the hold icon 9C of the second aspect is displayed. At the same time, a character image representing the second aspect is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 (I), 69 (H), and 70 (H), the hold icon 9C of the second aspect is rotated and also has a character image. Rotate together. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon effect at the time of reach.
[Modification 1]
In the reach-time hold icon effects A to C, it is assumed that the first effect in which only the hold icon 9C is newly displayed is executed from the state where none of the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are displayed. However, in the reach icon effects A to C, the first effect in which only the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B is newly displayed is executed from the state where none of the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are displayed. You may.

[Modification 2]
In the effect in which the hold icon (variable icon) 9C shown in FIGS. 68 (F) and 68 (G) of the reach hold icon effect A changes, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two. , The new star-shaped hold icon (variable icon) 9C will appear from the crack. However, it may be considered that the quadrangle portion of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two, and a new star-shaped figure appears from the split.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
A game characterized in that it is possible to execute a first effect in which only the hold icon corresponding to the fluctuation is newly displayed from a state in which no hold icon is displayed on the display means at the time of reach effect. Machine.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second effect in which the hold icon changes after the first effect.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-2.
In the second effect, the holding icon is a gaming machine characterized in that the holding icon of the first aspect is divided into a plurality of parts and then changes to the second aspect.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image.
In the second effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that after the specific image moves and passes through the hold icon, the hold icon of the first aspect is divided into a plurality of pieces.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-3 or the aspect A7-4.
In the second effect, the holding icon of the second aspect is displayed, and a character image representing the second aspect is displayed.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-5.
The holding icon of the second aspect is rotated, and the gaming machine is characterized in that the character image is also rotated.

Hereinafter, the special hold effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. This special hold effect can be executed during a variable effect of a special symbol. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a. The special hold effect is an effect performed with the same variation of the special symbol.

[Special hold production A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the special hold effect A. In this special hold effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Further, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of FIG. 71 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7 symbols each, and are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold production B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the special hold effect B. In this special hold effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Further, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. Further, in this super reach effect, the third movable accessory 13 is moved from the home position (retracted position) to the expanded position (deployed position) on the display screen 7a to hide a part of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of FIG. 72 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7 symbols each, and are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold production C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the special hold effect C. In this special hold effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Is executed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. At this time, the number of hold icons 9A is four, that is, the number of hold icons is four.
Further, in the special hold effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. The variation icon XB1 represents an effect status in the variation, and is an icon corresponding to the hold icon 9C. Further, the hold icon XB2 is an icon indicating the hold state, and is an icon corresponding to the hold icon 9A. The hold icon XB2 indicates the number of holds by the number of icons like the hold icon 9A, and has the same number of icons as the hold icon 9A. That is, when the number of hold icons is 3, the number of hold icons 9A is 3, but the number of hold icons XB2 is also 3. This hold icon XB2 does not change on hold. The hold icon XB2 may be changed on hold corresponding to the hold icon 9A, or may be changed on hold so as to be different from the hold icon 9A. For example, the hold icon XB2 may be changed to hold after the hold icon 9A has changed to hold for a while.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. Further, in this super reach effect, the third movable accessory 13 is moved from the home position (retracted position) to the expanded position (deployed position) on the display screen 7a to hide a part of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Is.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol arrangement. In the example of FIG. 73 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7 symbols each, and are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R.

[Modification example]
In the above special hold effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub display screen 64R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L and the main display screen 7a. May be good.
Further, the hold icon XB2 may be displayed by a method of knowing the number of holds. For example, when there are three hold icons XB2, they may be displayed by the number "3".
In the above special hold effect, the variable icon 9C is displayed without displaying the hold icon 9A at the time of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variable icon 9C has a different aspect from the normal (circular and white in the embodiment) (for example, the rectangular shape is red), the hold icon 9A may not be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the special hold effect of the above embodiment, in the same variation, the icon display effect of displaying the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A and the reach effect of displaying the change icon 9C without displaying the hold icon 9A are provided. It is carried out. Then, after the icon display effect, the reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display effect, and the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the hold icon 9A during the reach effect. It is possible to make the player aware of the importance and improve the expectation of reach production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the special hold effect of the above embodiment, in the same variation, an icon display effect that displays the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, a reach effect that displays the change icon 9C without displaying the hold icon 9A, and a reach effect. A super reach effect is performed in which the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. In this case, the reach effect is performed after the icon display effect, and then the super reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display effect, and the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the hold icon 9A during the reach effect, and further, the super reach effect is achieved. Since the super reach effect can be emphasized at times, the player can be made aware of the importance of the super reach effect itself, and the expectation of the super reach effect can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, in the special hold effect, in the super reach effect in which the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, the effect that the third movable accessory 13 moves in front of the display screen 7a is performed. According to this configuration, since the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, the effect of the third movable accessory 13 can be emphasized to the player, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. ..

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, the first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect includes an effect of displaying the change icon representing the change and a hold icon representing the hold.
The second display effect includes an effect of displaying the variable icon without displaying the hold icon and an effect of displaying the variable icon.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-1.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which the variable icon and the hold icon are not displayed.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the second display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-3.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-4.
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, the movable accessory effect is performed in which the movable accessory moves in front of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The icon success / failure effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. This icon success / failure effect can be executed during a variable effect of a special symbol or the like. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon success / failure production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the icon success / failure effect A. In this icon success / failure effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular white embodiments. Further, the decorative symbol is changed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white aspect to an aspect representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the icon enormous effect is performed. In this icon enormous effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as an ally character 9C) pops out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and further enlarges. It is a production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), a success / failure effect is performed. In this success / failure effect, the enemy character XC1 appears, and a battle effect is developed with the ally character 9C to compete for which one to win, in other words, to determine whether or not the battle is successful. In addition to the battle production, the success / failure production includes a production that determines success or failure, such as a production that determines whether to win or lose by playing a predetermined game. At the time of this success / failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but the hold icon 9A is continuously displayed in the hold icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), a successful production is performed. In this success effect, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters indicating victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to the premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C is a chance up and shows that the jackpot expectation has increased. This premium icon 9C may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed. Further, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white aspect before being changed by the icon change effect and a different aspect from the ally character after being changed by the icon change effect, and the circular image and the triangular image are combined. It consists of images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success / failure production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the icon success / failure effect B. In this icon success / failure effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular white embodiments. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white aspect to an aspect representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the icon enormous effect is performed. In this icon enormous effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as an ally character 9C) pops out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and further enlarges. It is a production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), a success / failure effect is performed. In this success / failure effect, the enemy character XC1 appears, and a battle effect is developed with the ally character 9C to compete for which one to win, in other words, to determine whether or not the battle is successful. In addition to the battle production, the success / failure production includes a production that determines success or failure, such as a production that determines whether to win or lose by playing a predetermined game. At the time of this success / failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the hold icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), a successful production is performed. In this success effect, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters indicating victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to the premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C is a chance up and shows that the jackpot expectation has increased. This premium icon 9C may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed. Further, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white aspect before being changed by the icon change effect and a different aspect from the ally character after being changed by the icon change effect, and is a circular image, a triangular image, and an enemy character XC1. It is composed of an image combined with a part of the sword image. Not limited to this, the premium icon 9C may include all of the enemy characters XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success / failure production C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the icon success / failure effect C. In this icon success / failure effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular white embodiments. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white aspect to an aspect representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the icon enormous effect is performed. In this icon enormous effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as an ally character 9C) pops out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and further enlarges. It is a production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), a success / failure effect is performed. In this success / failure effect, the enemy character XC1 appears, and a battle effect is developed with the ally character 9C to compete for which one to win, in other words, to determine whether or not the battle is successful. In addition to the battle production, the success / failure production includes a production that determines success or failure, such as a production that determines whether to win or lose by playing a predetermined game. At the time of this success / failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the hold icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), a successful production is performed. In this success effect, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters indicating victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to the premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C is a chance up and shows that the jackpot expectation has increased. This premium icon 9C may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed. Further, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white mode before being changed by the icon change effect and a mode different from the ally character after the change by the icon change effect, and is a circular image, a triangular image, and an enemy character XC1. It is composed of an image in which a part of the sword image and a part of the star-shaped emblem image of the ally character 9C are combined. Not limited to this, the premium icon 9C may include all of the ally characters 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Modification example]
In the above icon success / failure effect, if the variable icon 9C makes the first change in the icon change effect and succeeds in the success / failure effect (if it wins), the success effect is performed and the second change is made in the icon promotion effect 1. However, it is not limited to this, and if one of the reserved icons 9A is targeted, the first change is made in the icon change effect, and if the success / failure effect is successful (winning), the success effect is performed. The icon promotion effect 1 may be used to make the second change. In this case, in the icon promotion effect 2, the changed icon may be returned to the originally displayed position, or may be moved to a different icon position and changed to the icon displayed at that place. You may do it.
In the above icon success / failure effect, the variable icon 9C is moved to the variable icon display area in the icon promotion effect 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold icon 9A is one of the other hold icons 9A. You may move it and change it to the hold icon 9A.
In the above icon success / failure effect, the variable icon 9C is set to make the first change in the icon change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold icon 9A performs the icon change effect to make the first change, and then. After becoming the variable icon 9C, the icon enormous effect, the success / failure effect, the success effect, the icon promotion effect 1, and the icon promotion effect 2 may be performed.

[Effect example]
In the icon success / failure effect of the above embodiment, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed, then one of these icons changes, and then the success / failure effect is performed. Then, if the success / failure effect is successful (if the battle is won), the above one icon is further changed. According to this configuration, the success or failure effect is performed by the change of one icon, and the icon is further changed by the success of the success or failure effect, so that the stepwise change of the icon can be rich in variety. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
If the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed and then one of these icons changes, the changed icon changes to an icon representing a friendly character, and the friendly character and the enemy character. The success or failure effect is performed using and. According to this configuration, since the success / failure effect is performed using the icon representing the character in which one icon has changed and the enemy character, the success / failure effect and the change in one icon can be linked, and the success / failure effect can be achieved. It is possible to make the player feel like putting his / her shoulder on the ally character, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, the first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon in the icon group consisting of the change icon representing the change or the hold icon representing the hold is displayed in the first form.
The second display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the first form is changed and displayed in the second form.
The third display effect is an effect in which a success / failure effect for determining success / failure is performed using the predetermined icon displayed in the second form.
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the second form is changed and displayed in the third form when the success or failure effect is successful.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-2.
The predetermined icon of the second form is the first character.
A gaming machine characterized by [Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a second character different from the first character.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect, and may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, after the fifth display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-4.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the success / failure effect is performed using the first character and the second character.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The icon selection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. This icon selection effect can be executed during a variable effect of a special symbol or the like. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect A. In this icon selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A is the variable icon. The hold icon 9A closest to is also referred to as a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also referred to as a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the 4th hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 77 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selection image XD1 including the character A and the star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation, and this character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selection image XD2 including the character B and the star image. The character B included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation, and the character B has a medium jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation degree is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selection image XD3 including the character C and the star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation, and this character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD3 expresses the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the jackpot expectation is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the third hold icon 9A is displayed so as to change to the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3 at high speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third hold icon 9A is determined to be the third hold icon 9A of any of the icon selection effect 1 to the icon selection effect 3 and is stopped. In this case, it will be described below that the third hold icon 9A is determined to be the selected image XD2 as shown in FIG. 77 (E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the icon movement effect is performed. In this icon movement effect, the third hold icon 9A determined as the selected image XD2 in the above-mentioned icon decision effect shifts to the second hold icon 9A, further shifts to the first hold icon 9A, and then Finally, it shifts to the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 that has been shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to the vicinity of the substantially center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and selected. It is displayed as XD22. In this selected image XD22, a star image representing two enormous stars is displayed together with the enormous character B and the character "expectation degree". In the selected image XD22, as in the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing the two stars indicate that the jackpot expectation is medium. Further, in the battle production, the Nico Nico image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is performed between the Nico Nico image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If you win this battle, you will get a big hit, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R will display the jackpot symbol array, and if you lose in the battle, you will lose, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R will display the misaligned symbol array. ..

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect B. In this icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A is the variable icon. The hold icon 9A closest to is also referred to as a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also referred to as a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the 4th hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 78 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selection image XD1 including the character A and the star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation, and this character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selection image XD2 including the character B and the star image. The character B included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation, and the character B has a medium jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation degree is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selection image XD3 including the character C and the star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation, and this character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD3 expresses the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the jackpot expectation is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the third hold icon 9A is displayed so as to change to the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3 at high speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), the icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third hold icon 9A is determined to be the third hold icon 9A of any of the icon selection effect 1 to the icon selection effect 3 and is stopped. In this case, it will be described below that the third hold icon 9A is determined to be the selected image XD1 as shown in FIG. 78 (E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, the third hold icon 9A determined as the selected image XD1 in the above-mentioned icon determination effect changes (promotes) to the selected image XD2 when shifting to the second hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the second hold icon 9A changed to the selected image XD2 in the above-mentioned icon move effect 1 is shifted to the first hold icon 9A in that state, and finally to the variable icon display area. shift.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (H), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 that has been shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to the vicinity of the substantially center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and selected. It is displayed as XD22. In this selected image XD22, a star image representing two enormous stars is displayed together with the enormous character B and the character "expectation degree". In the selected image XD22, as in the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing the two stars indicate that the jackpot expectation is medium. Further, in the battle production, the Nico Nico image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is performed between the Nico Nico image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If you win this battle, you will get a big hit, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R will display the jackpot symbol array, and if you lose in the battle, you will lose, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R will display the misaligned symbol array. ..

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect C. In this icon selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A is the variable icon. The hold icon 9A closest to is also referred to as a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also referred to as a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the 4th hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 79 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the variable icon 9C changes to a selected image XD1 including a character A and a star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation, and this character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the variable icon 9C changes to a selected image XD2 including a character B and a star image. The character B included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation, and the character B has a medium jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation degree is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the variable icon 9C changes to a selection image XD3 including a character C and a star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation, and this character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD3 expresses the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the jackpot expectation is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the variable icon 9C is displayed so as to change to the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3 at high speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the variable icon 9C is determined to be one of the icon selection effects 1 to the icon selection effect 3 and is stopped. In this case, it will be described below that the variable icon 9C is determined to be the selected image XD2 as shown in FIG. 79 (E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to the vicinity of the substantially center of the main display screen 7a, is enlarged, and is displayed as the selected image XD22. In this selected image XD22, a star image representing two enormous stars is displayed together with the enormous character B and the character "expectation degree". In the selected image XD22, as in the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing the two stars indicate that the jackpot expectation is medium. Further, in the battle production, the Nico Nico image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is performed between the Nico Nico image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If you win this battle, you will get a big hit, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R will display the jackpot symbol array, and if you lose in the battle, you will lose, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R will display the misaligned symbol array. ..

[Modification example]
In the above icon selection effect A, the star image (expectation degree display) is at a different position from that of the variable icon 9C (during the icon movement effect) during the battle effect, but the variable icon is not limited to this. It may be the same position as at 9C (during icon movement effect). Further, at the time of the battle effect, the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but may be displayed. In this case, the same icon as the selected image XD2 at the time of the icon movement effect is displayed.
In the above icon selection effect, in the icon selection effects 1 to 3, different characters A to C or star images having different numbers of stars are used, but the image is not limited to this, and the same character or star can be used. There may be the same number of star images.
In the above icon selection effect, after the icon movement effect, the battle effect is performed using the character B of the selected image XD22, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach effect is performed using the character B. May be good.
In the above icon selection effect, in the selected images XD1 to XD3, the character and the star image representing the degree of expectation by the number of stars are displayed in association with each other, but the selection images XD1 to XD3 are not limited to this. The number of rounds when a big hit is displayed, the probability change expectation degree, and the like may be displayed in association with each other.

[Effect example]
In the above icon selection effect, the decorative symbol variation effect for displaying the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A is performed, and the predetermined icon, which is one of these icon groups, has a relatively low degree of expectation. The icon selection effect 1 and the predetermined hold icon 9A, which are displayed by changing to one star and character A, are changed to two stars and character B, which indicate that the expectation is medium. The icon selection effect 2 to be performed and the icon selection effect 3 in which the predetermined hold icon 9A is displayed by changing to three stars and the character C indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively high are performed. Then, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeated, and one icon is determined from the predetermined icons displayed in the icon selection effects 1 to 3 in the icon determination effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to which expectation icon is determined or which character's icon is determined, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above icon selection effect A, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are performed and one hold icon 9A is determined in the icon determination effect, and then the icon is moved in the state of the determined hold icon 9A in the icon movement effect (hold shift). According to this configuration, the player can foresee that the hold icon 9A will be the variable icon 9C, and the player can continue to be interested in the subsequent transition. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XD-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, the first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an icon group composed of a plurality of icons.
The second display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon in the icon group changes in a plurality of modes.
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon that changes in the plurality of embodiments is determined to be one of the plurality of embodiments.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-1.
In the second display effect, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, each of the plurality of modes includes an expectation degree display suggesting a jackpot expectation degree.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-2.
In the second display effect, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, the expected degree display and the character display representing the character are included in each of the plurality of modes.
The expectation degree display and the character display are associated with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-3.
The predetermined icon is a hold icon representing hold.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon determined in one of the plurality of embodiments moves in the state of the determined embodiment.
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The icon special change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. This icon special change effect can be executed during a change effect of a special symbol. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a.

[Expectation of jackpot by icon]
FIG. 80 is a jackpot expectation table XE1 for each icon. Specifically, the icon-specific jackpot expectation table XE1 shown in FIG. 80 represents a plurality of patterns in which the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes, and the corresponding jackpot expectation. For example, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be circular or may change to a quadrangle. In the case of a circle, it may be blue, green, or red, and in the case of a quadrangle, it may be blue, green, or red. , Green, red, may be golden. When the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is circular and changes to blue, the jackpot expectation is 10%, and when the circular icon 9C changes to green, the jackpot expectation is 30%. Yes, if it changes to red in a circle, the jackpot expectation is 50%, if it changes to green in a square, the jackpot expectation is 40%, and if it changes to red in a square, it is red. The jackpot expectation is 60%, and when the quadrangle turns golden, the jackpot expectation is 80%. The sub-control board 90 distinguishes between jackpots and misses in advance based on the fluctuation pattern command sent from the image control microcomputer 101, and holds the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9A so as to be as shown in the jackpot expectation table XE1 for each icon. , The variable icon 9C changes. Further, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is normally circular and white, but can be changed to any aspect of the icon-specific jackpot expectation table XE1, and then further, the icon-specific jackpot. It is possible to change to another aspect of the expectation table XE1. In this case, at the time of change, the jackpot expectation is not lower than the previous jackpot expectation. For example, if the icon changes from circular white to circular green (big hit expectation 30%), then the icon will be circular red (big hit expectation 50%), which has a higher jackpot expectation than circular green. , Square green (big hit expectation 40%), square red (big hit expectation 60%), square gold (big hit expectation 80%).

In the jackpot expectation table XE1 by icon, the following can be said. That is, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the circular icon, is the green, which is the pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the rectangular icon. It has a higher expectation of big hits than the square icon of.
In addition, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the circular icon, is the pattern with the second highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the rectangular icon. The jackpot expectation is lower than the red square icon.
Furthermore, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the multiple patterns in the circular icon, is the golden pattern, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the multiple patterns in the rectangular icon. The jackpot expectation is lower than the square icon.
Also, the square icon is larger than the circular icon.

[Icon special change effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the icon special change effect A. In this icon special change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are in a circular and white form under normal conditions. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A is the variable icon. The hold icon 9A closest to is also referred to as a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also referred to as a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the 4th hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 81A, the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81B, the icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third hold icon 9A changes to blue while continuing to be circular. The jackpot expectation at this point is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, the icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third hold icon 9A shifts to the second hold icon 9A, and the icon changes to green while continuing to be circular. The jackpot expectation at this point is 30%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second hold icon 9A shifts to the first hold icon 9A, and the green color changes from a circle to a quadrangle while continuing. The jackpot expectation at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the variation effect is performed. In this variation effect, the first hold icon 9A shifts to the variation icon 9C, and various effects using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a big hit, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form a jackpot symbol array, and in the case of a loss, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form an out-of-order symbol array.

[Icon special change effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the icon special change effect B. In this icon special change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are in a circular and white form under normal conditions. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A is the variable icon. The hold icon 9A closest to is also referred to as a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also referred to as a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the 4th hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 82 (A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third hold icon 9A changes to blue while continuing to be circular. The jackpot expectation at this point is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third hold icon 9A shifts to the second hold icon 9A, and at the same time, the icon changes from a circle to a quadrangle and changes to green. The jackpot expectation at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), the icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second hold icon 9A shifts to become the first hold icon 9A, and at the same time, the quadrangle changes to red while continuing. The jackpot expectation at this point is 60%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the variation effect is performed. In this variation effect, the first hold icon 9A shifts to the variation icon 9C, and at the same time, the quadrangle changes to gold while continuing. The jackpot expectation at this point is 80%. Further, in the variable effect, various effects using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a big hit, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form a jackpot symbol array, and in the case of a loss, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are used to form an out-of-order symbol array.

[Modification example]
In the above icon special change effect, the icon with a low jackpot expectation may be changed to an icon with a high jackpot expectation, and then the icon may be changed to an icon with a low jackpot expectation. In that case, after changing from an icon with a low jackpot expectation to an icon with a high jackpot expectation, the configuration may have a higher jackpot expectation than when changing to an icon with a high jackpot expectation.
In the above icon special change effect, when the icon changes, the jackpot expectation does not drop below the previous jackpot expectation, but it is not limited to this, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the previous jackpot expectation. It may change to a lowering mode. In this case, as a special case, the jackpot may be confirmed as a rule break.
In the above icon special change effect, in addition to the circle and the quadrangle, the icon may be changed to an icon having a different shape (for example, a triangle). In that case, if the colors are the same, the quadrangle has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the circle, and the triangle may have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the quadrangle.

[Effect example]
In the above icon special change effect, the icon of the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be displayed in a circular or square system or in a different color mode. Further, the icon of the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be displayed in a plurality of patterns of blue, green, and red in the case of a circle. Further, the icon of the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be displayed in a plurality of patterns of green, red, and gold in the case of a rectangle. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C can be changed in various patterns, and various icon change modes can be provided to the player. As a result, the player's interest in the icon can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XE-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a predetermined icon in the icon group consisting of the change icon representing the change or the hold icon representing the hold is used in the first form and the first aspect. An effect of displaying in either one of the second form different from the form is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-1.
The predetermined icon of the first form has a plurality of patterns and has a plurality of patterns.
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first embodiment have the same shape and have different aspect portions.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-2.
The predetermined icon of the second form has a plurality of patterns and has a plurality of patterns.
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second embodiment have the same shape and have different aspect portions.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-3.
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first embodiment have the same shape and different colors.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-4.
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form have the same shape and different colors.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
The above aspect may be the following aspect.
The predetermined icon, which is the first form, may be changed to the icon, which is the second form.
Among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the first form, the pattern having the highest jackpot expectation is the jackpot than the pattern having the lowest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the second form. The configuration may have high expectations.
Among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the first form, the pattern having the highest expectation of jackpot is higher than the pattern having the second highest expectation of jackpot among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the second form. , The configuration may have a low expectation of big hits.
Among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the first form, the pattern having the highest expectation of jackpot is a jackpot than the pattern having the highest expectation of jackpot among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the second form. The configuration may have low expectations.
The icon of the second form is larger than the icon of the first form.

Hereinafter, the variable icon jump effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. In FIGS. 83 to 85, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. Some are omitted from the above.

This variable icon jump effect can be executed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute the variation icon jump effect, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and changes the position and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2.

Here, the variable icon jump effect A will be described first, the variable icon jump effect B, and the variable icon jump effect C will be described in order.

[The variable icon jump effect A]
The variable icon jump effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect A. The variable icon jump effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative symbol 8Lz, a small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, and a small right decorative symbol 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area is provided for variable effect (variable display). The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz, the small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, A variable effect (variable display) by the small right decorative symbol 8Rz is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz and the small medium are displayed. The decorative design 8Cz and the small right decorative design 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Small left decorative symbol 8Lz, small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, small right decorative symbol 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small left decorative symbol Even if 8Lz and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative symbol 8Rz) is in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

Further, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz and the small size are displayed. The medium decorative symbol 8Cz and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols.

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz , Small medium decorative symbol 8Cz and small right decorative symbol 8Rz are aligned with each of the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 83 (A) and the variation icon jump effect A is started, then, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number ". 1 ”is stopped and displayed, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed by the number“ 3 ”, the variation effect (variation display) by the middle decorative symbol 8C is continued, and the flash FH1 is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad do not become difficult to see due to the flash FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are all disappear from the display screen 7a due to the flash FH1 making it difficult to see. On the other hand, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz, the small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 disappears, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are all maintained in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd jumps toward the center of the display screen 7a. While (while starting to move), the size of the variable icon 9C increases.

When the variable icon 9C arrives at the center of the display screen 7a, the size of the variable icon 9C is about 2 compared to the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 83 (C). It is about 5.5 times larger.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the flash FH2 is emitted from the central portion of the variable icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the variable icon 9C becomes difficult to see due to the flash FH2 and disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad also become difficult to see due to the flash FH2 and temporarily disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz, the small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash FH2 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the flash FH2 disappears, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L stopped and displayed by the number "1" and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed by the number "3" are displayed. It is displayed on the display screen 7a again, and further changes from the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. That is, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variable icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side of the icon 9C passes through the front side and heads toward the right side. In FIG. 83 (F), the white spherical variation icon 9C changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and the icon of the variation icon 9C was successfully changed, but the white spherical variation was successful. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains the white spherical variable icon 9C, it means that the icon change of the variable icon 9C has failed.

Subsequently, when cracks run and are crushed in the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8, the variation icon 9C starts descending (starts moving) while shrinking toward the variation display position 9Cd while rotating. do. When the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8 are crushed, the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is restarted.

Subsequently, when the variation icon 9C has been moved to the variation display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the size of the variation icon 9C is the size before jumping up (that is, FIG. 83 (B)). It returns to the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C at the variation display position 9Cd shown), and is in a state of spinning.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "7" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is varied (variable display) to form a reach. At this time, neither the small left decorative symbol 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the small left decorative symbol 8Lz is small. The medium decorative symbol 8Cz and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz continue to have variable effects (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 from the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, it advances (moves) toward a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then is shown in FIG. 83 (J). Then, it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Subsequently, various effects may be continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it is a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, but the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it's off. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol 8L, the small medium decorative symbol 8C and the small right decorative symbol 8R are also stopped and displayed. When the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In a state where the second movable accessory 15 is in front of the display screen 7a (front) and stopped at a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds). By arranging the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position are arranged for the player. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. When the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player On the other hand, the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are difficult to see.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a at a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds). The variable icon 9C may suggest that the jackpot expectation is increased to change to another icon, and the second movable accessory 15 has the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By arranging it in front of, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, and the player can expect an increase in the jackpot expectation. You can do it. At this time, the variation icon 9C may not change, and the color or shape of the variation display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, the player can be expected to increase the expectation of a big hit.

[The variable icon jump effect B]
Next, the variable icon jump effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect B. The variable icon jump effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative symbol 8Lz, a small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, and a small right decorative symbol 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area is provided for variable effect (variable display). The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz, the small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, A variable effect (variable display) by the small right decorative symbol 8Rz is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz and the small medium are displayed. The decorative design 8Cz and the small right decorative design 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Small left decorative symbol 8Lz, small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, small right decorative symbol 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small left decorative symbol Even if 8Lz and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative symbol 8Rz) is in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

Further, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz and the small size are displayed. The medium decorative symbol 8Cz and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols.

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz , Small medium decorative symbol 8Cz and small right decorative symbol 8Rz are aligned with each of the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 84 (A) and the variation icon jump effect B is started, then, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a disk is displayed from the left side of the display screen 7a. The image EG is displayed and appears, and the disk image EG moves at high speed toward the fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd and collides. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variation effect (variation display) all disappear from the display screen 7a before the disk image EG appears.

When the disk image EG collides with the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation icon 9C jumps toward the center of the display screen 7a (while starting to move), and as shown in FIG. 84 (C), from the fluctuation display position 9Cd. A flash FH is emitted up to the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the flash FH makes it difficult to visually recognize the variable icon 9C. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd may temporarily become difficult to see due to the flash FH and disappear from the display screen 7a, whereas the hold display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a without becoming difficult to see due to the flash FH. There is no. Further, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz, the small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash FH and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 begins to disappear, the presence of the variable icon 9C can be gradually visually recognized in the center of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the variable icon 9C is a white spherical shape. The icon changes from the icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the message MG1 that conveys the increase in jackpot expectation of "UP!" Is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of being tilted upward to the right above the variable icon 9C. NS. That is, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variable icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side of the icon 9C passes through the front side and heads toward the right side. In FIG. 84 (D), the white spherical variation icon 9C changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and the icon of the variation icon 9C was successfully changed, but the white spherical variation was successful. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains the white spherical variable icon 9C, it means that the icon change of the variable icon 9C has failed.

When the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the size of the star-shaped variable icon 9C is the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd. It is about 2.5 times larger than the above.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), when the variation icon 9C starts descending (starts moving) toward the variation display position 9Cd while rotating, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, when the variation icon 9C has been moved to the variation display position 9Cd, the variation icon 9C is maintained in a rotating state as shown in FIG. 84 (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variation effect (variation display) are displayed again on the display screen 7a and appear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "7" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is varied (variable display) to form a reach. At this time, neither the small left decorative symbol 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the small left decorative symbol 8Lz is small. The medium decorative symbol 8Cz and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz continue to have variable effects (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (I), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 from the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, it advances (moves) toward a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then is shown in FIG. 84 (J). Then, it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Subsequently, various effects may be continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it is a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, but the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it's off. When the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In a state where the second movable accessory 15 is in front of the display screen 7a (front) and stopped at a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds). By arranging the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position are arranged for the player. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. When the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player On the other hand, the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are difficult to see.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a at a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds). The variable icon 9C may suggest that the jackpot expectation is increased to change to another icon, and the second movable accessory 15 has the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By arranging it in front of, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, and the player can expect an increase in the jackpot expectation. You can do it. At this time, the variation icon 9C may not change, and the color or shape of the variation display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, the player can be expected to increase the expectation of a big hit.

[The variable icon jump effect C]
Next, the variable icon jump effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect C. The variable icon jump effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative symbol 8Lz, a small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, and a small right decorative symbol 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area is provided for variable effect (variable display). The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz, the small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, A variable effect (variable display) by the small right decorative symbol 8Rz is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz and the small medium are displayed. The decorative design 8Cz and the small right decorative design 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Small left decorative symbol 8Lz, small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, small right decorative symbol 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small left decorative symbol Even if 8Lz and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative symbol 8Rz) is in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

Further, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz and the small size are displayed. The medium decorative symbol 8Cz and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz may be the same as the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols.

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbol is aligned and a big hit occurs, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz , Small medium decorative symbol 8Cz and small right decorative symbol 8Rz are aligned with each of the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold icon is not displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is nothing in stock. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 85A and the variation icon jump effect C is started, then, as shown in FIG. 85B, the variation display position 9Cd and the hold are held. The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the fluctuation icon 9C displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd jumps up (starts moving) toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the variable icon 9C arrives at the center of the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes, as shown in FIG. 85 (C). At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C is about 2.5 times larger than the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd. In addition, in FIG. 85C, the variable icon 9C may be crushed by running a crack in the variable icon 9C without swelling (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large) and exploding. ..

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) explode before the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases). Or, before the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large) and cracks run in the variable icon 9C and are crushed, all of them disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative symbol 8Lz, the small medium decorative symbol 8Cz, and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz during the variable effect (during variable display) do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large) and explodes, or when the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large). ) When a crack runs and is crushed in the variable icon 9C, the white spherical variable icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C as shown in FIG. 85 (D). That is, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variable icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side of the icon 9C passes through the front side and heads toward the right side. In FIG. 85 (D), the white spherical variation icon 9C changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and the icon of the variation icon 9C was successfully changed, but the white spherical variation was successful. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains the white spherical variable icon 9C, it means that the icon change of the variable icon 9C has failed. Further, in FIG. 85 (C), when the variable icon 9C does not swell (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large) and does not explode, it shrinks again and returns to the original size. The variable icon 9C remains, and the icon change of the variable icon 9C fails.

Then, while the fluctuation icon 9C is rotating, it starts descending (starts moving) while shrinking toward the fluctuation display position 9Cd, and when the movement of the fluctuation icon 9C to the position before jumping is completed, the fluctuation icon 9C is completed. The size of 9C returns to the size before jumping (that is, the size of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd shown in FIG. 85B), and the spinning state is maintained. After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a and appear.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 from the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ), Advance (move) toward a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)), stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then move to FIG. 85 (G). As shown, the user returns to the retracted position (home position) again, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variation effect (variation display) are displayed again on the display screen 7a and appear.

In a state where the second movable accessory 15 is in front of the display screen 7a (front) and stopped at a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds). By arranging the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position are arranged for the player. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. When the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player On the other hand, the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are difficult to see.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a at a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds). The variable icon 9C may suggest that the jackpot expectation is increased to change to another icon, and the second movable accessory 15 has the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By arranging it in front of, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, and the player can expect an increase in the jackpot expectation. You can do it. At this time, the variation icon 9C may not change, and the color or shape of the variation display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, the player can be expected to increase the expectation of a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the number "7" temporarily stops), and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is varied (variable display) to form a reach. At this time, neither the small left decorative symbol 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the small left decorative symbol 8Lz is small. The medium decorative symbol 8Cz and the small right decorative symbol 8Rz continue to have variable effects (variable display).

Subsequently, various effects may be continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it is a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, but the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it's off. When the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable icon jump effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, a plurality of types of images can be displayed. After the variation icon 9C is provided with the image display device 7 (display means) and the variation icon 9C is moved from the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position). When the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed from the white spherical icon to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (other display mode), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed again. The first effect to move (FIGS. 83 (B) to (G) in the variable icon jump effect A, FIGS. 84 (B) to (F) in the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 in the variable icon jump effect C. (B) to (E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, after the variation icon 9C is moved from the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position), the display mode is changed. Since it changes to another display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) again, by giving a dynamic movement to the variable icon 9C, an effect variation to the variable icon 9C can be obtained. Further, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the expectation of hitting the fluctuation icon 9C by changing the fluctuation icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the fluctuation icon 9C. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is used. , The center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not displayed. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, for example, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A in FIGS. 83 (B) to (G), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed, and the variable icon may not be displayed. In the first effect of the jump effect B in FIGS. 84 (B) to (F), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed. Therefore, in the first effect, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position) may not be displayed. According to this configuration, in a state where the variable icon 9C exists in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to pay attention to the change of the variable icon 9C.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the image display device. The variable icon 9C changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode) at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of 7 is the variable display position 9Cd (second display position). When moving to the display position (1) again, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not displayed. There is. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, for example, in the first effect of the variation icon jump effect A in FIGS. 83 (B) to (G), the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 83 (G). In the first effect of FIGS. 84 (B) to (F) of the variable icon jump effect B, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 84 (F), and the variable icon jump effect C is displayed. In the first effect in FIGS. 85 (B) to 85 (E), the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 85 (E). According to this configuration, when the variation icon 9C returns to the variation display position 9Cd, the change completion of the variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd (first display position), and further, an image display device. By not displaying any image indicating the center position in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of 7, the existing image, that is, the variable display position 9Cd (the variable display position 9Cd) without displaying the dedicated image. The first display position) can be used for notification.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) representing the display position of the hold icon 9A. ), In the first effect, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed. When the display position) is not displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is not displayed. Specifically, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A in FIGS. 83 (B) to (G), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position are shown in FIG. 83 (B). While 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in FIG. 83 (E). .. Further, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect C in FIGS. 85 (B) to (E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (first display position) are shown in FIG. 85 (B). 3 display position) is displayed, whereas the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and hold display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in FIG. 85 (D). Therefore, in the first effect, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and the variable display position 9Cd (first display) is displayed. When the position) is not displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) may not be displayed. According to this configuration, the variable icon is displayed by displaying or not displaying the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position). It can contribute to the improvement of the effect by combining with the movement and change of 9C.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the image display device 7 (display means). It has a second movable accessory 15 (movable body) that can appear on the front side of the icon, and after the first effect, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position). When the display position) is displayed, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is operated to display the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position). The second effect (FIG. 83 (I) in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84 (I) in the variable icon jump effect B, FIG. 85 (F) in the variable icon jump effect C). Can be executed. According to this configuration, the color of the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) may be changed by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body). Since it is possible to suggest an increase in the expectation of a big hit by changing the shape, it is possible to make the player expect an increase in the expectation of a big hit.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the second movable The accessory 15 (movable body) is operated to cover the variable icon 9C so that it is difficult to see. Specifically, in FIG. 83 (I) in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84 (I) in the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 (F) in the variable icon jump effect C, the second movable accessory. The variable icon 9C is covered with 15 (movable body) to make it difficult to see. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest that the variable icon 9C is changed to another icon by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body), so that the player is expected to have a big hit. You can expect an increase in the degree.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the variable icon When the 9C is moved again from the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the variation display position 9Cd (first display position), the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed. It can be rotated in a predetermined direction. Specifically, in FIG. 83 (G) in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84 (F) in the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 (E) in the variable icon jump effect C, the variable icon 9C is The display mode is such that the left side of the screen repeatedly rotates (rotates in a predetermined direction) in a display mode in which the left side passes through the front side and faces the right side. According to this configuration, attention can be paid to the variable icon 9C after the change.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variable icon jump effect.
[Modification 1]
The variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. Met. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
The second effect in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85 (FIG. 83 (I) in the variable icon jump effect A, the variation). In FIG. 84 (I) in the icon jump effect B and FIG. 85 (F) in the variable icon jump effect C), when the hold icon 9A is present, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is operated to display the hold. The hold icon 9A at the position 9Ad (third display position) may be covered to make it difficult to see. By doing so, it is possible to suggest an increase in the jackpot expectation that the hold icon 9A changes to another icon, so that the second movable accessory 15 has the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable display position 9Cd. By arranging it in front of the hold display position 9Ad, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, and the player can expect a big hit. You can expect it.

[Modification 3]
In the second effect in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is in the retracted position (movable body). From the home position) to the front (front) of the display screen 7a and at a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)), the player stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) to the player. The variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad were difficult to see. When the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. The variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are difficult to see for the player. However, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) does not reach the lower side position (lower advance position (lower effect position)) from the retracted position (home position) to the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a (lower position). For example, the user may move from the evacuation position (home position) to the advance position (lower effect position) at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a) and return to the evacuation position (home position) again. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) does not cover the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad even if it operates, and even if the hold icon 9A is present. Since the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are not covered, the jackpot expectation that the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are actually changed to other icons is increased. Although there is no suggestion of increasing the jackpot expectation that the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad is changed, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) simply operates. Even if this is the case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an increase in the expectation of a big hit may be made.

[Modification 4]
The first effect in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85 (FIGS. 83 (B) to (G) in the variable icon jump effect A. ), FIGS. 84 (B) to (F) in the variable icon jump effect B, and FIGS. 85 (B) to (E) in the variable icon jump effect C), the white spherical variable icon at the variable display position 9Cd. 9C jumped toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C as another icon, and succeeded in changing the icon of the variable icon 9C. However, the hold icon 9A has already changed from a white spherical icon to a blue smiling sphere icon, and when the holding icon 9A of this blue smiling sphere becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable icon jump effect is displayed. The variable icon 9C of a blue smiling sphere jumps toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to another icon such as a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. The icon change of may succeed or fail. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the expectation of hitting the fluctuation icon 9C due to the change of the fluctuation icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the fluctuation icon 9C. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 5]
In the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, when the variable icon 9C arrives at the center of the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large) and explodes. Or, without exploding, a crack ran and shattered in the variable icon 9C. However, when the white spherical variable icon 9C swells and explodes, the shell of the white spherical variable icon 9C is peeled off by this explosion, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C appears as another icon. Alternatively, the white spherical variable icon 9C may swell and be torn apart to explode, and the variable icon 9C, for example, a yellow (gold) star, may appear as another icon. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the change of the variable icon 9C, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the effect of changing the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 6]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the hold icon 9A did not exist, but for example, the first hold display position 9Ad. -When the hold icon 9A exists in the third hold display position 9Ad, that is, when the three hold icons 9A exist, or when the hold icon 9A is in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, respectively. When it exists, that is, when there are four hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A is shifted every time the hold icon 9A is shifted due to the progress of the game as a suggestion (notice) of the variable icon jump effect by the look-ahead effect. The size of 9A may be increased. By doing so, it is possible to indicate to the player the start time of the variable icon jump effect, and it is possible to contribute to raising the expectation for the change of the variable icon 9C due to the variable icon jump effect.

[Modification 7]
In the variation icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variation icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variation icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the white spherical variation icon 9C at the variation display position 9Cd is the center of the display screen 7a. After that, it changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C as another icon, and succeeded in changing the icon of the variable icon 9C. Before and after this change, the size of the variable icon 9C may be increased or decreased. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the change of the variable icon 9C, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the effect of changing the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and then the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped. Immediately before, the fluctuation icon 9C may jump (start moving) from the fluctuation display position 9Cd toward the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display position 9Cd is yellow from another icon (for example, a white spherical variable icon 9C) in the center of the display screen 7a. It may change to the (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C) and return to the variable display position 9Cd again. By doing so, after the variation icon 9C is moved from the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position), the display mode is changed to another. Since it changes to the display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) again, by giving a dynamic movement to the variable icon 9C, the effect variation to the variable icon 9C is increased. Further, it is possible to suggest to the player that the change of the change icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the change icon 9C may increase the expectation of hitting the change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 9]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83 (I), the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84 (I), and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85 (F), the second movable accessory 15 is an image display device. From a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above 7, advance toward a position closer to the lower side (lower advance position (lower effect position)) on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (lower advance position (lower effect position)). (Move), stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then return to the retracted position (home position) again. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, another movable accessory provided in the game board 2 may be used. For example, a lower movable accessory is provided below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the lower movable accessory is stationary at the retracted position (home position) from the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Forward), advance (move) so as to cover all of the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A (there may be a maximum of four hold balls). It may be stopped for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) and then returned to the retracted position (home position) again. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation level is increased by changing the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad by the operation of the lower movable accessory. Since the player can be expected to increase the jackpot expectation, and the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be suggested to be changed to another icon, the player can be expected to increase the jackpot expectation. You can expect an increase in expectations.

[Modification 10]
The variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85 may not have a part of the described effect, and other effects may be provided. It may have been added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A12-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
When the variable icon moves from the first display position to the second display position and then the display mode of the variable icon is changed to another display mode, the variable icon moves to the first display position again. The production of 1 is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A12-1.
In the first effect, the first display position and the second display position may not be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A12-1 or the aspect A12-2.
In the first effect, when the variable icon changed to the other display mode at the second display position moves to the first display position again, the first display position is displayed and the second display position is displayed. Do not display the display position of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A12-1 to A12-3.
There is a third display position that represents the display position of the hold icon,
In the first effect, the third display position may be displayed when the first display position is displayed, and the third display position may not be displayed when the first display position is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A12-4.
It has a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
When the first display position and the third display position are displayed after the first effect, the movable body is operated to operate the first display position and the third display position. It is possible to carry out a second effect that covers and makes it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A12-5.
In the second effect, the movable body may be operated to cover the variable icon to make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-7]
A game machine according to the aspect A12-5 or the aspect A12-6.
In the second effect, the movable body may be operated to cover the hold icon at the third display position, making it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A12-1 to A12-7.
In the first effect, when the variable icon is moved from the second display position to the first display position again, the variable icon is rotated in a predetermined direction at the first display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation means appearance effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. The operation means appearance effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation means appearance effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L.

[Operating means appearance production A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect A. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when the operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating the operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state on the display screen 7a in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (here). Then, it is the reach of "2 ↓ 2"). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), an operation promotion image SG for urging the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a character image of "press!" And is enlarged and displayed over three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed outside the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN has not been displayed yet. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is confused for a moment as to what to operate. As a result, it is possible to raise interest in the operation target and improve the interest. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the operation promotion image SG is reduced and displayed, and the entire operation promotion image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. It fits. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operating means image BTN has not yet been displayed. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the operation promotion image SG is further reduced and displayed, and the entire operation promotion image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation means image BTN has not been displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the operation promotion image SG is further reduced and moved on the display screen 7a, and is displayed at a position not overlapping the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. Further, the operation means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. By displaying the operation means image BTN, the player notices that the operation of the effect button 63 has been prompted, and the attention is focused on the effect button 63. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are reduced and displayed. Normally, the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are both displayed and then not reduced and displayed, so that the player's attention can be attracted again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter, and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. As shown in FIGS. 86 (G) and 86 (H), the specific image TG is displayed in order from the left side of the scale panel, and the effect of being gradually completed is executed. When all the scale panels are complete (6 sheets here) and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in FIG. 86 (I), the specific image TG can be operated by the player as an operation means (here, the effect button 63). The mode changes in conjunction with this. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side to notify that the remaining period required for the effect button 63 to be operated is shortened. There is. Unless the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG does not change in order from the left side.

After that, when the period required for the operation of the effect button 63 expires, the display of the operation means image BTN, the operation promotion image SG, and the specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the definite stop is made in the mode of loss.

[Operation means appearance effect B]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect B. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when the operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating the operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state on the display screen 7a in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (here). Then, it is the reach of "2 ↓ 2"). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), an operation promotion image SG for urging the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a character image of "continuous hitting !!", "pressing !!", and "long pressing!", And these characters are sequentially displayed alternately at a predetermined timing. Here, it switches in the order of "continuous hits !!" → "press!" → "long press!" → "continuous hits !!". The operation promotion image SG is enlarged and displayed over three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed outside the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN has not been displayed yet. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is confused for a moment as to what to operate. Furthermore, since the content of the operation promotion image SG is switched regularly, I am confused about how to operate it. As a result, it is possible to raise interest in the operation target and operation method and improve the interest. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the operation promotion image SG is reduced and displayed, and the entire operation promotion image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. It fits. The character content of the operation promotion image SG is continuously switched. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operating means image BTN has not yet been displayed. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the operation promotion image SG is further reduced and displayed, and the entire operation promotion image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. The character content of the operation promotion image SG is continuously switched. At this time, the operation means image BTN has not been displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the operation promotion image SG is further reduced and moved on the display screen 7a, and is displayed at a position not overlapping the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. Further, the operation means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. By displaying the operation means image BTN, the player notices that the operation of the effect button 63 has been prompted, and the attention is focused on the effect button 63. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are reduced and displayed. Normally, after the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are both displayed, they are not reduced and displayed, so that the player's attention can be attracted again. Even at this time, the character content of the operation promotion image SG is continuously switched.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter, and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. The specific image TG is displayed in order from the left side as shown in FIGS. 87 (G) and 87 (H) by the player operating the effect button 63 according to the contents of the operation promotion image SG which is sequentially changed. And the production that is gradually completed is executed. That is, when the operation promotion image SG is "continuous hit !!", the effect button 63 is repeatedly hit, when "press !!", the effect button 63 is pressed, and when "long press!", The effect button 63 is pressed. By pressing and holding 63, this scale panel is displayed in order from the left side. If the player does not perform an operation according to the display content of the operation promotion image SG, the scale panel does not increase. If all the scale panels (6 in this case) are prepared within a predetermined period, the specific image TG is completed. If all the scale panels are not aligned within a predetermined period, the operation means image BTN, the operation promotion image SG, and the specific image TG disappear at that time.

As shown in FIG. 87 (I), the mode of the specific image TG changes in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (here, the effect button 63) by the player. Here, the specific image TG stops switching in a state where "continuous hits !!" is displayed. In this state, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side, and when the colors of all the scale panels change, the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image are changed. The display of SG and the specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the definite stop is made in the mode of loss.

[Operating means appearance effect C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect C. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when the operation means image ASI, which is an image imitating the operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 88A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state on the display screen 7a in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (here). Then, it is the reach of "2 ↓ 2"). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 88B, an operation promotion image SG for urging the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a character image of "push in!" And is enlarged and displayed over three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed outside the three screens. At this time, the operating means image ASI has not yet been displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image ASI. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is confused for a moment as to what to operate. As a result, it is possible to raise interest in the operation target and improve the interest. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88C, the operation promotion image SG is reduced and displayed, and the entire operation promotion image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. It fits. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operating means image ASI has not yet been displayed. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the operation promotion image SG is further reduced and displayed, and the entire operation promotion image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operating means image ASI has not yet been displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R by the reduced display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the operation means image ASI is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. The operation means image ASI is displayed so as to overlap the operation promotion image SG. At this time, the operation means image ASI is displayed on the front side. Thereby, the impact of the operation means image ASI can be given. Here, the operation means image ASI is an image imitating the sword member 65. Operation means The player notices that the operation of the sword member 65 has been prompted by the display of the image ASI, and the attention is focused on the sword member 65. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), both the operation means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG are reduced and displayed below the display screen 7a. Normally, the operation means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG are both displayed and then not reduced and displayed, so that the player's attention can be attracted again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operation means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter, and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. As shown in FIGS. 88 (G) and 88 (H), the specific image TG is displayed in order from the left side of the scale panel, and the effect of being gradually completed is executed. When all the scale panels are complete (6 in this case) and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in FIG. 88 (I), the specific image TG can be used by the player to operate the operating means (here, the sword member 65). The mode changes in conjunction with this. Here, when the player pushes the sword member 65 downward, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side to notify that the remaining period required for the operation of the sword member 65 is shortened. doing.

After that, when the period required for the operation of the sword member 65 expires, the display of the operation means image ASI, the operation promotion image SG, and the specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the definite stop is made in the mode of loss.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation means appearance effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B) to (D), 87 (B) to (D), and 88 (B) to (D), the operation means image is displayed on the display screen 7a. The first effect in which the operation promotion image SG is displayed while the BTN and ASI are not displayed, and the second effect in which the operation means images BTN and ASI are displayed after the first effect are executed. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B) to (D), 87 (B) to (D), and 88 (B) to (D), the operation is performed in the first effect. The promoted image SG is displayed so as to straddle at least one of the sub display screens 64R and 64L and the display screen 7a, and then is reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B) to (D), 87 (B) to (D), and 88 (B) to (D), the operation is performed in the first effect. The promotion image SG is displayed straddling the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is displayed straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and then is reduced to the display screen 7a. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B) to (E), 87 (B) to (E), and 88 (B) to (D), the first effect is reach. After the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped in the state, it is reduced and displayed at a position that does not overlap the decorative symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (E) to (F), FIGS. 87 (E) to (F), and FIGS. 88 (E) to (F), after the second effect, The operation means images BTN and ASI and the operation promotion image SG are both reduced and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (F) to (I), 87 (F) to (I), and 88 (F) to (I), after the second effect, On the back side of the operating means image BTN and ASI, a specific image TG whose mode changes in association with the operation of the operating means by the player is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation means appearance effect.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means appearance effects A to C, the operation promotion image SG is displayed straddling the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is displayed straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. After that, it was reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the operation promotion image SG may be displayed straddling one of the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and may not be displayed on the other sub display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means appearance effect A, as shown in FIG. 86 (I), the mode of the specific image TG is assumed to change in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (effect button 63) by the player. That is, when the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side, and the remaining period in which the effect button 63 needs to be operated is shortened. However, even if the player does not press the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG may change in order from the left side with time.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates the operation means.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image that urges the player to operate the operation means.
The first effect in which the operation promotion image is displayed while the operation means image is not displayed on the display means, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the operation means image is displayed can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-1 is further described.
Equipped with a sub-display means that can display multiple types of images
In the first effect, the operation promotion image is displayed straddling the sub-display means and the display means, and then reduced and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-2.
The sub-display means are provided on both sides of the display means, respectively.
In the first effect, the operation promotion image is displayed straddling both the sub-display means and the display means, and then reduced and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
The first effect is characterized in that the operation promotion image is displayed on top of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the reach state, and then reduced and displayed at a position not overlapping the decorative symbol. Gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
After the second effect, both the operation means image and the operation promotion image are reduced and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5.
After the second effect, a specific image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation of the operating means by the player is displayed on the back side of the operating means image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The parts assembly effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. In FIGS. 89 to 91, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. Some are omitted from the above.

This component assembly effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a specific area variable effect, the corresponding image is taken from the ROM 103. The data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

Here, first, the component assembly effect A will be described, and then the component assembly effect B and the component assembly effect C will be described in order.

[Parts assembly production A]
The component assembly effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the component assembly effect A. The component assembly effect A is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. At this time, the decorative pattern is not displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 89 (A), then, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), the image display device 7 is displayed from the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L. Five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 toward the center of the display screen 7a. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that allows the player to push the entire sword member 65 downward. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword. This sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production, which is executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 is displayed so as to enter the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and move toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , The display mode is such that the image display device 7 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 moves from the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that it enters and moves toward the center, and the component image PT5 is a display that enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes an aspect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89C, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG have the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. It will be placed in the lower center of each display screen across the screen. The component image PT2 is arranged in a state of being arranged near the center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. The component image PT3 is arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT4 is arranged near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT5 is arranged in the center of the left sub display screen 64L, and eventually, the left sub display screen does not protrude from the left sub display screen 64L to the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R of the image display device 7. It is displayed directly on 64L. The component image PT1 is arranged at the lower center of each display screen while straddling the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. It becomes. Further, the component image PT2 is also arranged in a state of being arranged near the center of each display screen while straddling the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. It becomes. The component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the sword image KG in a state of lying down sideways. Is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver because the five parts images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the shape of the pattern is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the size of the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 89 (B) and (C) becomes smaller, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. 89 (B) and (C). It is in a state of being smaller than the size of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 89 (E) and 89 (F), the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG in the state of lying down is rotated clockwise so as to face upward, and the sword image KG. Move the sword image KG downward so that the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG is placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and move the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG (sword button KBG). The display mode is such that the portion including the portion) emits light.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the sword image KG is enlarged, and the end portion of the sword handle in the sword image KG is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the operation (pressing) of the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, the sword button provided at the end of the sword handle (the sword button KBG provided at the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG) is urged. The message MG "press here" is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is divided into three characters, "here" and two characters, "press", and "here" without covering the sword image KG to the left of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG. The three characters "press" are arranged on the right side of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this way, the content that prompts the operation (pressing) of the sword button of the sword member 65, "press here", can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. In addition, the position of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG that imitates the sword button of the sword member 65 that is the operation target can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without obstructing the visibility of the message MG. can.

The indicator image IG indicating the period for accepting the operation (pressing) of the sword button of the sword member 65 (hereinafter referred to as "operation acceptance period") forms a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the handle of the sword). It is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover it. By arranging in this way, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly emphasized and conveyed to the player.

When the player operates (presses) the sword button of the sword member 65, or when the player does not operate (press) the sword button of the sword member 65 and the operation acceptance period elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L Is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "7". At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

[Parts assembly production B]
Next, the component assembly effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the component assembly effect B. The component assembly effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. At this time, the decorative pattern is not displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 90 (A), then, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), the image display device 7 is displayed from the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L. Five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 toward the center of the display screen 7a. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, whereas the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed from the display screen 7a. disappear. As a result, the variable icon 9C can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying only the variable icon 9C which has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon. Here, the variable icon 9C is arranged on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that the visibility is not hindered by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that allows the player to push the entire sword member 65 downward. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword. This sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production, which is executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 is displayed so as to enter the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and move toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , The display mode is such that the image display device 7 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 moves from the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that it enters and moves toward the center, and the component image PT5 is a display that enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes an aspect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90C, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG have the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. It will be placed in the lower center of each display screen across the screen. The component image PT2 is arranged in a state of being arranged near the center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. The component image PT3 is arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT4 is arranged near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT5 is arranged in the center of the left sub display screen 64L, and eventually, the left sub display screen does not protrude from the left sub display screen 64L to the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R of the image display device 7. It is displayed directly on 64L. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

The component image PT1 is arranged at the lower center of each display screen while straddling the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. It becomes. Further, the component image PT2 is also arranged in a state of being arranged near the center of each display screen while straddling the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. It becomes. The component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the sword image KG in a state of lying down sideways. Is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver because the five parts images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the shape of the pattern is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the size of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 90 (B) and (C) becomes smaller, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. 90 (B) and (C). It is in a state of being smaller than the size of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 90 (E) and 90 (F), the end of the handle of the sword in the sword image KG in the state of lying down is rotated clockwise so as to face upward, and then the sword. The entire image KG is further reduced and is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the sword image KG is enlarged this time, and the entire sword image KG is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the message MG of "pushing" prompting the operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is divided into two characters, "push" and "put", and the two characters "push" are placed on the left side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. , The two characters "put" are placed on the right side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this way, the content of "pushing" that encourages the operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. Further, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 to be operated can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without the message MG impairing the visibility.

The indicator image IG indicating the period for accepting the operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (hereinafter referred to as "operation acceptance period") is a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the handle of the sword). It is displayed near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover the image display device 7. By arranging in this way, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly emphasized and conveyed to the player. Also in FIG. 90 (G), the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

FIG. 90. When the player performs an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, or when the player does not perform an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (pushing) and the operation acceptance period has elapsed, FIG. As shown in (H), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90 (I), the battle effect is started. In the battle production, two characters (friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big hit is high. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are maintained in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and after that, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and are out of order. When the battle effect is completed and the jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. .. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

[Parts assembly production C]
Next, the component assembly effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the component assembly effect C. The component assembly effect C is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. At this time, the decorative pattern is not displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 91 (A), then, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the image display device 7 is displayed from the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L. Five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 toward the center of the display screen 7a. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, whereas the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed from the display screen 7a. disappear. As a result, the variable icon 9C can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying only the variable icon 9C which has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon. Here, the variable icon 9C is arranged on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that the visibility is not hindered by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that allows the player to push the entire sword member 65 downward. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword. This sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production, which is executed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 is displayed so as to enter the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and move toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , The display mode is such that the image display device 7 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 moves from the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that it enters and moves toward the center, and the component image PT5 is a display that enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes an aspect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG have the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. It will be placed in the lower center of each display screen across the screen. The component image PT2 is arranged in a state of being arranged near the center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. The component image PT3 is arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT4 is arranged near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT5 is arranged in the center of the left sub display screen 64L, and eventually, the left sub display screen does not protrude from the left sub display screen 64L to the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R of the image display device 7. It is displayed directly on 64L. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

The component image PT1 is arranged at the lower center of each display screen while straddling the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. It becomes. Further, the component image PT2 is also arranged in a state of being arranged near the center of each display screen while straddling the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. It becomes. The component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the sword image KG in a state of lying down sideways. Is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver because the five parts images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the shape of the pattern is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the size of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 91 (B) and (C) becomes smaller, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. 91 (B) and (C). It is in a state of being smaller than the size of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 91 (E) and 91 (F), the end of the handle of the sword in the sword image KG in the state of lying down is rotated clockwise so as to face upward, and then the sword. The entire image KG is further reduced and is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the sword image KG is enlarged this time, and the entire sword image KG is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in order to disassemble the assembled sword image KG, FIG. 91 (F) → FIG. 91 (E) → FIG. 91 (D) → FIG. 91 (C) (FIG. 91) in a manner of returning the steps so far one by one. (H)) (FIG. 91 (H) is the same diagram as FIG. 91 (C)), and the component images PT1 to PT5 appear. Even if such a procedure is returned one by one, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Then, in order to assemble the sword image KG from the part images PT1 to PT5 again, FIG. 91 (C) (FIG. 91 (H)) → FIG. 91 (D) → FIG. (E) → FIG. 91 (F), and then, as shown in FIG. 91 (I), the sword image KG is enlarged again, and the entire sword image KG is centered on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed large. Even if such a procedure proceeds one by one, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained. The color and pattern shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91 (G) are silver because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. In addition, the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. On the other hand, the color and the shape of the pattern of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91 (I) change from silver (silver) to gold (gold), and the shape of the pattern is wound with a rope from a smooth surface. It changes to a shape with irregularities. That is, the color and the shape of the pattern of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91 (G) are different from the shape of the color and the pattern of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91 (I). This clearly emphasizes and suggests that expectations for big hits have increased.

In FIG. 91 (I), a message MG of "pushing" prompting an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward is further displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is divided into two characters, "push" and "put", and the two characters "push" are placed on the left side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. , The two characters "put" are placed on the right side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this way, the content of "pushing" that encourages the operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. Further, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 to be operated can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without the message MG impairing the visibility.

The indicator image IG indicating the period for accepting the operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (hereinafter referred to as "operation acceptance period") is a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the handle of the sword). It is displayed near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover the image display device 7. By arranging in this way, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly emphasized and conveyed to the player.

FIG. 91: As shown in (J), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91 (K), the battle effect is started. In the battle production, two characters (friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big hit is high. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are maintained in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and after that, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and are out of order. When the battle effect is completed and the jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. .. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the parts assembly effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, an image display device 7 capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, right. The sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (provided with a plurality of display means), the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (multiple display means) have an image display device 7 (main display). Means) and one or more right sub display screen 64R and left sub display screen 64L (sub display means) excluding the image display device 7 (main display means), and the sword member 65 (means) that can be operated by the player. The parts images PT1 to PT5 (parts) of the sword image KG (operation means image) imitating the operation means) are displayed from the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means) to the image display device 7 (main display means). The first effect (FIGS. 89 (B) and (C) in the component assembly effect A, FIGS. 90 (B) and (C) in the component assembly effect B, and FIG. 91 (B) in the component assembly effect C). , (C)) and the second effect of assembling the parts images PT1 to PT5 (parts) in the image display device 7 (main display means) to complete the sword image KG (operation means image) after the first effect. (FIG. 89 (D) in the component assembly effect A, FIG. 90 (D) in the component assembly effect B, and FIG. 91 (D) in the component assembly effect C. According to this, the component images PT1 to PT5 (parts) of the sword image KG (operating means image) imitating the sword member 65 (operating means) are displayed on the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (plural). The unprecedented novelty of assembling a sword image KG (operation means image) using the display means of the above can provide the player with an effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the image display device 7 (main display means). A part of the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) displayed in the above is displayed so as to protrude from the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means). According to this configuration, the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) are displayed in a large size by using the image display device 7 (main display means), and further using the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to telling the player what kind of parts the sword member 65 is actually composed of in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display There are parts images PT4 and PT5 (parts) that are directly displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the screen 64L (sub display means). According to this configuration, among the component images PT1 to PT5 (components), they are displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) via the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means). Since there are some that are directly displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means), the part image PT1 It is possible to give diversity in the direction in which the PT5 (part) enters the image display device 7 (main display means). In other words, various effects by the parts images PT1 to PT5 (parts) can be supported by using the image display device 7 (main display means), the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means). Can be emphasized to the person.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword member 65 (operating means) is imitated. When the completed sword image KG (operation means image) is completed, the size of the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in a large size, and a message MG (operation promotion image) prompting the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is displayed. It is designed to be displayed. According to this configuration, the size of the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in a large size, in other words, the sword image KG (operation means image) is enlarged and displayed, and further, the sword member 65 (operation means) is displayed. Since the message MG (operation promotion image) prompting the operation is displayed, the player is informed of the start time of the operation timing of the sword member 65 (operation means) in an easy-to-understand manner, and the game is told what the player will do from now on. Can be emphasized and communicated to others.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect of the part assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword member 65 (operating means) is operated. Then, the sword image KG (operation means image) disappears. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the operation of the sword member 65 (operating means) has been accepted.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect of the part assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. An indicator image IG (reception period image) indicating the period for accepting the sword is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can grasp the remaining time of the period for accepting the operation of the sword member 65 (operating means), so that the player can calmly operate the sword member 65 (operating means) at his / her own timing. Can be done.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the end of the sword handle (including the sword button KBG) in the sword image KG of the sword image KG (operation means image) is included. The display mode can be such that (part) (part) emits light. According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to making it easier for the player to recognize which part of the sword member 65 (operating means) imitated by the sword image KG (operating means image) is desired to be operated by the player. ..

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific area variable effect.
[Modification 1]
The parts assembly effect A in FIG. 89, the component assembly effect B in FIG. 90, and the component assembly effect C in FIG. 91 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the part assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 was assembled by the part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, the decorative pattern may be assembled from a plurality of images. For example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (for example, the number "7"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the variable effect (variable display), a reach is formed. , Using the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (plural display means) to assemble the intermediate decorative pattern 8C, from all directions toward the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A plurality of fragment images may be collected, and finally, the big hit or the miss may be confirmed and displayed by the assembled middle decorative pattern 8C. In this case, while the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is being assembled, the player changes the color of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C (for example, changing it to red or changing it to rainbow) to determine the expectation of a big hit. May be suggested to.

[Modification 3]
In the part assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 was assembled by the part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, another member arranged on the game board 2 or the front frame 53 may be used. For example, an image imitating the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged on the game board 2 may be assembled from the component images, or may be arranged on the front frame 53. An image imitating the handle 60 to be formed may be assembled from a part image. By doing this, the variation of the production can be increased. Further, as the members to be assembled, a sword member 65, a handle 60, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories are prepared in a plurality of manners, and the expected degree of jackpot is set in advance. You may do so. In this way, it is possible for the player to find out the relationship between the assembled member and the expectation of the jackpot.

[Modification 4]
In the component assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the component assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the component assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled by the part images PT1 to PT5, and then the image display device 7 The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R were stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the result of the winning determination (big hit or miss) was notified to the player. However, when the parts assembly effect of assembling the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 by the parts images PT1 to PT5 is performed, the result of the winning determination (big hit or immediately after the assembly) is performed. An image display device that suggests a suggestion image (for example, when suggesting a big hit, a ally character in the form of a wing man is displayed, and when suggesting a miss, an enemy character is displayed) that suggests a miss) to the player. 7. It may be displayed on one of the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L. When the parts assembly production is performed, the development of the subsequent production is an important concern for the player, so the player predicts how the production will be developed by the appearance of the suggestion image. In addition, it can contribute to the player's own finding of the relationship and rules between the parts assembly production and the subsequent production.

[Modification 5]
In the part assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 was assembled by the part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 can be assembled from the part image, or the lever image imitating the lever provided on the front frame 53 can be assembled from the part image. You can also do it. By doing this, the variation of the production can be increased. The lever provided on the front frame 53 may be a joystick or a rotary lever, and can be operated by the player at the time of production or the like, which is executed as the game progresses.

[Modification 6]
In the part assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 was assembled by the part images PT1 to PT5. However, an operation unit different from the sword member 65 may be displayed on any of the display screens of the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. For example, a select button image imitating the select button 68 as an operation unit separate from the sword member 65 is displayed on one of the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. You may do it. Unlike the sword image KG that imitates the sword member 65, the select button image is not assembled by the parts image in the parts assembly production, for example, changing the production mode (for example, spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode). It informs the player that (change to any of these modes) can be performed (accepted) at the player's timing. That is, when the select button image is displayed, the effect mode can be changed (accepted) at the timing of the player. The sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 and the select button image imitating the select button 68 are simultaneously displayed separately on one of the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L. Or may be displayed on the same display screen. As described above, among the sword member 65 and the select button 68 that can be operated by the player, the sword member 65 that is assembled by the parts image in the parts assembly effect and the select button 68 that cannot be assembled by the parts image in the parts assembly effect. However, even if the sword image KG is displayed, the operation of the sword member 65 is shown in FIG. 89 (G) in the part assembly effect A, FIG. 90 (G) in the part assembly effect B, and FIG. (I) The operation of the select button 68 is different in that it is accepted when the select button image is displayed, whereas it is not accepted unless the indicator image IG is displayed. Even if the sword member 65 and the select button 68 are displayed at the same time, the sword member 65 and the select button 68 as the operation unit can be used properly in the production.

[Modification 7]
In the parts assembly effect B of FIGS. 90 (B) to (G) and the part assembly effect C of FIGS. 91 (B) to (I), the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon are shown. It changed to 9C and was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, for example, the display mode may be a moving image in which the star-shaped variable icon 9C contracts or expands up and down so as to bounce up and down, or the moving image may be rotated in a spinning manner. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the effect of the effect depending on the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the parts assembly effect B of FIGS. 90 (B) to (G) and the part assembly effect C of FIGS. 91 (B) to (I), the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon are shown. It changed to 9C and was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, about 5 to 8 times) as compared with the size of the white spherical icon. By doing so, the change of the variable icon 9C can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Modification 9]
In the component assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the component assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the component assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the first special figure hold and the second start port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the image display device 7 is arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is intuitively easy to understand. Further, since the other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and displayed behind the frontmost image of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, when the component assembly effect is started, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are then moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to assemble the sword image KG. As a result, the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a may be misunderstood by the player as the total number of component images constituting the sword image KG. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, the sub display screen 64U) is used. The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number displayed with the number of reserved balls described above as a numerical value. By doing so, there is no risk that the number displayed as a numerical value for the number of reserved balls will be misunderstood by the player as the total number of component images constituting the sword image KG, and the number of reserved balls will be displayed as a numerical value. The numbers can be confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it difficult to distinguish them, and making them intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 10]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the part assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C of FIG. 91, a part of the described effects may not be provided, or other effects may be added. ..

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a plurality of display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
The display means includes a main display means and one or more sub-display means excluding the main display means.
The first effect in which the parts of the operation means image imitating the operation means that can be operated by the player move from the sub display means to the main display means, and
After the first effect, the second effect of assembling the parts and completing the operation means image in the main display means can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
In the second effect, a part of the component displayed on the main display means is displayed so as to protrude from the sub display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2.
In the first effect, there is the component that is directly displayed on the main display means without going through the sub display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3.
In the second effect, when the operation means image is completed, the size of the operation means image is displayed in a large size, and further, an operation promotion image for prompting the operation of the operation means is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4.
In the second effect, when the operating means is operated, the operating means image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or aspect B2-5.
In the second effect, a reception period image showing a period for accepting the operation of the operation means is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that

◇ [Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-4 to B2-6.
In the second effect, the display mode is such that a part of the operation means image emits light.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative design effects A to C during reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. This decorative symbol effect at the time of reach can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol effect at the time of reach, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L.

[Decorative design production A at the time of reach]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol effect A at the time of reach. In the reach effect, which is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, the decorative symbol effect at the time of reach is different from the reach symbol in the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. After that, the reach pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 92A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state on the display screen 7a in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (here). Then, it is the reach of "2 ↓ 2"). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 92B, the symbol 8M frame-in from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, “6”) different from the reach symbols (here, “2”) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As shown in FIGS. 92 (C) to 92 (D), the symbol 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a after frame-in.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the symbol 8M moves to the left and stops in a state of straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. At this time, the left side of the symbol 8M is displayed so as to protrude from the left sub display screen 64L. After that, the symbol 8M moves to the right, returns to the inside of the display screen 7a, and then moves further to the right, straddling the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 92 (F). Stop in a stiff state. At this time, the right side of the symbol 8M is displayed so as to protrude from the right sub display screen 64R. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), the symbol 8M disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the reach symbol move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are switched (changed) to a symbol having the same number as the symbol 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are in the reach state by the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of hitting or losing.

[Decorative design production B at the time of reach]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol effect B at the time of reach. In the reach effect, which is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, the decorative symbol effect at the time of reach is different from the reach symbol in the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. After that, the reach pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state on the display screen 7a in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (here). Then, it is the reach of "2 ↓ 2"). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 93B, a plurality of symbols 8M frame in from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and move toward the left. The symbol 8M is a number (here, “6”) different from the reach symbols (here, “2”) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move in the upper left direction and the lower left direction in addition to the left direction, and move radially from the right sub display screen 64R toward the display screen 7a. When the symbol 8M is moved from the right sub display screen 64R to the display screen 7a, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. The symbol 8M also moves in the left direction, the upper left direction, and the lower left direction while diffusing on the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the symbol 8M further moves from the display screen 7a toward the left sub-display screen 64L while diffusing. When the symbol 8M is moved from the display screen 7a to the left sub display screen 64L, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, some of the symbols 8M temporarily overlap the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during movement. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the front side. The size of the symbol 8M gradually increases during movement (enlarged and displayed while moving).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are framed out from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a by moving, and the three screens. Disappears from (not displayed). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), a plurality of symbols 8M frame in from the lower part of the display screen 7a and move upward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, “6”) different from the reach symbols (here, “2”) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move in the upper right direction and the upper left direction in addition to the upward direction, and are directed toward the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L in addition to the upward direction of the display screen 7a. And move radially.

As shown in FIG. 93 (F), when the symbol 8M is moved from the display screen 7a to the right sub display screen 64R, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R. When the symbol 8M is moved from the display screen 7a to the left sub display screen 64L, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, some of the symbols 8M temporarily overlap the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during movement. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the front side. The size of the symbol 8M gradually increases during movement (enlarged and displayed while moving).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are framed out from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a by moving. Then, it disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the reach symbol move toward the center of the display screen 7a while three-dimensionally rotating horizontally. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in a state where the left and right sides are reversed at the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (J), it is switched (changed) to a symbol having the same number as the symbol 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (J) of the decorative symbol effect A at the time of reach, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are in the reach state by the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. And stop there. After that, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of hitting or losing.

[Decorative design production C at the time of reach]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol effect C at the time of reach. In the reach effect, which is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, the decorative symbol effect at the time of reach is different from the reach symbol in the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. After that, the reach pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 93 (A) of the decorative symbol effect A at the time of reach, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L. , 8R is in reach (here, reach of "2 ↓ 2"). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the symbol 8M frame-in from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, “6”) different from the reach symbols (here, “2”) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 94 (B) to 94 (C), the symbol 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a after frame-in. By this enlarged display, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the left side of the symbol 8M is in a state of straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right side of the symbol 8M is the right sub display screen 64R. It is in a state of straddling the display screen 7a. Further, the symbol 8M overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R by the enlarged display. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the front side.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the symbol 8M is enlarged and displayed to a certain extent, and then disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), a plurality of symbols 8M frame in from above the display screen 7a and move downward. The symbol 8M is a number (here, “6”) different from the reach symbols (here, “2”) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move in the lower right direction and the lower left direction in addition to the downward direction, and are displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L in addition to the downward direction of the display screen 7a. It moves radially toward it.

As shown in FIG. 94 (F), when the symbol 8M is moved from the display screen 7a to the right sub display screen 64R, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R. Further, when the symbol 8M is moved from the display screen 7a to the left sub display screen 64L, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the left sub display screen 64L. The size of the symbol 8M gradually increases during movement (enlarged and displayed while moving).

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are framed out from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a by moving. Then, it disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the reach symbol move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are switched (changed) to a symbol having the same number as the symbol 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are in the reach state by the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of hitting or losing.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design effect at the time of reach.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state with the first symbol (for example, “2”) on the display screen 7a, the first is The first effect in which a second symbol (for example, the symbol 8M representing "6") different from the symbol in 1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the second symbol is on the right sub-display screen. It is possible to execute the second effect displayed on the 64R and the third effect in which the decorative symbol in the reach state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol after the second effect. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the first effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is gradually enlarged after being displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 94, in the first effect, a plurality of second symbols (symbols 8M) are displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 94, a part of the plurality of second symbols (symbol 8M) is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol in the reach state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative design effect at the time of reach.
[Modification 1]
The effects of the decorative design effects A to C at the time of reach may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the reach-time decorative symbol effect C, instead of the effects of FIGS. 94 (A) to 94 (D), the effects of FIGS. 92 (B) to (G) of the reach-time decorative symbol effect A may be executed. Further, in the reach-time decorative symbol effect A, instead of the effects of FIGS. 92 (H) to (J), the effects of FIGS. 93 (H) to (J) of the reach-time decorative symbol effect B may be executed.

[Modification 2]
The aspect of the symbol 8M may be the same as that of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, or may be a different aspect. The aspect here refers to a shape, a font, a color, a size, and the like.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine provided with a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
In the first display means, when the decorative symbol is in the reach state with the first symbol, the second effect different from the first symbol is displayed on the first display means, and the first effect.
After the first effect, the second effect in which the second symbol is displayed on the second display means, and
A gaming machine characterized in that after the second effect, a third effect in which the decorative symbol in the reach state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol can be executed.
◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C1-1.
In the second effect, the second symbol is also displayed on the first display means.
◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C1-1 or the aspect C1-2.
In the first effect, the second symbol is displayed on the first display means and then gradually becomes larger.
◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3.
In the first effect, a gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of the second symbols are displayed on the first display means.
◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the plurality of second symbols is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol in a reach state.
◇ [Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5 is further described.
It is equipped with a third display means that can display multiple types of images.
In the second effect, the second symbol is also displayed on the third display means.

The group promotion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. This group promotion effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the group promotion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Group promotion production A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the group promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the group effect (first term) is executed. In the group effect (first half year), the button image BGS imitating the effect button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the group effect (mid-term) is executed. In the group effect (mid-term), the button image BGS moves in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. Also at this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), the group effect (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the button image BGS moves to the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears off the screen. Also at this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), the symbol effect is executed. In the design production, the design may be promoted. Here, the left and right production symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7". These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. If the symbol "7" is a hit, the transition to the high accuracy and high base state is confirmed after the big hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have been confirmed and stopped at "7". In the case of loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at "8".

[Group promotion production B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the group promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the group effect (first term) is executed. In the group effect (first half year), the button image BGS imitating the effect button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the group effect (mid-term) is executed. In the group effect (mid-term), the button image BGS moves in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. Also at this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the group effect (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the button image BGS moves to the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears off the screen. Also at this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), the symbol effect is executed. In the design production, the design may be promoted. Here, the left and right production symbols 8L and 8R are not promoted as "4". These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are confirmed and stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbols 8C are confirmed and stopped at "3". In the case of a hit, for example, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop at "4".

[Group promotion production C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the group promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the group production (first term) is executed. In the group production (first half year), the 7 symbol image ZGS imitating the "7" symbol appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The 7 symbol images ZGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the group effect (mid-term) is executed. In the group production (mid-term), the 7 symbol image ZGS moves in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the 7 symbol image ZGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG. Also at this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the group production (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the 7 symbol image ZGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the 7 symbol image ZGS moves to the left as indicated by the arrow YG and disappears from the screen. Also at this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (F), the symbol effect is executed. In the design production, the design may be promoted. Here, the left and right production symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7". These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. If the symbol "7" is a hit, the transition to the high accuracy and high base state is confirmed after the big hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have been confirmed and stopped at "7". In the case of loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at "8".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the group promotion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, group production (first half), group production (middle), and group production (late) can be executed (FIGS. 95 (C) (D) (E), FIG. 96 (C). ) (D) (E), FIGS. 97 (C) (D) (E)). Then, taking this as an opportunity, a symbol effect that can promote the symbol is executed (FIGS. 95 (F), 96 (F), 97 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect the promotion of the design triggered by the group production, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach mode by the reach formation effect (FIGS. 95 (B) and 97 (B)) are promoted by the symbol effect (FIG. 95 (F)). , FIG. 97 (F). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the promotion of the production pattern after the reach can be expected.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the 7 symbol image ZGS imitating the "7" symbol is produced by a group effect of crossing the display screen 7a from right to left (FIGS. 97 (C), (D), (E)), and the effect symbol 8L. , 8R is promoted from "4" to "7" (Fig. 97 (F)). According to this configuration, there is a relationship between the group production and the promotion of the design, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7" (FIGS. 95 (F) and 97 (F)). Then, if a hit is made with the "7" symbol, the transition to the high accuracy and high base state is confirmed through the big hit game. According to this configuration, expectations are raised for the promotion of the production pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the group production (FIGS. 95 (C) (D) (E), FIGS. 96 (C) (D) (E), FIGS. 97 (C) (D) (E)). , When the production symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7" (Fig. 95 (F) and Fig. 97 (F)), and the production symbols 8L and 8R are promoted as "4". It may not be possible (FIG. 96 (F)). According to this configuration, the player can be thrilled and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the group promotion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect symbols 8L and 8R, which are in the reach mode by the reach formation effect (FIGS. 95 (B), 96 (B), 97 (B)), are promoted. On the other hand, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily stopped in the hit mode may be promoted in the wake of the group effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the group effect (FIGS. 95 (C) (D) (E), FIG. 96 (C) (D) (E), FIG. 97 (C) (D) (E)), the effect symbols 8L and 8R are It was displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the group effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R may be temporarily hidden. Further, in the group effect, the button image BGS or the 7 symbol image ZGS may obscure the effect symbols 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the effect of the first special figure hold is given as an example, but the effect of the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C2-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
It is possible to execute a group movement effect that moves in a state where specific images are gathered, and it is possible to execute a promotion effect that promotes a symbol to an advantageous symbol by using the group movement effect as an opportunity.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C2-1.
The promotion effect is an effect of promoting an effect symbol temporarily stopped in the reach mode in the reach formation effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C2-1 or the aspect C2-2.
The promotion effect is an effect of promoting an effect symbol that has been temporarily stopped in a hit manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3.
The specific image is an image related to the advantageous symbol after being promoted by the promotion effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4.
The advantageous symbol after being promoted by the promotion effect is a symbol suggesting a transition to a specific gaming state through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5.
When the group effect is executed, the promotion effect may be executed, or even if the group effect is executed, the promotion effect may not be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the stop decorative symbol appearance effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. This stop decorative symbol appearance effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the stop decorative symbol appearance effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance production A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative symbol appearance effect A. In the stop decorative symbol appearance effect, after the change of the special symbol starts, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the state of being stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a production. First, after the start of the change of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. , The state in which the fluctuation display of 8R is not displayed continues. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 98 (B) to (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode "here," 777 "" on the display screen 7a. Fade in. That is, the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually darkened, and an effect of gradually becoming visible is executed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. As described above, in this effect, after the start of the change of the special figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. ..

After the fade-in effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is completed and the image is displayed in the normal darkness, the enlarged display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is shown as shown in FIG. 98 (E). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R straddles the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. Is displayed. After that, the special figure change ends, and the special symbol of the big hit is stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 98 (F) to 98 (J) show another example of the stop decorative symbol appearance effect A. After the start of fluctuation of the special figure different from FIGS. 98 (A) to 98 (E) (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 98 (G) to (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode "here," 777 "" on the display screen 7a. Fade in in order. Here, the image is gradually darkened in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the effect of gradually becoming visible from left to right is executed. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a stationary state. As described above, in this effect, after the start of the change of the special figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. ..

After the fade-in effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is completed and the image is displayed in the normal darkness, as shown in FIG. 98 (E) described above, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R The enlarged display effect is executed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. It is displayed across. After that, the special figure change ends, and the special symbol of the big hit is stopped and displayed.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance production B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative symbol appearance effect B. In the stop decorative symbol appearance effect, after the change of the special symbol starts, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the state of being stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a production. First, after the start of the change of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. , The state in which the fluctuation display of 8R is not displayed continues. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 99 (B) to (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode "here," 777 "" on the display screen 7a. A part of is displayed, the display range gradually increases, and finally the whole is displayed. Here, a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction to form the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. An effect is performed in which the visible area expands. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. As described above, in this effect, after the start of the change of the special figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. ..

After the above-mentioned effect of gradually expanding the range of the visible part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is completed and the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed, the decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 99 (E). Enlarged display effect of symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is executed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right sub. It is displayed straddling the screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure change ends, and the special symbol of the big hit is stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 99 (F) to 99 (J) show another example of the stop decorative symbol appearance effect B. After the start of fluctuation of the special figure different from FIGS. 99 (A) to 99 (E) (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 99 (G) to (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode "here," 777 "" on the display screen 7a. A part of the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed, the display range is gradually increased, and finally the entire decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. Here, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the left-right direction so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized. An effect that expands the area is executed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In FIG. 99 (H), the visible portion of the left decorative symbol 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative symbol 8R are in different states. That is, in FIG. 99 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a state in which different parts of the decorative symbol are displayed. In this effect, after the variation of the special symbol starts, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

After the above-mentioned effect of gradually expanding the visible range of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is completed and the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, An enlarged display effect is executed in which the 8C and 8R protrude from the frame image WG. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is on the right. It is displayed straddling the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure change ends, and the special symbol of the big hit is stopped and displayed.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance production C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative symbol appearance effect C. In the stop decorative symbol appearance effect, after the change of the special symbol starts, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the state of being stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a production. First, after the start of the change of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. , The state in which the fluctuation display of 8R is not displayed continues. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 100 (B) to (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode "here," 777 "" on the display screen 7a. While fading in, a part is displayed first, the display range gradually increases, and finally the whole is displayed. Here, a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction to form the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Along with the effect of expanding the visible area, the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually darkened, and the effect of gradually becoming visible is executed in combination. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. As described above, in this effect, after the start of the change of the special figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R which are stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. ..

After the effect that the range of the visible part gradually expands while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R fade in is completed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in their normal darkness as a whole, FIG. 100 As shown in (E), the enlarged display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed straddling the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure change ends, and the special symbol of the big hit is stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 100 (F) to 100 (J) show another example of the stop decorative symbol appearance effect C. After the start of fluctuation of the special figure different from FIGS. 100 (A) to 100 (E) (after the start of the special figure lottery), as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 100 (G) to (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode "here," 777 "" on the display screen 7a. A part of the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed while fading in, the display range is gradually increased, and finally the entire decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. Here, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the left-right direction so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized. Along with the effect of expanding the area, the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually darkened, and the effect of gradually becoming visible is performed in combination. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In FIG. 100 (H), the visible portion of the left decorative symbol 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative symbol 8R are in different states. That is, in FIG. 100 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a state in which different parts of the decorative symbol are displayed. In this effect, after the variation of the special symbol starts, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

After the above-mentioned effect of gradually expanding the visible range of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is completed and the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed, as shown in FIG. 100 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, An enlarged display effect is executed in which the 8Cs and 8Rs protrude from the frame image WG. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is on the right. It is displayed straddling the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure change ends, and the special symbol of the big hit is stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the stop decoration pattern appearance effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, after the variation starts, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a hit manner without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. , 8C, 8R can be displayed for the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed as fade-ins. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode are entirely displayed after a part of them is displayed. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 (H) and 100 (H), in the first effect, when a part of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the hit mode is displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed. The part displayed in one of the plurality of symbols included in is different from the part displayed in the other symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first effect, after the start of the fluctuation, until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed. , Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the hit mode are enlarged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is displayed straddling the sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the stop decoration pattern appearance effect.
[Modification 1]
In the stop decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed after the special symbol changes start (after the special symbol lottery starts) until the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. It is assumed that it is not displayed. However, in the stop decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, after the start of the change of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), until the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed, the mode other than the change display is displayed. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may be displayed. For example, after the start of the change of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), only the decorative symbol 8L which has been stopped and displayed may be displayed until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R which have been stopped and displayed are displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the stop decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, it is assumed that there is a certain period between the start of the change of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery) and the display of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. .. However, in the stop decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed immediately after the start of the change of the special figure may be displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized in that after the start of fluctuation, the first effect of displaying the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in a hit manner can be executed without displaying the variation display of the decorative symbol.
◇ [Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-1.
In the first effect, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in a hit manner is displayed as a fade-in gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
In the first effect, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in a hit manner is a gaming machine characterized in that a part of the decorative symbol is displayed and then the whole is displayed.
◇ [Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3.
In the first effect, when a part of the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in a hit manner is displayed, the portion displayed in one of the plurality of symbols included in the decorative symbol and the other. A gaming machine characterized in that the parts displayed in one symbol are different from each other.
◇ [Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4.
In the first effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the decorative symbol is not displayed after the fluctuation starts until the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in a hit manner is displayed.
◇ [Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5 is further described.
Equipped with a sub-display means that can display multiple types of images
In the first effect, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in a hit manner is enlarged and displayed so as to straddle the display means and the sub-display means.

Hereinafter, the symbol color change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. This symbol color change effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol color change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Design color change effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, the message image MSG "start of final battle" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left side and the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the display color of the effect pattern in the reach mode. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R have been changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins. Also here, the effect symbols 8L and 8R whose display color is "red" are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all set to "4", and are displayed in "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4". Also here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in "red". As a result, the transition to the high accuracy and high base state is confirmed through the big hit game.

[Design color change effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, the message image MSG "start of final battle" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left side and the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the display color of the effect pattern in the reach mode. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R have been changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins. Also here, the effect symbols 8L and 8R whose display color is "red" are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA is defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "5". Further, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R have a display color of "red", and the middle effect symbol 8C has a display color of "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are confirmed and stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbols 8C are confirmed and stopped at "5". At this time, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R return from "red" to "blue" display color immediately before the confirmation stop.

[Design color change effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, the message image MSG "start of final battle" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left side and the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins. Also here, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "victory" is displayed. Also here, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the display color of the effect symbol following the win / loss notification effect. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R have been changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all set to "4", and are displayed in "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4". Also here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in "red". As a result, the transition to the high accuracy and high base state is confirmed through the big hit game.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the pattern color change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach mode are changed (FIGS. 101 (C) (D) and 102 (C) (D). ), FIGS. 103 (E) (F)). According to this configuration, expectations for hits are raised, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach mode are changed (FIGS. 101 (C) (D) and 102 (C) (D), triggered by the reach development effect. )). According to this configuration, since the display color of the production pattern is changed with the development to super reach, the expectation for hitting is further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the numerical image constituting the effect symbol is changed (FIGS. 101 (C) (D), 102 (C) (D), 103 (E) (F)). .. According to this configuration, the change of the display color of the effect pattern becomes easy to understand, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a hit occurs after the color change effect (FIGS. 101 (D), 102 (D), 103 (F)), the pachinko machine 1 goes through a big hit game to a high accuracy and high base state. Is confirmed (FIG. 101 (H), FIG. 103 (H)). According to this configuration, it is expected that the display color of the effect pattern will be changed even more, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R are changed to the display color of "red" in the final stop effect after the loss is lost in the winning notification effect (FIG. 102 (G)). Is returned to "blue" (FIG. 102 (H)). According to this configuration, the fixed stop display of the effect symbol becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R changed to the display color of "red" in the fixed stop effect are returned to "blue" immediately before the fixed stop (FIG. 102 (H). )). According to this configuration, the fixed stop display of the effect symbol becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pattern color change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display color of the effect symbol has been changed with the reach development effect (FIG. 101 (C), FIG. 102 (C)) or the win / loss notification effect (FIG. 103 (E)) as an opportunity (FIG. 101 (FIG. 101). D), FIG. 102 (D), FIG. 103 (F)). However, the timing of changing the display color of the effect symbol is not limited to this. For example, the display color of the effect symbol may be changed with the reach formation effect as an opportunity.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the display color of the numerical image has been changed, but if the effect symbol has components other than the numerical image, the display color of the portion other than the numerical image may be changed. Further, the display colors of both the numerical image and the portion other than the numerical image may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the effect of the first special figure hold is given as an example, but the effect of the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
After executing the reach formation effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode, it is possible to execute the display color change effect for changing the display color of the effect symbol temporarily stopped in the reach mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C4-1.
The predetermined production is a development production from a normal reach production to a super reach production.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C4-1 or the aspect C4-2.
The display color of the effect symbol is a display color of a numerical image constituting the effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3.
When the winning notification effect indicating that the winning result is a hit is executed after the display color change effect is executed, the transition to a specific game state is confirmed through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4.
When the loss notification effect indicating that the winning result is lost is executed after the display color change effect is executed, the color return effect of returning the display color of the effect symbol to the original display color is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C4-5.
The color return effect is executed prior to the final stop effect of the effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The color change reach effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. This color change reach effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the color change reach effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Color change reach production A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, it was shown that the right effect symbol 8R fluctuates slowly and moves as shown by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the right symbol inversion effect is executed. The right symbol reversal effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R, which has been moving toward the lower part of the display screen 7a, reverses the moving direction and moves toward the upper part of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R, which has been moved toward the upper part of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of the numerical image. For example, in normal times, the right effect symbol 8R of "blue" becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the "4" symbol whose display color has been changed is moved so as to incite whether or not it reaches reach (for example, it is moved so as to vibrate), and the display color is changed while temporarily stopping. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol changed to "red" is changed to "blue" in the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the middle symbol fanning effect is executed. The middle symbol fanning effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving to vibrate) so as to fan whether or not the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in the normal reach.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have been confirmed and stopped at "4".

[Color change reach production B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, it was shown that the right effect symbol 8R fluctuates slowly and moves as shown by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the right symbol reversal effect is executed. The right symbol reversal effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R, which has been moving toward the lower part of the display screen 7a, reverses the moving direction and moves toward the upper part of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R, which has been moved toward the upper part of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of the numerical image. For example, in normal times, the right effect symbol 8R of "4" of "blue" becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the "4" symbol whose display color has been changed is moved so as to incite whether or not it reaches reach (for example, it is moved so as to vibrate), and the display color is changed while temporarily stopping. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol changed to "red" is changed to "blue" in the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the middle symbol fanning effect is executed. The middle symbol fanning effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving to vibrate) so as to fan whether or not the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in the normal reach. At this time, the display color of the "4" symbol is changed. For example, in normal times, the "4" symbol of "blue" becomes "red".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4". At this time, the display color of the medium effect symbol 8C is the original display color. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol changed to "red" is changed to "blue" in the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4".

[Color change reach production C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, it was shown that the right effect symbol 8R fluctuates slowly and moves as shown by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the right symbol inversion effect is executed. The right symbol reversal effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R, which has been moving toward the lower part of the display screen 7a, reverses the moving direction and moves toward the upper part of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L is enlarged. The enlargement timing may be before, during, or after reversing the right effect symbol 8R.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R, which has been moved toward the upper part of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of the numerical image. For example, in normal times, the "4" symbol of "blue" becomes "red". At this time, the right effect symbol 8R is enlarged in the same manner as the left effect symbol 8L. The size of the enlarged right effect symbol 8R may be larger, smaller, or the same as the enlarged left effect symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the display color is changed, and the enlarged "4" symbol is moved (for example, moved to vibrate) to incite whether or not it reaches reach, and the display color is changed while temporarily stopping. .. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol changed to "red" is changed to "blue" in the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the middle symbol fanning effect is executed. The middle symbol fanning effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving to vibrate) so as to fan whether or not the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in the normal reach.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the color change reach effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the right effect symbol 8R is stopped, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped after changing the display color of the right effect symbol 8R (FIGS. 104 (D) (E), 105 (FIG. 105). D) (E), FIGS. 106 (D) (E)). Further, when stopping the middle effect symbol 8C, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped after changing the display color of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 105 (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbol is changed and returned to the original display color when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 104 (E), 105 (E) (G), 106. (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is further conspicuous, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect symbol 8R is moved in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction, the display color of the right effect symbol 8R is changed, and the right effect symbol 8R is moved in the same direction as the fluctuation direction to temporarily stop (FIG. 104). (C) (D) (E), FIGS. 105 (C) (D) (E), FIGS. 106 (C) (D) (E)). According to this configuration, since the effect symbol moves in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is further conspicuous, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach formation effect, the "4" symbol whose display color has been changed moves (for example, moves so as to vibrate) to incite whether or not it reaches reach, and temporarily stops. The display color is changed together with (FIGS. 104 (D) (E), 105 (D) (E), 106 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the reach formation effect stands out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped after being enlarged (FIGS. 106 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is further conspicuous, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the reach formation effect, the enlarged right effect symbol 8R of “4” is moved (for example, moved to vibrate) so as to incite whether or not it reaches reach, and is temporarily stopped. (FIG. 106 (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is further conspicuous, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the color change reach effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the reach formation effect is performed following the color change effect (FIGS. 104 (D) (E), FIGS. 105 (D) (E), FIG. 106 (D) (E)), but the reach formation effect is not necessarily performed. Is not always done. For example, when reach formation is not performed, it is conceivable that the right effect symbol 8R stops at a position other than "4", and then the middle effect symbol 8C stops, resulting in disparity.

[Modification 2]
In the above, an example of changing the display color of the right effect symbol 8R and the middle effect symbol 8C has been given, but the display color of the left effect symbol 8L may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the effect of the first special figure hold is given as an example, but the effect of the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C5-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
In order to stop the fluctuating effect symbol, it is possible to execute a color change stop effect of temporarily stopping the effect symbol after changing the display color of the effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C5-1.
In the color change stop effect, the display color of the effect symbol is temporarily changed, and when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, the display color of the effect symbol is returned to the original display color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-2.
In the color change stop effect, the effect symbol is moved in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction, the display color of the effect symbol is once changed, and the effect symbol is moved in the same direction as the fluctuation direction to temporarily stop.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3.
The color change stop effect constitutes a part of a reach effect that temporarily stops the effect symbol in a predetermined mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4.
In order to stop the fluctuating effect symbol, it is possible to execute the size change stop effect of temporarily stopping the effect symbol after changing the size of the effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5.
The size change stop effect constitutes a part of a reach effect that temporarily stops the effect symbol in a predetermined mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The character attack effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. This character attack effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character attack effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Character attack production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B) or FIG. 107 (D), the temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 107 (B), the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 107 (B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and a special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C. It showed that it stopped. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that imitates an enemy character. For example, the changing effect symbol temporarily stops in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (C). That is, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), the attack line AL indicating the attack is displayed on the enemy character symbol CRBG. Further, the message image MSG "ATTACK" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 107 (D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed how it was done. For example, the changing effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → middle effect symbol 8C.

After the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 107 (C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 107 (D), the fluctuation start effect shown in FIG. 107 (A) is executed. So, it will be a pseudo-continuous production. In the present embodiment, a repetitive pseudo-continuous effect in which such a pseudo-continuous effect is repeated seven times is executed. Then, in the repeated pseudo-continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 107 (B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (FIG. 107 (C)).

After the end of the iterative pseudo-continuous effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (E). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect that adds further attacks to the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack image AGs are displayed in order, and the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap with each other to cause damage to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "5".

[Character attack production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B) or FIG. 108 (D), the temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 108 (D), the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 108 (B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and a special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C. It showed that it stopped. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that imitates an enemy character. For example, the changing effect symbol temporarily stops in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 108 (C). That is, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), the attack line AL indicating the attack is displayed on the enemy character symbol CRBG. Further, the message image MSG "ATTACK" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 108 (D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed how it was done. For example, the changing effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → middle effect symbol 8C.

After the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 108 (C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 108 (D), the fluctuation start effect shown in FIG. 108 (A) is executed. So, it will be a pseudo-continuous production. In the present embodiment, a repetitive pseudo-continuous effect in which such a pseudo-continuous effect is repeated seven times is executed. Then, in the repeated pseudo-continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 108 (B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (FIG. 108 (C)).

After the end of the iterative pseudo-continuous effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 108 (E). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (F), the attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect that adds further attacks to the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "continuous hit" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack image AGs are displayed in order, and the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap with each other to cause damage to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "5".

[Character attack production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B) or FIG. 109 (D), the temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 109 (B), the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 109 (D), the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 109 (B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and a special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C. It showed that it stopped. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that imitates an enemy character. For example, the changing effect symbol temporarily stops in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 109 (C). That is, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), the message image MSG1 "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Further, the message image MSG2 "press" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, when the player presses the effect button 63, the attack line AL indicating the attack is displayed on the enemy character symbol CRBG.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109 (D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed how it was done. For example, the changing effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the order of left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → middle effect symbol 8C.

After the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 109 (C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109 (D), the fluctuation start effect shown in FIG. 109 (A) is executed. So, it will be a pseudo-continuous production. In the present embodiment, a repetitive pseudo-continuous effect in which such a pseudo-continuous effect is repeated seven times is executed. Then, in the repeated pseudo-continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 109 (B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (FIG. 109 (C)).

After the end of the iterative pseudo-continuous effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109 (E). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), the attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect that adds further attacks to the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image of "continuous hitting" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack image AGs are displayed in order, and the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap with each other to cause damage to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA is defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the message image MSG "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbols 8C are confirmed and stopped at "6".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the character attack effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a series of effects can be executed before and after the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107 (E), 108 (E), 109 (E)) (FIG. 107 (C) (F), FIGS. 108 (C) (F), FIGS. 109 (C) (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the fun of the game because a unified production can be performed in one fluctuation.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect in which the same enemy character CRB appears before and after the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107 (E), 108 (E), 109 (E)) is executed. (FIGS. 107 (C) (F), 108 (C) (F), 109 (C) (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a more unified production within a single change, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect of attacking the same enemy character CRB is executed before and after the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107 (E), 108 (E), 109 (E)). (FIGS. 107 (C) (F), 108 (C) (F), 109 (C) (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a more unified production within a single change, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect (FIGS. 107 (A), (B), (C) is performed before the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107 (E), 108 (E), 109 (E)). (D), FIGS. 108 (A) (B) (C) (D), FIGS. 108 (A) (B) (C) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the production including the pseudo-ream.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect in which the enemy character symbol CRBG imitating the enemy character temporarily stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 107 (B), 108 (B), 109. (B)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the pseudo-continuous production will be interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect using the effect button 63 (FIG. 109 (C)). Further, the attack effect (after reach) is an effect using the effect button 63 (FIGS. 108 (F) and 109 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation stock effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the attack effect (after reach), the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and the message image MSG "continuous hit" is displayed to urge the player to hit repeatedly. On the other hand, a message image of "long press" may be displayed to urge the player to press and hold.

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, when attacking the enemy character CRB (attack effect (before reach), attack effect (after reach)), a display indicating the physical strength of the enemy character CRB may be displayed. For example, the physical strength is displayed on a horizontally long bar.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 has been given as an example, but the operation unit is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63 as long as it is an operation unit that can be operated by the player.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the effect of the first special figure hold is given as an example, but the effect of the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C6-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
In the fluctuation period including the first period from the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol to the reach formation in which the effect symbol stops in a predetermined mode, and the second period from the reach formation to notifying the winning, the first period and It is possible to execute a series of effects over the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1.
The series of effects is an effect in which a specific character appears.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C6-1 or the aspect C6-2.
The series of effects is an attack effect that attacks a specific character.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3.
The series of effects include a pseudo-continuous effect in which the effect symbol repeats temporary stop and re-variation during the first period.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-4.
In the pseudo-continuous effect, it is possible to execute a character symbol stop effect in which a symbol imitating a specific character is temporarily stopped when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-5.
The series of effects includes an operation unit effect using an operation unit that can be operated by a player in at least one of the first period and the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative pattern color change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. In FIGS. 110 to 112, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. It is omitted from the above.

In this decorative pattern color change effect, the occurrence is first foretold by a look-ahead effect, and further, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command) and includes an instruction to execute a decorative pattern color change effect. The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image (referred to as "specific background image") used in the decorative pattern color change effect is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image, and is, for example, a moon surface image, a dark space entry image, or a dark space escape image. , It is a specific image such as an image inside a spacecraft. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, and an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a moving image.

Here, first, the decorative pattern color change effect A will be described, and then the decorative pattern color change effect B and the decorative pattern color change effect C will be described in order.

[Decorative pattern color change production A]
The decorative pattern color change effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect A. The decorative pattern color change effect A is first foretold by a look-ahead effect, and further, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and so on. The right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed. The decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is varied and produced (variable display) in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. It will be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol color change effect A is being performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a blue number (may be bright blue, dark blue, or blue in the middle between bright blue and dark blue). On the left side, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is a red number (bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red). Good), it is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, has a dark blue color when it is turned off, has a bright blue color when it is turned on, and changes from turned off to turned on. It gradually changes to a bright blue color, and gradually changes to a dark blue color from lighting to extinguishing.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode in which it always blinks, and has a dark red color when it is turned off, and has a bright red color when it is turned on. It gradually changes to bright red, and gradually changes to dark red from lighting to extinguishing.

In FIG. 110A, a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative pattern color change effect A is started by the look-ahead effect. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having a bright green color, and the medium decorative symbol 8C having a bright blue color is stopped at the number "6". The right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed and has a bright red color, is stopped and displayed at the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the blue spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the blue spherical variable icon 9C, which is a decorative pattern. When the color change effect A is started, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, from the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a. As the first specific background image, the image is switched to the dark space intrusion image THG2, and the character CRB is blinked and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks greatly (for example, once or twice), then blinks small, and finally blinks again greatly (for example,). 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change effect A.

When the character CRB is blinked and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the character CRB enters the dark space, which is the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "5" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "4" having a dark blue color.

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, the color is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect A is performed. It has a bright green color and does not appear in. Further, the number "4" has a bright blue color as described above, but when the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, the number "4" is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change. In the production A, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative symbol color change effect A is started, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having a dark blue color which is the same color. Bright blue and dark blue are bluish colors and are similar to each other.

When the decorative symbol color change effect A is started, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R normally displayed in the background image. , One size larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. An opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a right decorative symbol 8R and is displayed as a temporary stop. As shown in FIG. 110 (E), the left decorative symbol is displayed. 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol, and are temporarily stopped and displayed by the opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "5" that was temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. Along with this, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears as a left decorative symbol 8L and is displayed as a temporary stop. As shown in FIG. 110 (G), the left decorative symbol is displayed. The 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "6" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect A is performed. It has a bright blue color and does not appear in.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (H), the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. Along with this, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears as a right decorative symbol 8R and is displayed as a temporary stop, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol. Then, the temporary stop is displayed by the opaque number "6" having a dark blue color.

After that, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" that was temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and moves rapidly toward the front to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and is bright from the rear accordingly. An opaque number "7" having a red color appears as a left decorative symbol 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by a number "7" having a bright red color and is displayed as a temporary stop. 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "6" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "7" has a bright red color, and when the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, the color does not change from bright red to dark blue, that is, the decorative pattern color change effect A starts. Even if it is done, it only appears without any color change.

After that, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "6" that was temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and moves rapidly toward the front to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and is bright from the rear accordingly. When the opaque number "7" having a red color appears as the right decorative symbol 8R, as shown in FIG. 110 (I), it becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, pretending to be displayed as a temporary stop. Escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. 110 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol are displayed. The display mode is such that 8C is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "7" starts to be reduced, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second display is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (K). The dark space escape image THG3 which is a specific background image of the above is switched again to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as a normal background image). An opaque number "8" with a bright blue color appears on the display screen 7a as the right decorative symbol 8R and temporarily stops, and then the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "7" is the original size (normal background image). Returning to the size of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed in the above), an opaque number "3" having a bright green color appears on the display screen 7a as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and temporarily stops. As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (L), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color, the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3" having a bright green color, and the right decoration is displayed. When the symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "6" having a bright blue color, it is out of alignment and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change production B]
Next, the decorative pattern color change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect B. The decorative pattern color change effect B is first foretold by a look-ahead effect, and further, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and so on. The right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed. The decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is varied and produced (variable display) in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. It will be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol color change effect B is being performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a blue number (may be bright blue, dark blue, or blue in the middle between bright blue and dark blue). On the left side, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is a red number (bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red). Good), it is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, has a dark blue color when it is turned off, has a bright blue color when it is turned on, and changes from turned off to turned on. It gradually changes to a bright blue color, and gradually changes to a dark blue color from lighting to extinguishing.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode in which it always blinks, and has a dark red color when it is turned off, and has a bright red color when it is turned on. It gradually changes to bright red, and gradually changes to dark red from lighting to extinguishing.

In FIG. 111A, a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative pattern color change effect B is started by the look-ahead effect. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having a bright green color, and the medium decorative symbol 8C having a bright blue color is stopped at the number "6". The right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed and has a bright red color, is stopped and displayed at the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the blue spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the blue spherical variable icon 9C, which is a decorative pattern. When the color change effect B is started, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, from the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a. As the first specific background image, the image is switched to the dark space intrusion image THG2, and the character CRB is blinked and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks greatly (for example, once or twice), then blinks small, and finally blinks again greatly (for example,). 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change effect B.

When the character CRB is blinked and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the character CRB enters the dark space, which is the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "5" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "4" having a dark blue color.

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect B is started, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect B is performed. It has a bright green color and does not appear in. Further, the number "4" has a bright blue color as described above, but when the decorative pattern color change effect B is started, the number "4" is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change. In the production B, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative symbol color change effect B is started, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having a dark blue color which is the same color. Bright blue and dark blue are bluish colors and are similar to each other.

When the decorative symbol color change effect B is started, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R normally displayed in the background image. , One size larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. An opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a right decorative symbol 8R and is displayed as a temporary stop. As shown in FIG. 111 (E), the left decorative symbol is displayed. 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol, and are temporarily stopped and displayed by the opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "5" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. Along with this, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears as a left decorative symbol 8L and is displayed as a temporary stop. As shown in FIG. 111 (G), the left decorative symbol is displayed. The 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "6" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect B is started, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect B is performed. It has a bright blue color and does not appear in.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (H), the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. When an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a right decorative symbol 8R, it pretends to be temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 111 (I) and 111 (J). , Translucent and rapidly moving forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. 111 (K), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" starts to be reduced, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second display is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (L). The dark space escape image THG3 which is a specific background image of the above is switched again to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as a normal background image). An opaque number "7" having a bright red color appears on the display screen 7a as a right decorative symbol 8R and temporarily stops, and then the size of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" having a dark blue color is the original size. While returning to (the size of the left decorative pattern 8L normally displayed in the background image), the dark blue color returns to the bright blue color, and the opaque number "3" having a bright green color appears on the display screen 7a as the medium decorative pattern 8C. Temporarily stop. As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a bright blue color, the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3" having a bright green color, and the right decoration is displayed. When the symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "7" having a bright red color, it is out of alignment and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change production C]
Next, the decorative pattern color change effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect C. The decorative pattern color change effect C is first foretold by a look-ahead effect, and further, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and so on. The right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image is displayed. The decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is varied and produced (variable display) in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. It will be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol color change effect C is being performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a blue number (may be bright blue, dark blue, or blue in the middle between bright blue and dark blue). On the left side, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is a red number (bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red). Good), it is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, has a dark blue color when it is turned off, has a bright blue color when it is turned on, and changes from turned off to turned on. It gradually changes to a bright blue color, and gradually changes to a dark blue color from lighting to extinguishing.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode in which it always blinks, and has a dark red color when it is turned off, and has a bright red color when it is turned on. It gradually changes to bright red, and gradually changes to dark red from lighting to extinguishing.

In FIG. 112 (A), a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative pattern color change effect C is started by the look-ahead effect. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having a bright green color, and the medium decorative symbol 8C having a bright blue color is stopped at the number "6". The right decorative symbol 8R, which is displayed and has a bright red color, is stopped and displayed at the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), the blue spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the blue spherical variable icon 9C, which is a decorative pattern. When the color change effect C is started, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, from the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a. As the first specific background image, the image is switched to the dark space intrusion image THG2, and the character CRB is blinked and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks greatly (for example, once or twice), then blinks small, and finally blinks again greatly (for example,). 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change effect C.

When the character CRB is blinked and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. 112 (C), the character CRB enters the dark space, which is the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "5" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "4" having a dark blue color.

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect C is started, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect C is performed. It has a bright green color and does not appear in. Further, the number "4" has a bright blue color as described above, but when the decorative pattern color change effect C is started, the number "4" is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change. In the production C, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative symbol color change effect C is started, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having a dark blue color which is the same color. Bright blue and dark blue are bluish colors and are similar to each other.

When the decorative symbol color change effect C is started, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R normally displayed in the background image. , One size larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. An opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the right decorative symbol 8R and is displayed as a temporary stop. As shown in FIG. 112 (E), the left decorative symbol is displayed. 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol, and are temporarily stopped and displayed by the opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "5" temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. Along with this, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears as a left decorative symbol 8L and is displayed as a temporary stop. As shown in FIG. 112 (G), the left decorative symbol is displayed. The 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "6" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect C is started, it is forcibly changed from a bright blue color to a dark blue color, and the decorative pattern color change effect C is performed. It has a bright blue color and does not appear in.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" that was temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. When an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the right decorative symbol 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R approach each other as shown in FIG. 112 (I). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "6" having a dark blue color return to the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "6" having a bright blue color, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8L are returned again. The symbols 8R are separated from each other and return to their original positions. Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a and moves toward the blue spherical fluctuation icon 9C existing downward so as to draw an arc, and the fluctuation is performed. The display mode collides with the icon 9C.

Due to this collision, as shown in FIG. 112 (K), the blue spherical variable icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (L), the dark space escape image THG3, which is the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, normal). As a background image, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image). As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect C is completed.

After that, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started again. At this time, the colors of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are restored to their original colors, and all the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" except the number "7" are all. It returns to the same bright green, and the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all return to the same bright blue. The number "7" always remains bright red regardless of the presence or absence of the decorative pattern color change effect C.

After that, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, a big hit is made and the big hit game (big hit effect) is started after that, whereas the left decoration is started. If the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, they are out of alignment. When the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern color change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of images can be displayed in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112. With an image display device 7 (display means), even "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first symbol) and bright blue (first color) having bright blue (first color). Fluctuation effect (variation display) by one or more of odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) excluding odd number "7" having different bright green (second color) Of these, a specific effect in which the first and second symbols can be changed to a dark blue color (third color) similar to a bright blue color (first color) (in the decorative pattern color change effect A, FIGS. 110 (C) to (H). ), FIGS. 111 (C) to (K) can be executed in the decorative pattern color change effect B, and FIGS. 112 (C) to (H) can be executed in the decorative pattern color change effect C. According to this configuration, in the specific effect, the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed to a dark blue color (third color) similar to the bright blue color (first color). By changing the color, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the variable effect (variable display) of the design. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, the bright blue color (first color) is , The color is the same as the color attached to the blue spherical variable icon 9C. The blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, has a dark blue color when it is turned off, has a bright blue color when it is turned on, and is gradually turned on. It changes to a bright blue color, and gradually changes to a dark blue color from lighting to extinguishing. That is, since the blue spherical variable icon 9C is displayed in a blinking display mode, even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first symbol) are bright blue (first symbol) when blinking. It may be the same color as the first color). According to this configuration, the blue spherical variable icon 9C blinks, and the blue spherical variable icon 9C has a color of even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first symbol). The display mode can be such that the colors are partially linked.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. 112, the specific effect is the first symbol. As a predetermined combination with the second symbol, the combination in which the left decorative symbol 8L is an odd number "5" (second symbol) and the right decorative symbol is an even number "4" (first symbol) is started. ing. According to this configuration, since the start of the specific effect is a predetermined combination of the first symbol and the second symbol, it is possible to inform the player of the start time of the specific effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. 112, in the specific effect, when the even number “6” (first symbol) having a dark blue color forms a reach, the even number “6” is formed. "(1st design) can be changed again from dark blue (3rd color) to bright blue (1st color). According to this configuration, when the reach is formed by the first symbol in the specific effect, the formation of the reach can be made more conspicuous by the color change, and the expectation of the player is increased by the color change. Can contribute to the premonition of.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, when the specific effect is completed, a dark blue color is obtained. The even "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first design) changed to (third color) are changed to bright blue (first color) again, and dark blue (third color). It is now possible to change the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) except the odd number "7" changed to bright green (second color) again. There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the flow from the end of the specific effect to the other effect without discomfort due to the end of the specific effect.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, odd numbers "1" and "3" are used. , "5" and "9" (second design) are further bright red (fourth color) different from bright blue (first color), bright green (second color) and dark blue (third color), respectively. ) Is included, and in the specific effect, the odd number "7" (second symbol) having a bright red color (fourth color) is not changed to a dark blue color (third color). According to this configuration, the odd number "7" (second symbol) whose color does not change in the specific effect can be the only symbol, and the existence of the odd number "7" (second symbol) is made more conspicuous. It can contribute to making the player feel that the expectation of the hit is increased when the odd number "7" (second symbol) appears in the specific effect.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern color change effect.
[Modification 1]
The decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. 112 are performed based on the fact that a game ball enters the first starting port 20. Met. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative symbol color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative symbol color change effect C of FIG. 112, the various symbols were numerical symbols and no character image was provided. However, character images are provided only for odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol), and specific effects (in decorative pattern color change effect A, FIGS. 110 (C) to (H), In the decorative pattern color change effect B, FIGS. 111 (C) to (K), and in the decorative pattern color change effect C, FIGS. 112 (C) to (H)), the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and " The character image provided in "9" (second symbol) may be deleted. By doing this, it is not the character image that causes the color change in the specific effect, but the odd or even numbered part, so by deleting the character image, the occurrence of the color change in the number part is emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. can do. When the character image is provided in the odd number "7" (second symbol), the character image provided in the odd number "7" (second symbol) is not deleted in the specific effect. As a result, the character image can be the only symbol provided in the specific effect, the existence of the odd number "7" (second symbol) can be made more conspicuous, and the odd number "7" (second symbol) can be made more conspicuous in the specific effect. ) Appears, it can contribute to making the player feel that the expectation of the hit is increased.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. The hold icon 9A was displayed at the hold display position 9Ad, suggesting a notice to start the decorative pattern color change effect. However, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the red spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad by the look-ahead effect, it may suggest a notice to start the decorative pattern color change effect. .. In this case, in the specific effect, except for the odd number "7", the odd number "" is the same as the decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. 112. You may forcibly change 1 ”,“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”and“ 9 ”and even“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”and“ 8 ”to dark blue. Since the red spherical hold icon 9A has a higher expectation of hitting than the blue spherical hold icon 9A, the odd numbers "1", "3", so as to be the same color as the bright red color of the odd number "7". You may forcibly change "5" and "9" and even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" to bright red.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, when the specific effect is completed, the even number is changed to dark blue (third color). 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”and“ 8 ”(first design) are changed to bright blue (first color) again, and odd except for odd“ 7 ”changed to dark blue (third color). "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) were changed to bright green (second color) again. However, even "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first design) changed to dark blue (third color) are not changed to bright blue (first color) and are changed to dark blue as they are. It may be maintained, or the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) except the odd number "7" changed to dark blue (third color) are bright green. It may be maintained in dark blue as it is without changing to (second color). By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect after the end of the specific effect, and it is possible to provide the player with various effects depending on the color of the pattern.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, even numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” are used in the specific effect. (1st symbol) is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (2nd symbol) excluding odd number "7" are changed from bright green. It was forcibly changed to dark blue. However, in the specific production, even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first symbol) are forcibly changed from bright blue to dark green, and odd numbers "1" excluding odd numbers "7". , "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) may be forcibly changed from light green to dark green. It should be noted that bright green and dark green are greenish colors and are similar to each other.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, the number symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect (for example, the number "4"). The right decorative symbol 8R) becomes translucent and moves rapidly forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and along with this, an opaque number symbol with a dark blue color from the rear (for example). , The number "5" appears as the right decorative symbol 8R) and is displayed as a temporary stop. However, when the number symbol (for example, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4") that was temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and moves rapidly forward, the number symbol (for example, the number "4") The size of the right decorative pattern 8R) may be gradually increased. By doing this, the number symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and can move rapidly while increasing toward the front, so the number symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed approaches the player side. It is possible to realize the expression of coming, and it is possible to provide the player with a dynamic effect by moving the numerical pattern at high speed.

[Modification 7]
In the specific effect in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are usually background images. It was one size larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in. However, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the specific effect and the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R normally displayed in the background image may be the same size, or may be specified. The size of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the effect may be one size smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R normally displayed in the background image.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same color, dark blue. It was displayed on the display screen 7a while being held. However, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having a bright blue color which is the same color. This bright blue is the same color as the bright blue that the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" usually have in the background image.

[Modification 9]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, a part of the described effects may not be provided, and other effects may be provided. It may have been added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
Of the variable display by one or more of the first symbol having the first color and the second symbol having the second color different from the first color, the first symbol and the second symbol are referred to as the first color. It is possible to execute a specific effect that can be changed to a similar third color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C7-1.
The first color may be the same color as the color attached to the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C7-1 or the aspect C7-2.
The specific effect starts from a predetermined combination of the first symbol and the second symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-3.
In the specific effect, when the reach is formed by the first symbol, the first symbol may be changed again from the third color to the first color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-4.
A character image is provided only for the second symbol, and the character image is provided.
In the specific effect, the character image provided in the second symbol is deleted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-5.
When the specific effect is completed, the first symbol changed to the third color is changed to the first color again, and the second symbol changed to the third color is changed to the second color again. There,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-6.
The second symbol further includes those having a fourth color different from the first color, the second color, and the third color.
In the specific effect, the second symbol having the fourth color is not changed to the third color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the special symbol effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115. This special symbol effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the special symbol effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Special design production A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect A. The special symbol effect A is executed in a low-probability and low-base state in which the game progresses by hitting left. Further, the special effect symbol A is executed by using the special effect symbol. Therefore, first, the special production design will be described.

The special effect symbol is composed of numerical images of "0 to 9", and the numerical images of "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" indicating odd numbers are "0, 2, 4, 6," indicating even numbers. Its size is smaller than that of the numerical image of "8". Then, when the number image showing the odd number becomes a predetermined mode (doublet) and the jackpot is notified, the transition to the high-accuracy high-base gaming state is confirmed after the jackpot game is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. The left effect symbol 8L fluctuates from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" are hidden or semi-transparently displayed almost at the same time as the temporary stop. Here, in particular, among the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the numerical image showing an odd number is smaller than the numerical image showing an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), the right symbol movement effect is executed. The right pattern movement effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R moves from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moving near the central portion, and the symbol "2" is displayed below the symbol "3" and the symbol "4" is displayed above the symbol "3". Here, in particular, among the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the right effect symbol 8R, the numerical image showing an odd number is smaller than the numerical image showing an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, following the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R is shown to be temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" are hidden or semi-transparently displayed almost at the same time as the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), the middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C moves from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "2" is moving near the central portion, and the symbol "1" is displayed below the symbol "2" and the symbol "3" is displayed above the symbol "2". Here, in particular, among the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the middle effect symbol 8C, the numerical image showing the odd number is smaller than the numerical image showing the even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), the middle pattern fanning effect is executed. The middle symbol fanning effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving to vibrate) so as to fan whether or not the middle effect symbol 8C moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops at "4" in the normal reach. Here, the symbol "4" is moving near the central portion, and the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4" and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle production, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4".

[Special pattern production B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect B. The special symbol effect B is another example of the special symbol effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A and the variable image 9C corresponding to the first special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. The left effect symbol 8L fluctuates from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" are hidden or semi-transparently displayed almost at the same time as the temporary stop. Here, in particular, among the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the numerical image showing an odd number is smaller than the numerical image showing an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), the right symbol movement effect is executed. The right pattern movement effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R moves from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moving near the central portion, and the symbol "2" is displayed below the symbol "3" and the symbol "4" is displayed above the symbol "3". Here, in particular, among the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the right effect symbol 8R, the numerical image showing an odd number is smaller than the numerical image showing an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, following the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R is shown to be temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" are hidden or semi-transparently displayed almost at the same time as the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), the middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C moves from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "2" is moving near the central portion, and the symbol "1" is displayed below the symbol "2" and the symbol "3" is displayed above the symbol "2". Here, in particular, among the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the middle effect symbol 8C, the numerical image showing the odd number is smaller than the numerical image showing the even number. Further, the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the middle effect symbol 8C are smaller than the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), the middle pattern fanning effect is executed. The middle symbol fanning effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving to vibrate) so as to fan whether or not the middle effect symbol 8C moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops at "4" in the normal reach. Here, the symbol "4" is moving near the central portion, and the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4" and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle production, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4".

[Special design production C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect C. The special symbol effect C is executed in a high-accuracy and high-base state in which the game progresses by hitting right. Further, the special symbol effect C is executed by using the normal effect symbol. Therefore, first, the normal production design will be described.

The normal production symbol is composed of numerical images of "0 to 9", and all the numerical images have the same size. Then, when the number image showing the odd number becomes a predetermined mode (doublet) and the jackpot is notified, the transition (continuation) to the high-accuracy high-base gaming state is confirmed after the jackpot game is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three holding images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is "1", and the right effect symbol 8R is "5". At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and two hold images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (loss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L is "0", the middle effect symbol 8C is "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is "6". At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and one hold image 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, one reserved image 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle production, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the special symbol effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at each of the number image of the left effect symbol 8L, the number image of the right effect symbol 8R, and the number image of the middle effect symbol 8C, the specific number image is the remaining number image. (FIG. 113 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the fluctuation of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed, and the fun of the game can be improved. The numerical image constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the numerical image constituting the right effect symbol 8R, and the numerical image constituting the middle effect symbol 8C each correspond to the "special effect symbol".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at each of the number image of the left effect symbol 8L, the number image of the right effect symbol 8R, and the number image of the middle effect symbol 8C, the number image indicating an odd number indicates an even number. It is smaller than the numerical image (FIGS. 113 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the fluctuation of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the numerical image in which the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state is confirmed in the case of a big hit is smaller than the remaining numerical images (FIGS. 113 (B) (C) (FIG. 113 (B) (C)). D) (E) (F), FIGS. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the fluctuation of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed, and the fun of the game can be improved. The jackpot game corresponds to a "special game", and the high-accuracy high-base state corresponds to a "specific game state".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the middle effect symbol 8C are smaller than the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. (FIGS. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, further changes are generated by fluctuations in the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the interest of the game can be improved. The numerical images constituting the middle effect symbol 8C constitute a "specific column", and the numerical images constituting the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R constitute the "remaining column".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there are cases where variable display is performed with a special effect symbol (FIGS. 113 and 114) and cases where variable display is performed with a normal effect symbol (FIG. 115). According to this configuration, further changes are generated by fluctuations in the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable display is performed with the special effect symbol in the low accuracy and low base state (FIGS. 113 and 114), and the variable display is performed with the normal effect symbol in the high accuracy and high base state (FIG. 115). According to this configuration, the fluctuations of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed depending on the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. The low-accuracy low-base state corresponds to the "first gaming state", and the high-accuracy high-base state corresponds to the "second gaming state".

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the special symbol effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the special effect symbol, the size of the numerical image indicating the odd number is smaller than the size of the numerical image indicating the even number. On the other hand, the size of the numerical image showing an odd number may be larger than the size of the numerical image showing an even number.
Further, in the above, the size of the number image is different between the number image showing the odd number and the number image showing the even number, but the size of the specific number image may be different from the size of the remaining number images. .. For example, only the specific number images "3" and "7" may be different in size from the remaining number images "0", "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and "9". ..

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the special effect symbol, the numerical image in which the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state is confirmed in the case of a big hit is smaller than the remaining numerical images. On the other hand, the numerical image in which the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state is confirmed in the case of a big hit may be larger than the remaining numerical images.

[Modification 3]
In the above, it is assumed that the special symbol effect C (FIG. 115) is executed in the high accuracy and high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the special symbol effect C is executed in any of the low probability low base state (normal game state), the high probability high base state (probability variation game state), and the low probability low base state (time saving game state). Further, the special symbol effect A (special symbol effect B) may be executed in any of the gaming states.
[Modification 4]
In the above, when the hit is notified by a specific numerical image, the transition to the high accuracy high base state (probability change state) (“specific game state”) is confirmed through the big hit game (“special game”). On the other hand, in a gaming machine that does not fluctuate in probability, for example, one type and two types, the "specific gaming state" may be set to a low probability high base state (time saving state).
Further, when the hit is notified by a specific numerical image, the configuration may be advantageous in the big hit game (“special game”). Specifically, the number of game balls acquired may be large in the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game may be larger than that of the remaining numerical images).
Furthermore, when reach is formed with a specific numerical image, the configuration may be advantageous in the sense that "the reliability of the jackpot is increased". For example, even with the same reach effect, the reliability of the jackpot is high.
[Modification 5]
In the above, the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the middle effect symbol 8C were smaller than the numerical images of "0 to 9" constituting the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R (FIG. 114 (B)). (C) (D) (E) (F)). That is, both the specific numerical image and the remaining numerical images were smaller. On the other hand, only a specific number image out of the number images of "0 to 9" constituting the middle effect symbol 8C may be smaller, or the number of "0 to 9" constituting the middle effect symbol 8C may be reduced. Only the remaining numeric images of the image may be smaller.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C8-1]
It is a gaming machine that notifies the winning result by the effect symbols by changing and stopping the effect symbols in a plurality of rows.
The effect pattern is composed of numerical images.
In each of the plurality of columns, variable display is performed with a special effect symbol in which a specific numerical image among the numerical images is smaller than the remaining numerical images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1.
The particular number image is a number image showing an odd number, and the remaining number image is a number image showing an even number.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1.
In the case of notifying that it is a hit as a result of the hit, the specific numerical image is a numerical image in which the transition to a specific gaming state is confirmed through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-3.
A particular column of the plurality of columns is smaller in size than at least one of the particular number image and the remaining number images as compared to the remaining columns.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-4.
In each of the plurality of columns, the variable display is performed with the special effect symbol and the normal effect symbol in which the specific numerical image and the remaining numerical images of the numerical images have the same size. Sometimes it's done,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C8-5.
In the first game state, the special effect symbol is used for variable display, and in the second game state, the normal effect symbol is used for variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C8-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-6.
In the case of notifying that the winning result is a hit, the specific numerical image is a numerical image in which the number of acquired game balls is larger than that of the remaining numerical images in a special game in which a game ball can be acquired. Is,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C8-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-7.
When the reach forming effect of forming a specific aspect by temporarily stopping the effect symbol in a predetermined row among the effect symbols that fluctuate in a plurality of rows is executed, the specific numerical image is compared with the remaining numerical images. It is a numerical image that raises the expectation of transition to a special game that can acquire a game ball.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative design visibility change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. In FIGS. 116 to 118, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. Some are omitted from the above.

This decorative symbol visibility change effect is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a decorative pattern visibility change effect, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position and light emission mode of 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the decorative symbol visibility change effect A will be described, and then the decorative symbol visibility change effect B and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C will be described in order.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect A]
The decorative pattern visibility change effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol visibility change effect A. The decorative symbol visibility change effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variation region 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. ) Is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position 9Cd are referred to as the fluctuation display area. A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the fluctuation display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the fluctuation display area. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the reserved display area is referred to as the variable and reserved display area THA. The variable and reserved display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image behind the variable display area and the reserved display area can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the background image behind the image cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation icon 9C is displayed in the variation display area. When it is displayed, the background image behind it cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C. Further, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind it cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. , The background image behind cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the left decorative symbol 8L is varied (variable display) has an area that overlaps with the variable and reserved display area THA in the front and back, and the variable and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A cannot be visually recognized in the hold display area. Is not displayed (that is, when there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L is visually recognized through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable region 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is varied (variable display) has an area that overlaps the variable and reserved display area THA in the front and back, and the variable and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A cannot be visually recognized in the hold display area. When is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variation display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized through the variation display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation display area cannot be visually recognized. When the variation icon 9C is displayed, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

The variable region 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the right decorative symbol 8R is variable-effect (variable display) does not overlap with the variable and reserved display area THA in the front-rear direction. As a result, the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R can be visually recognized without being hindered by the variation and the hold display area THA.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 116 (A), then, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (distance dimension 2 of the left side of the display screen 7a). A smooth curve with a bow shape (position corresponding to one-third) to the right side of the center of the lower side (position from the lower left side of the display screen 7a corresponding to two-thirds of the distance dimension of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The mini character effect area MHG surrounded by the arc), the left side of the display screen 7a, and the lower side of the display screen 7a is displayed and appears on the display screen 7a. Various mini characters will appear in the mini character production area MHG, and the mini characters will be used for the production.

In this mini character effect area MHG, the left decorative symbol 8L is varied effect (variable display), the variable area 8Lr, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variable effect (variable display), and the right decorative symbol 8R is variable effect (variable display). There is a region that overlaps with the fluctuation region 8Rr to be displayed (variation display) before and after, and there is a region that is arranged in front of these fluctuation regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr and overlaps with the fluctuation and hold display area THA. The variable and reserved display area is located behind the THA. That is, the mini character effect area MHG is arranged between the variable area 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr and the variable and reserved display area THA.

A colored opaque background image is provided in the mini character production area MHG. Therefore, when the mini character effect area MHG appears, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the area where the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R overlap with the mini character effect area MHG. , The variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R cannot be visually recognized through the mini character effect area MHG. On the other hand, since the fluctuation and hold display area THA is arranged on the front side of the mini character production area MHG, even if the mini character production area MHG appears, the visibility is hindered by the mini character production area MHG. There is no such thing. In this way, the variable and reserved display area THA is arranged so as to overlap the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R and the mini character production region MHG. , The variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A in the variable and reserved display area THA are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the mini character production area MHG. It is designed so that it is not difficult to see.

Although the mini characters appearing in the mini character production area MHG are arranged on the front side of the mini character production area MHG, they are arranged on the rear side of the change and hold display area THA, so that the change and hold display area THA Even if a mini character appears in the mini character production area MHG, the visibility is not hindered by the mini character.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R continues. Has been done. At the position of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed, the lower part of the left decorative symbol 8L (a part of the left decorative symbol 8L) is covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the lower part of the left decorative symbol 8L (a part of the left decorative symbol 8L) temporarily stopped and displayed is covered with the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative symbol 8L and visually recognized. I can't.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), a colored and opaque ally character CRA appears as a mini character in the mini character production area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the sword of the ally character CRA at a predetermined timing. Here, the sword of the ally character CRA changes from the white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C becomes successful. In some cases, the sword of the ally character CRA does not change from the white spherical variable icon 9C to another icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini character production area MHG and becomes the variable area 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a across the screen. For example, in FIG. 116 (D), when an ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA is not covered by the mini character production area MHG in the left decorative symbol 8L in which the upper body of the ally character CRA is temporarily stopped. It will cover the part. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed while straddling the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L and the mini character production area MHG, the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped is covered with the mini character production area MHG. The exposed part overlaps with the ally character CRA and cannot be visually recognized. As the ally character CRA moves around, the part where the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed is not covered by the mini character production area MHG and is exposed and the ally character CRA do not overlap, and the temporary stop is displayed. The exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the mini character production area MHG can be visually recognized without being hindered by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C is continued, and the reach is formed. NS. At the position of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped, the entire right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped is visually recognized because it is not covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative symbol 8R. Can be done. Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around the mini character production area MHG, and the upper body of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini character production area MHG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change region 8Lr. , 8Cr, 8Rr may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

The right decorative symbol 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, for example, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "9" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues. If the reach is not formed, the mini character production area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then when the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Is not displayed as a stop with the same symbol, and may be off.

Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, for example, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "9" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues. If the reach is not formed, the ally character CRA moving around the mini character production area MHG jumps over the mini character production area MHG, and the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R (or the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decoration). In the state of straddling the fluctuation region 8Cr of the symbol 8C), the number "9" is sent below the fluctuation region 8Rr by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the number "1" is pulled in from above the fluctuation region 8Rr to display a temporary stop and reach. After forming, the ally character CRA may return to the mini character production area MHG again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), when the mini character effect area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued. NS. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility change effect A ends. When the decorative symbol visibility change effect A is being performed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed while the mini character effect area MHG is displayed. Of the temporarily stopped left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R, the lower part of the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C (a part of the left decorative symbol 8L and one of the middle decorative symbols 8C). Part) is covered with the mini character production area MHG and cannot be visually recognized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), when the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (may be blinking), the left decorative symbol 8L , The middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped by the number "1" having a bright red color, are displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed on the screen, and the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued.

Prior to the appearance of the ally character CRA according to FIG. 116 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R were both temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color in FIG. 116 (F). On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA according to FIG. 116 (G), in FIG. 116 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are both the same color as the number “7”. The number "1" having a bright red color is changed and a temporary stop is displayed. As a result, the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern) is a big hit. Expectations are rising. When the reach is formed by the number "7" having a bright red color, the expectation of the jackpot is set higher in advance than in the case where the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 116 (H), changing the color of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative symbol). ) As an image suggesting one of the five levels of jackpot expectation (for example, five face images of the ally character CRA are arranged and the jackpot expectation level is 3.5 out of five levels as an image of 3). One face image is yellow, half of the face image is yellow, half of the face image is black, and the remaining one face image is black.) May be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then a big hit game (big hit effect). Is started, but when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is out of order.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect B]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern visibility change effect B. The decorative symbol visibility change effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variation region 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. ) Is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position 9Cd are referred to as the fluctuation display area. A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the fluctuation display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the fluctuation display area. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the reserved display area is referred to as the variable and reserved display area THA. The variable and reserved display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image behind the variable display area and the reserved display area can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the background image behind the image cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation icon 9C is displayed in the variation display area. When it is displayed, the background image behind it cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C. Further, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind it cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. , The background image behind cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the left decorative symbol 8L is varied (variable display) has an area that overlaps with the variable and reserved display area THA in the front and back, and the variable and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A cannot be visually recognized in the hold display area. Is not displayed (that is, when there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L is visually recognized through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable region 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is varied (variable display) has an area that overlaps the variable and reserved display area THA in the front and back, and the variable and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A cannot be visually recognized in the hold display area. When is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variation display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized through the variation display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation display area cannot be visually recognized. When the variation icon 9C is displayed, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

The variable region 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the right decorative symbol 8R is variable-effect (variable display) does not overlap with the variable and reserved display area THA in the front-rear direction. As a result, the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R can be visually recognized without being hindered by the variation and the hold display area THA.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 117 (A), then, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (distance dimension 2 of the left side of the display screen 7a). A smooth curve with a gentle concave shape connecting from the position corresponding to one-third) to the center of the right side of the display screen (the position corresponding to one half of the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) and the display screen 7a. The mini character effect area MHG surrounded by the left side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the display screen 7a is displayed and appears on the display screen 7a. Various mini characters will appear in the mini character production area MHG, and the mini characters will be used for the production.

In this mini character effect area MHG, the left decorative symbol 8L is varied effect (variable display), the variable area 8Lr, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variable effect (variable display), and the right decorative symbol 8R is variable effect (variable display). There is a region that overlaps with the fluctuation region 8Rr to be displayed (variation display) before and after, and there is a region that is arranged in front of these fluctuation regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr and overlaps with the fluctuation and hold display area THA. The variable and reserved display area is located behind the THA. That is, the mini character effect area MHG is arranged between the variable area 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr and the variable and reserved display area THA.

A colored opaque background image is provided in the mini character production area MHG. Therefore, when the mini character effect area MHG appears, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the area where the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R overlap with the mini character effect area MHG. , The variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R cannot be visually recognized through the mini character effect area MHG. On the other hand, since the fluctuation and hold display area THA is arranged on the front side of the mini character production area MHG, even if the mini character production area MHG appears, the visibility is hindered by the mini character production area MHG. There is no such thing. In this way, the variable and reserved display area THA is arranged so as to overlap the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R and the mini character production region MHG. , The variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A in the variable and reserved display area THA are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the mini character production area MHG. It is designed so that it is not difficult to see.

Although the mini characters appearing in the mini character production area MHG are arranged on the front side of the mini character production area MHG, they are arranged on the rear side of the change and hold display area THA, so that the change and hold display area THA Even if a mini character appears in the mini character production area MHG, the visibility is not hindered by the mini character.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R continues. Has been done. At the position of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed, the lower part of the left decorative symbol 8L (a part of the left decorative symbol 8L) is covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the lower part of the left decorative symbol 8L (a part of the left decorative symbol 8L) temporarily stopped and displayed is covered with the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative symbol 8L and visually recognized. I can't.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), a colored opaque ally character CRA as a mini character appears in the mini character production area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the sword of the ally character CRA at a predetermined timing. Here, the sword of the ally character CRA changes from the white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C becomes successful. In some cases, the sword of the ally character CRA does not change from the white spherical variable icon 9C to another icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini character production area MHG and becomes the variable area 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a across the screen. For example, in FIG. 117 (D), when the ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA is not covered with the mini character production area MHG in the left decorative pattern 8L in which the temporary stop display is displayed. It will cover the part. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed while straddling the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L and the mini character production area MHG, the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped is covered with the mini character production area MHG. The exposed part overlaps with the ally character CRA and cannot be visually recognized. As the ally character CRA moves around, the part where the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed is not covered by the mini character production area MHG and is exposed and the ally character CRA do not overlap, and the temporary stop is displayed. The exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the mini character production area MHG can be visually recognized without being hindered by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C is continued, and the reach is formed. NS. At the position of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped, the lower part of the right decorative symbol 8R (a part of the right decorative symbol 8R) is covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative symbol 8R. Therefore, the lower part of the right decorative symbol 8R (a part of the right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stopped and displayed is covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative symbol 8R and visually recognized. I can't. Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around the mini character production area MHG, and the upper body of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini character production area MHG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change region 8Lr. , 8Cr, 8Rr may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

The right decorative symbol 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, for example, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "9" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues. If the reach is not formed, the mini character production area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then when the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Is not displayed as a stop with the same symbol, and may be off.

Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, for example, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "9" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues. If the reach is not formed, the ally character CRA moving around the mini character production area MHG jumps over the mini character production area MHG, and the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R (or the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decoration). In the state of straddling the fluctuation region 8Cr of the symbol 8C), the number "9" is sent below the fluctuation region 8Rr by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the number "1" is pulled in from above the fluctuation region 8Rr to display a temporary stop and reach. After forming, the ally character CRA may return to the mini character production area MHG again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), when the mini character effect area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued. NS. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B ends. When the decorative symbol visibility change effect B is being performed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed while the mini character effect area MHG is displayed. The lower part of the temporarily stopped left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C and right decorative symbol 8R (part of left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C and part of right decorative symbol 8R) is the area for mini character production. It is covered with MHG and cannot be visually recognized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), when the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (may be blinking), the left decorative symbol 8L , The middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped by the number "1" having a bright red color, are displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed on the screen, and the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued.

Prior to the appearance of the ally character CRA according to FIG. 117 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R were both temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color in FIG. 117 (F). On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA according to FIG. 117 (G), in FIG. 117 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are both the same color as the number “7”. The number "1" having a bright red color is changed and a temporary stop is displayed. As a result, the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern) is a big hit. Expectations are rising. When the reach is formed by the number "7" having a bright red color, the expectation of the jackpot is set higher in advance than in the case where the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 117 (H), changing the color of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative symbol). ) As an image suggesting one of the five levels of jackpot expectation (for example, five face images of the ally character CRA are arranged and the jackpot expectation level is 3.5 out of five levels as an image of 3). One face image is yellow, half of the face image is yellow, half of the face image is black, and the remaining one face image is black.) May be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then a big hit game (big hit effect). Is started, but when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is out of order.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect C]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility change effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol visibility change effect C. The decorative symbol visibility change effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variation region 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. ) Is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position 9Cd are referred to as the fluctuation display area. A hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the fluctuation display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the fluctuation display area. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the reserved display area is referred to as the variable and reserved display area THA. The variable and reserved display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image behind the variable display area and the reserved display area can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the background image behind the image cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation icon 9C is displayed in the variation display area. When it is displayed, the background image behind it cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C. Further, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind it cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. , The background image behind cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the left decorative symbol 8L is varied (variable display) has an area that overlaps with the variable and reserved display area THA in the front and back, and the variable and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A cannot be visually recognized in the hold display area. Is not displayed (that is, when there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L is visually recognized through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable region 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is varied (variable display) has an area that overlaps the variable and reserved display area THA in the front and back, and the variable and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A cannot be visually recognized in the hold display area. When is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variation display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized through the variation display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation display area cannot be visually recognized. When the variation icon 9C is displayed, the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

The variable region 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the right decorative symbol 8R is variable-effect (variable display) does not overlap with the variable and reserved display area THA in the front-rear direction. As a result, the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R can be visually recognized without being hindered by the variation and the hold display area THA.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 118 (A), then, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (distance dimension 2 of the left side of the display screen 7a). The left movable accessory image KGL imitating the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 from the position corresponding to one-third) to the right side of the front screen 7a corresponds to the operating area of the left movable accessory 14L. As shown above, it appears so as to cover the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L. Further, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is imitated from the center of the right side of the display screen 7a (the position corresponding to one half of the distance dimension of the right side of the display screen 7a) toward the left side of the front screen 7a. The right-hand movable accessory image KGR appears so as to cover the variable region 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R so as to correspond to the operating region of the right-right movable accessory 14R. When the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state of being separated from each other, a lightning bolt runs in the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR.

The left movable accessory image KGL has an area that overlaps with the variable area 8Lr on which the left decorative symbol 8L is variable-produced (variable display), and is arranged in front of the variable area 8Lr, and the variable and hold display area. It is arranged so that it does not overlap with THA in the front and back. In addition, the right movable accessory image KGR has a region that overlaps the variable region 8Rr on which the right decorative symbol 8R is variable-produced (variable display) in the front-rear direction, and is arranged in front of the variable region 8Rr, and the fluctuation and hold. It is arranged so that it does not overlap with the display area THA in the front-rear direction.

The left movable accessory image KGL imitates the left movable accessory 14L and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the left movable accessory image KGL appears, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the region where the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L and the left movable accessory image KGL overlap. It becomes invisible through the object image KGL. Further, the right movable accessory image KGR imitates the right movable accessory 14R and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the right decorative accessory image KGR appears, the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the region where the variable region 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R and the right movable accessory image KGR overlap. It becomes invisible through the object image KGR.

The left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state of being separated from each other, and although the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR produce a lightning bolt running effect, the left movable accessory image is movable. Since the accessory image KGL and the right-side movable accessory image KGR are arranged so as not to overlap the fluctuation and the hold display area THA in the front-rear direction, the lightning bolt does not overlap the change and the hold display area THA in the front-rear direction, and the change is made. And the hold display area THA appears in a state where the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR are separated from each other, and even if the effect of running a lightning bolt is performed, the visibility may be hindered by this lightning bolt. No.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R continues. Has been done. At the position of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped, the left part of the left decorative symbol 8L (a part of the left decorative symbol 8L) is covered by the left movable accessory image KGL arranged in front of the left decorative symbol 8L. Therefore, the left part of the left decorative symbol 8L (a part of the left decorative symbol 8L) temporarily stopped is covered with the left movable accessory image KGL arranged in front of the left decorative symbol 8L and visually recognized. Can't.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), when the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state of being separated from each other, the ring-shaped decorative portion of the left movable accessory image KGL appears. The area in the left side decoration part which is half and the right side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part of the right movable accessory image KGR (that is, the area extending from the upper side to the lower side of the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part). It is possible to run appropriately in the area extending from the upper side to the lower side). When the lightning bolt SND runs, it becomes possible to change from the variable icon 9C to another icon at a predetermined timing under the influence of the lightning bolt SND. Here, under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, the white spherical variable icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C becomes successful. Even under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to another icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C may fail.

When the left movable character image KGL and the right side movable character image KGR appear in a state of being separated from each other and the lightning bolt SND runs, the lightning bolt SND exceeds the left side movable character image KGL and the right side movable character image KGR and the left decorative pattern. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a across the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. For example, in FIG. 118 (D), when the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state of being separated from each other and the lightning bolt SND runs, the left movable accessory image KGL is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left. Of the decorative pattern 8L, the portion not covered by the left movable accessory image KGL will be covered. In other words, when the lightning bolt SND is displayed while straddling the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L and the left movable accessory image KGL, the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped is covered with the left movable accessory image KGL. The exposed part overlaps with the lightning bolt SND and cannot be visually recognized. The lightning bolt SND appropriately runs in the range from the upper side to the lower side in the semicircular portion of the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR, so that the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped is displayed as the left movable accessory. The exposed part of the object image KGL and the lightning bolt SND do not overlap, and the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped is obstructed by the lightning bolt SND of the exposed part of the left movable accessory image KGL. It can be visually recognized without being damaged (see FIG. 118 (E)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C is continued, and the reach is formed. NS. At the position of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped, the right part of the right decorative symbol 8R (a part of the right decorative symbol 8R) is covered by the right movable accessory image KGR placed in front of the right decorative symbol 8R. Therefore, the right part of the right decorative symbol 8R (a part of the right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stopped and displayed is covered with the right movable accessory image KGR arranged in front of the right decorative symbol 8R and visually recognized. Can't. Even at this point, the lightning bolt SND appropriately runs in the range from the upper side to the lower side in the semicircular portion of the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR, so that the lightning bolt SND appropriately runs in the range from the upper side to the lower side. And, it may be displayed on the display screen 7a over the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R beyond the right movable accessory image KGR.

The right decorative symbol 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, for example, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "9" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues. If the reach is not formed, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and then the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, middle. The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may not be stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and may be out of alignment.

Further, the right decorative symbol 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, for example, the temporary stop is displayed by the number "9" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C continues. If the reach is not formed, the lightning bolt SND that runs appropriately in the range from the upper side to the lower side in the semicircular portion of the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR is the variable region 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R. In some cases, the lightning bolt SND may be settled after the number "9" in the above is sent below the fluctuation region 8Rr, the number "1" is pulled in from above the fluctuation region 8Rr, and the temporary stop is displayed to form a reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), when the lightning bolt SND subsides, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variation effect (variation display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is performed. Is continued. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility change effect C is completed. When the decorative symbol visibility change effect C is being performed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed with the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR displayed. Is temporarily stopped, the left part of the temporarily stopped left decorative symbol 8L and the right part of the right decorative symbol 8R (a part of the left decorative symbol 8L and a part of the right decorative symbol 8R) are left movable. While the object image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR are covered and cannot be visually recognized, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not covered by the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR and is visually recognized. be able to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (G), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively advanced positions in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It advances (moves) from the home position toward (in the direction close to each other), and is attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a. The left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left movable accessory 14L. A decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the left decorative portion of the above and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”). The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory The 14R moves backward (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped by the number “1” having a bright red color, are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variation effect of the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed. (Variable display) continues.

Prior to the appearance of the ally character CRA according to FIG. 118 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R were both temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color in FIG. 118 (F). On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA according to FIG. 118 (G), in FIG. 118 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are both the same color as the number “7”. The number "1" having a bright red color is changed and a temporary stop is displayed. As a result, the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern) is a big hit. Expectations are rising. When the reach is formed by the number "7" having a bright red color, the expectation of the jackpot is set higher in advance than in the case where the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 118 (H), changing the color of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative symbol). ) As an image suggesting one of the five levels of jackpot expectation (for example, five face images of the ally character CRA are arranged and the jackpot expectation level is 3.5 out of five levels as an image of 3). One face image is yellow, half of the face image is yellow, half of the face image is black, and the remaining one face image is black.) May be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then a big hit game (big hit effect). Is started, but when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is out of order.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern visibility change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, a plurality of types of images are displayed. A specific image (decorative symbol visual recognition) provided with a displayable image display device 7 (display means) so as to overlap a part of the variable region 8Lr (first region) in which the variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L (symbol image) is performed. In the sex change effects A and B, the ally character CRA, which is a mini character, and in the decorative symbol visibility change effect C, the lightning bolt SND) can be displayed. In the decorative symbol visibility change effect C, the left movable accessory image KGL) is arranged and provided in front of the variable region 8Lr (first region), and a part of the left decorative symbol 8L (symbol image) is provided in the second region. The first effect (FIG. 116 (C) in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A, FIG. 117 (C) in the decorative symbol visibility change effect B, and FIG. 118 (C) in the decorative symbol visibility change effect C) that makes it difficult to see. )) Can be executed. According to this configuration, the second region is purposely placed in front of the variable region 8Lr (first region) so as to overlap a part of the variable region 8Lr (first region) of the left decorative symbol 8L (design image). Since it is arranged and provided in, a part of the left decorative symbol 8L (design image) can be made difficult to see due to the second region, and the entire image of the left decorative symbol 8L (design image) can be viewed by the player himself / herself. Can be imagined with. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a variable effect (variable display) using a novel pattern image that has never existed before. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, Further, the variable and reserved display area THA capable of displaying the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A so as to overlap a part of the variable region 8Lr (first region) and a part of the second region of the left decorative symbol 8L. (Third area) is arranged in front of the second area so that the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are not obscured by the left decorative symbol 8L (symbol image) and the specific image. .. The variable icon 9C may be used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) during the variable effect (during the variable display), and the hold icon 9A has not actually been used in the game yet. In the state, it may be used as an effect that suggests a future effect by a look-ahead effect. As a result, when the variation display by the symbol image is performed, it is possible to prevent the symbol image and the specific image from obstructing the visibility of the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, so that the player can use the symbol image. It can contribute to making it difficult to overlook changes in the variable icon 9C and changes in the hold icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, A specific image (decorative symbol visibility change effects A and B are mini characters, ally character CRA, and decorative symbol visibility change) while straddling the variable region 8Lr (first region) of the left decorative symbol 8L and the second region. When the lightning bolt SND) is displayed in the effect C, the other part (decorative symbol visibility change effect A FIG. 116 (D) and the decorative symbol visibility) that is different from a part of the left decorative symbol 8L (symbol image) due to the specific image is displayed. In FIG. 117 (D) of the change effect B, the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed overlaps with the ally character CRA, and in FIG. 118 (D) of the decorative symbol visibility change effect C, the left decorative symbol 8L overlaps with the lightning bolt SND. The part) is difficult to see. According to this configuration, a part of the design image is difficult to see due to the second region, and another part different from the part can be difficult to see due to the specific image, which is not conventionally possible. It is possible to provide the player with a variable effect (variable display) using a more innovative pattern image.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, The second area disappears from the display screen 7a so that the entire left decorative symbol 8L (design image) can be easily seen. According to this configuration, since a part of the symbol image is difficult to see due to the second region, the player can imagine the whole image of the symbol image, and further, the second region disappears from the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to match the answer with what one has imagined, and it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony of the variable display by the pattern image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A in FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B in FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C in FIG. 118 is It can be executed after the variable display by the symbol image is started and before the temporary stop display is displayed. According to this configuration, before the symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, a part of the symbol image can be made difficult to see by the second region, so that it is possible to give a change to the variable display by the symbol image. , It can contribute to making it difficult to be monotonous with respect to the variable display by the pattern image.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the variable icon 9C in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. 118 is When a specific image (a mini character CRA in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A and B, and a lightning bolt SND in the decorative symbol visibility change effect C) is displayed, it can be changed to one with a high degree of expectation. It has become like. According to this configuration, the variation icon 9C can be used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) during the variation effect (during the variation display). Further, when the specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the expectation of hitting may change to a higher one. Therefore, even if the specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player is expected to have a feeling of expectation. Can be given to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the decorative symbol visibility change effect A in FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B in FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C in FIG. 118. , Change the color of the pattern image to another color (for example, change the color of the number "1" from the normal color (bright green) to bright red) to increase the expectation of hitting. It is possible to execute FIG. 116 (H) in the sex change effect A, FIG. 117 (H) in the decorative symbol visibility change effect B, and FIG. 118 (H) in the decorative symbol visibility change effect C). .. According to this configuration, after the end of the first effect, there is a possibility that the second effect in which the color of the pattern image is changed is executed. Therefore, when the first effect is started, the player can perform the second effect. While enjoying the first production, you can also expect a second production that has not been performed yet but can be performed in the future.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern visibility change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIGS. 116 (E) and 116 (F) and the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIGS. 117 (E) and (F), when the reach is formed, the mini character effect area MHG is generated. It disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, before the reach is formed, the mini character effect area MHG may disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIGS. 118 (E) and 118 (F), when the reach was formed, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. By doing so, it is possible to indicate to the player the timing of the temporary stop display of the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, first, the left decorative symbol 8L is provisionally represented by the number "1" having a bright green color. After that, the right decorative symbol 8R was temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the reach was formed by the odd decorative symbols (design images). However, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2" having a bright blue color, and then the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2" having a bright blue color, that is, an even number. Reach may be formed by a decorative pattern (design image).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol visibility change effect C of FIGS. 118 (B) to (E), the left movable accessory image KGL imitating the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 sets the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L. It appeared so as to cover it, and further, the right movable accessory image KGR imitating the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 appeared so as to cover the variable region 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R. However, the left movable accessory image KGL may be replaced with the left movable accessory 14L, or the right movable accessory image KGR may be replaced with the right movable accessory 14R. By covering a part of the left decorative symbol 8L with the left movable accessory 14L, it is possible to make a part of the left decorative symbol 8L difficult to see, and to cover a part of the right decorative symbol 8R with the right movable accessory 14R. Since it is possible to make a part of the right decorative symbol 8R difficult to see, the player can imagine the whole image of the left decorative symbol 8L and the whole image of the right decorative symbol 8R by himself / herself. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a variable effect (variable display) using a novel pattern image that has never existed before. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the left movable accessory image KGL is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to correspond to the operating area of the left movable accessory 14L, and the right movable accessory image KGR is displayed so as to correspond to the operating area of the right movable accessory 14R. Since it is displayed on the screen 7a and the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR do not overlap with the fluctuation and hold display area THA in the front-rear direction, the left movable accessory image is displayed. The left movable accessory 14L is used instead of KGL, and the right movable accessory 14R is used instead of the right movable accessory image KGR. It does not overlap in the front and back. That is, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R do not cover the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A in the variable and reserved display area THA.

[Modification 5]
The decorative symbol visibility change effect A in FIG. 116, the decorative symbol visibility change effect B in FIG. 117, and the decorative symbol visibility change effect C in FIG. 118 may not include a part of the described effects, and others. The effect of may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C9-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
A second area capable of displaying a specific image is arranged and provided in front of the first area so as to overlap a part of the first area where the variation display by the symbol image is performed, and a part of the symbol image. Is possible to perform a first effect that is difficult to see due to the second region.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C9-1.
In the first effect, a third area in which the variable icon and the hold icon can be displayed so as to overlap a part of the first area and a part of the second area is the second area. The variable icon and the hold icon are arranged and provided in front of the above, and the symbol image and the specific image do not make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C9-1 or the aspect C9-2.
In the first effect, when the specific image is displayed in a state of straddling the first region and the second region, another part different from a part of the symbol image is visually recognized by the specific image. It can be difficult,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-3.
In the first effect, the second region may disappear and the entire design image may be easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-4.
The first effect can be executed after the variable display by the symbol image is started and before the temporary stop display is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-5.
The variable icon can be changed to one with a high degree of expectation when the specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-6.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect of changing the color of the pattern image to another color to increase the expectation of hitting.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. In FIGS. 119 to 121, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. It is omitted from the above.

This decorative symbol rotation stop display effect is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a decorative symbol rotation stop display effect, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A will be described, and then the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C will be described in order.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. In each variation region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. .. In addition to the numerical symbols, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C has a special symbol. This special symbol is composed only of the character symbol.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd-numbered symbols are composed of various character symbols (all different character symbols) having multiple colors (full color), whereas the even-numbered symbols are completely attached with the character symbols. It has not been. The character symbol attached to the odd-numbered symbol is displayed in a large size mainly with the character symbol. Therefore, the odd-numbered symbols are smaller than the size of the character symbols attached to the odd-numbered symbols. On the other hand, since the even-numbered symbols are not attached with the character symbols, the even-numbered symbols themselves are displayed in a large size. Therefore, the even-numbered symbols have the same size as the character symbols attached to the odd-numbered symbols. The special symbol is a symbol of a character in the form of a wing man, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special symbol is composed only of the symbol of the character in the form of a wing man, and the size of the special symbol is the same size or larger than the size of the symbol of the character attached to the odd number symbol. ing.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In FIG. 119 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2" having a bright blue color, and the middle decorative symbol 8C has a character symbol 8Cb attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" having a bright green color. The right decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a bright blue color, and then the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the result is off. When the detachment is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the decorative symbol changes again as shown in FIG. 119 (B). The effect (variable display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A is started.

After that, the left decorative symbol 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the left decorative symbol 8L. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region, the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is attached with the symbol 8Lb of the character. When the left decorative symbol 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8La having the number "1" having a bright green color remains facing the front and is subjected to a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character's symbol 8Lb attached to the symbol 8La with the number "1", which has a bright green color, has its eyes shining yellow, but does not face the front and tilts forward to the right when viewed from the character's symbol 8Lb. It is in a state of having a silhouette like that and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is continued.

Then, in the left decorative symbol 8L, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), the character symbol 8Lb faces from the front right to the front while the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color remains facing the front. When the character's design 8Lb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a shadowgraph-like silhouette to full color, and the entire left decorative design 8L moves slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and the symbol 8Lb of the character facing the front respectively.

Subsequently, the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the right decorative symbol 8R. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the fluctuation region of the above, the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color appears without a character. When the right decorative symbol 8R changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color does not face the front and tilts to the left front when viewed from the symbol 8Ra of the number "2". It is in the state as it is and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R slowly changes its posture so that the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color faces from the front left to the front, and the number "2" having a bright blue color. When the symbol 8Ra of "2" faces the front, the entire right decorative symbol 8R has a display mode in which the entire right decorative symbol 8R moves slowly in small steps in the vertical direction. As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8Ra having the number "2" having a bright blue color facing the front.

Subsequently, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119 (G), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region of the above, the symbol 8Cb of the character is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8Ca having the number "7" having a bright red color remains facing the front and is subjected to a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character's symbol 8Cb attached to the symbol 8Ca with the number "7", which has a bright red color, has its eyes shining yellow, but does not face the front and tilts forward to the right when viewed from the character's symbol 8Cb. It is in a state of having a silhouette like that and is variable production (variable display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the character symbol 8Cb faces from the front right to the front while the symbol 8Ca having the number "7" having a bright red color remains facing the front. When the character's design 8Cb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a shadowgraph-like silhouette to full color, and the entire medium-decorative design 8C moves slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color and the symbol 8Cb of the character facing the front respectively. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A ends.

After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and are out of order. When the detachment is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the left decorative symbol 8L, the posture of the character symbol 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered symbol 8La is slowly changed so as to face from the front right to the front when viewed from the character symbol 8Lb, and in the middle decorative symbol 8C. Slowly changes the posture of the character's symbol 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered symbol 8Ca so as to face from the front right to the front when viewed from the character's symbol 8Cb, whereas in the right decorative symbol 8R, the even-numbered symbol The posture is slowly changed so that 8Ra faces from the front left to the front when viewed from the even-numbered symbol 8Ra. That is, when the character symbol is present in the decorative symbol, the character symbol is rotated, and when the decorative symbol does not have the character symbol, the numerical symbol is rotated, and the objects to be rotated are different. It has become like. Further, the direction in which the character symbol rotates when the decorative symbol has the character symbol and the direction in which the numerical symbol rotates when the decorative symbol does not have the character symbol are opposite to each other. It has become.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variation region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. .. In addition to the numerical symbols, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C has a special symbol. This special symbol is composed only of the character symbol.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd-numbered symbols are composed of various character symbols (all different character symbols) having multiple colors (full color), whereas the even-numbered symbols are completely attached with the character symbols. It has not been. The character symbol attached to the odd-numbered symbol is displayed in a large size mainly with the character symbol. Therefore, the odd-numbered symbols are smaller than the size of the character symbols attached to the odd-numbered symbols. On the other hand, since the even-numbered symbols are not attached with the character symbols, the even-numbered symbols themselves are displayed in a large size. Therefore, the even-numbered symbols have the same size as the character symbols attached to the odd-numbered symbols. The special symbol is a symbol of a character in the form of a wing man, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special symbol is composed only of the symbol of the character in the form of a wing man, and the size of the special symbol is the same size or larger than the size of the symbol of the character attached to the odd number symbol. ing.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In FIG. 120 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2" having a bright blue color, and the middle decorative symbol 8C has a character symbol 8Cb attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" having a bright green color. The right decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a bright blue color, and then the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the result is off. When the detachment is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the decorative symbol changes again as shown in FIG. 120 (B). The effect (variable display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B is started.

After that, the left decorative symbol 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the left decorative symbol 8L. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region, the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is attached with the symbol 8Lb of the character. When the left decorative symbol 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8La having the number "1" having a bright green color remains facing the front and is subjected to a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character's symbol 8Lb attached to the symbol 8La with the number "1", which has a bright green color, has its eyes shining yellow, but does not face the front and tilts forward to the right when viewed from the character's symbol 8Lb. It is in a state of having a silhouette like that and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is continued.

Then, in the left decorative symbol 8L, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), the character symbol 8Lb faces from the front right to the front while the symbol 8La having the number "1" having a bright green color remains facing the front. When the character's design 8Lb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a shadowgraph-like silhouette to full color, and the entire left decorative design 8L moves slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and the symbol 8Lb of the character facing the front respectively.

Subsequently, the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the right decorative symbol 8R. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the fluctuation region of the above, the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color appears without a character. When the right decorative symbol 8R changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color does not face the front and tilts to the left front when viewed from the symbol 8Ra of the number "2". It is in the state as it is and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R slowly changes its posture so that the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color faces from the front left to the front, and the number "2" having a bright blue color. When the symbol 8Ra of "2" faces the front, the entire right decorative symbol 8R has a display mode in which the entire right decorative symbol 8R moves slowly in small steps in the vertical direction. As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8Ra having the number "2" having a bright blue color facing the front.

Subsequently, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120 (G), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region of the above, the symbol 8Cb of the character in the form of a wing man appears. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8Cb of the character in the form of a wing man is in a state where all the symbols 8Cb have a silver color, and the variable effect (variable display) is performed.

Then, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 120 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C grows while emitting a flash FH, and is a symbol of a winged character having a silver color. 8Cb changes to another color (full color), and the eye color also changes from silver to yellow. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variation icon 9C are still displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variation icon 9C are displayed so that the flash FH is arranged behind the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variation icon 9C. Therefore, it is not covered by the flash FH, and the visibility of the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C is not impaired. When the hold icon 9A exists, of course, the hold icon 9A does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and the flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the hold icon 9A, so that the hold icon 9A is displayed. The 9A is not covered by the flash FH, and the visibility of the hold icon 9A is not impaired.

After that, in a state where the flash FH is emitted, as shown in FIG. 120 (I) (the flash FH is omitted in the figure), the symbol of the character in the form of a wing man in the enlarged medium decorative symbol 8C. 8Cb protrudes forward from the middle decorative symbol 8C and is displayed in a larger size, and a moving image of the symbol 8Cb of the character in the form of a wing person is performed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B ends.

In FIG. 120 (I), when the symbol 8Cb of the winged character in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not protrude forward from the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves below its own variable region. Then, it appears from above in a state where the character symbol 8Cb is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "1" having a bright green color. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8Ca having the number "1" having a bright green color remains facing the front and is subjected to a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character's symbol 8Cb attached to the symbol 8Ca with the number "1", which has a bright green color, has its eyes shining yellow, but does not face the front and tilts forward to the right when viewed from the character's symbol 8Cb. It is in a state of having a silhouette like that and is variable production (variable display). Then, the middle decorative symbol 8C slowly changes its posture so that the character symbol 8Cb faces the front from the front right while the symbol 8Ca of the number "1" having a bright green color remains facing the front. When the symbol 8Cb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a shadowgraph-like silhouette to a full color, and the entire intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves slowly in the vertical direction in a display mode. As a result, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8Ca of the number "1" having a bright green color and the symbol 8Cb of the character facing the front respectively. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B ends. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and are out of order. When the detachment is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 120 (J), the battle effect is started. In the battle production, two characters (friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big hit is high. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. If the hold icon 9A exists, of course, the hold icon 9A also disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and after that, a jackpot game (big hit production) is performed. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and are out of order. When the battle effect is completed and the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. If the hold icon 9A is present, the hold icon 9A is also displayed again on the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the middle decorative symbol 8C, the symbol 8Cb of the character in the form of a wing man, which is a special symbol, does not change its posture while facing the front, but in the left decorative symbol 8L, the odd symbol 8La is used. While the attached character's symbol 8Lb slowly changes its posture from the front right to the front, in the right decorative symbol 8R, the even-numbered symbol 8Ra slowly changes its posture from the front left to the front. It is designed to let you. That is, except for the special symbol, the character symbol is rotated when the character symbol is present in the decorative symbol, and the number symbol is rotated when the character symbol is not present in the decorative symbol. The objects to rotate are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character symbol rotates when the decorative symbol has a character symbol except for the special symbol and the direction in which the numerical symbol rotates when the decorative symbol does not have a character symbol are opposite to each other. It has become different.

Further, even when the character symbol is present in the decorative symbol, there are a character symbol that rotates and a special symbol that the character symbol does not rotate while facing the front. Furthermore, if there is a decorative pattern in which a number symbol is the only symbol and a decorative symbol in which the symbol of the character in the form of a wing person is the only symbol, the only symbol is the one. It is designed to rotate.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variation region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. .. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are card-type decorative symbols, and various characters are attached to the numerical symbols in the card. Further, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C has a special pattern. This special symbol is composed only of the character symbol.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Each number symbol (odd number symbol and even number symbol) is composed of various character symbols (all different character symbols) having multiple colors (full color), and the character symbol is the main component. Is displayed large as. Therefore, the number symbol is smaller than the size of the character symbol attached to the number symbol. The special symbol is a symbol of a character in the form of a wing man, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special symbol is composed only of the symbol of the character in the form of a wing man, and the size of the special symbol is the same size or larger than the size of the character's symbol attached to the numerical symbol. ing.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

In FIG. 121 (A), the number "2" in which the left decorative symbol 8L has a bright blue color is temporarily stopped and displayed with the character symbol 8Lb attached, and the number "3" in which the middle decorative symbol 8C has a bright green color 8Ca. The character symbol 8Cb is attached to the temporary stop display, the right decorative symbol 8C is attached to the number "6" having a bright blue color, and the character symbol 8Rb is attached to the temporary stop display. The symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and are out of alignment. When the detachment is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the decorative symbol changes again as shown in FIG. 121 (B). The effect (variable display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C is started.

After that, the left decorative symbol 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L becomes the left decorative symbol 8L. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region, the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is attached with the symbol 8Lb of the character. When the left decorative symbol 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8La having the number "1" having a bright green color remains facing the front and is subjected to a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character's symbol 8Lb attached to the symbol 8La with the number "1", which has a bright green color, has its eyes shining yellow, but does not face the front and tilts forward to the right when viewed from the character's symbol 8Lb. It is in a state of having a silhouette like that and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), in the left decorative symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Lb faces from the front right to the front while the symbol 8La having the number "1" having a bright green color remains facing the front. When the character's design 8Lb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a shadow puppet to full color, and the entire card-type left decorative design 8L moves slowly in the vertical direction. Become. As a result, the card-type left decorative symbol 8L is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and the symbol 8Lb of the character facing the front respectively.

Subsequently, the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the right decorative symbol 8R. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the fluctuation region of the above, the symbol 8Rb of the character is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color. When the right decorative symbol 8R changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color does not face the front and tilts to the left front when viewed from the symbol 8Ra of the number "2". The pattern 8Rb of the character attached to the pattern 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color is shining yellow and facing the front in full color. It is in the same state and is variable production (variable display). At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R slowly changes its posture so that the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color faces from the front left to the front, and the number "2" having a bright blue color. When the symbol 8Ra of "2" faces the front, the entire card-type right decorative symbol 8R moves slowly in the vertical direction in small steps. As a result, the card-type right decorative symbol 8R is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color and the symbol 8Rb of the character facing the front respectively.

Subsequently, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121 (G), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region of the above, the symbol 8Cb of the character is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the symbol 8Ca having the number "7" having a bright red color remains facing the front and is subjected to a variable effect (variable display). Furthermore, the character's symbol 8Cb attached to the symbol 8Ca with the number "7", which has a bright red color, has its eyes shining yellow, but does not face the front and tilts forward to the right when viewed from the character's symbol 8Cb. It is in a state of having a silhouette like that and is variable production (variable display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (H), in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the character symbol 8Cb faces from the front right to the front while the symbol 8Ca of the number “7” having a bright red color remains facing the front. When the character's design 8Cb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a shadow puppet to full color, and the entire card-type medium decorative design 8C moves slowly in the vertical direction. Become. As a result, the card-type intermediate decorative symbol 8C is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color and the symbol 8Cb of the character facing the front respectively. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C ends.

After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and are out of order. When the detachment is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the card type left decorative symbol 8L, the posture of the character symbol 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered symbol 8La is slowly changed so as to face from the front right to the front when viewed from the character symbol 8Lb, and the card type. In the medium decorative symbol 8C, the character's symbol 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered symbol 8Ca slowly changes its posture from the front right to the front when viewed from the character's symbol 8Cb, whereas the right of the card type. In the decorative symbol 8R, the posture of the even-numbered symbol 8Ra is slowly changed so as to face from the front left to the front when viewed from the even-numbered symbol 8Ra. That is, even if various characters are attached to the odd-numbered symbol and the even-numbered symbol, the character symbol is rotated in the odd-numbered symbol, and the numerical symbol is rotated in the even-numbered symbol. Is different. Further, the direction in which the character symbol in the odd-numbered symbol rotates and the direction in which the numerical symbol in the even-numbered symbol rotates are opposite to each other.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, a plurality of types of images are displayed. An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying is provided, and a character symbol is attached to an odd number of decorative symbols (multiple symbol images) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8L. The decorative symbol (first symbol image) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first stop mode, and the decorative symbol (second symbol image) of an even numbered symbol is displayed in the second stop mode (second stop mode). 119 (B) to (H) in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A, and FIG. 120 (FIG. 120) in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B. B) to (G), FIGS. 121 (B) to (I) can be executed in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C. According to this configuration, among the decorative symbols (plural symbol images) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8L, a character is attached to an odd number of symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first stop mode. A novel decorative symbol variation effect (variation) by the decorative symbol (first symbol image) and the even-numbered decorative symbol (second symbol image) that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second stop mode. Display) can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first symbol image. The second symbol image is a number symbol (numerical image), and the first symbol image further includes a character symbol (decorative image). According to this configuration, the first symbol image is a number symbol (number image) containing a character symbol (decorative image), and the second symbol image is a number symbol (numerical image). Become. Therefore, there is already a difference between the decorative symbol that is the first symbol image and the decorative symbol that is the second symbol image, and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started and temporarily stopped. It is possible to give a different impression to the player depending on the combination of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped, which contributes to eliminating the monotony of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol with respect to the temporary stop display. can.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variation effect in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first As a stop mode of, the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed after the character symbol (decorative image) is rotated without rotating the number symbol (numerical image) in the first symbol image, and the second stop mode is After rotating the numerical symbol (numerical image) in the second symbol image, the second symbol image can be temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, in the first symbol image in which the numerical symbol (numerical image) includes the character symbol (decorative image), the numerical symbol (numerical image) does not rotate and the character symbol (decorative image) is used. The second symbol image, which is displayed as a temporary stop after rotating, and becomes a numerical symbol (numerical image), is such that the numerical symbol (numerical image) is rotated and then temporarily stopped, and the object to be rotated is It's different. As a result, as a variation in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, there are cases where only the first symbol image is used, the second symbol image is used only, and the first symbol image and the second symbol image are used. In each variation, there is always a rotating part in the decorative pattern, so a unified effect called "rotation" is performed for the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern. Even if the object to be rotated differs between the symbol image and the second symbol image, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort with respect to the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first symbol image. Some of the numerical symbols (numerical images) in the above have bright green (first color) and some have bright red (second color), and the numerical symbols (numerical image) in the second symbol image. ) Has a bright blue color (third color). According to this configuration, there is a difference in the mode in which the temporary stop is displayed between the first symbol image and the second symbol image, and further, there is a difference in the color of the numerical symbol (numerical image). Further, since the numerical symbol (numerical image) in the first symbol image also has two colors, it is possible to give a different impression to the player depending on the combination of the temporary stop display.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIGS. 120 (G) to (I), the decorative symbols (plural) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8L are used. The symbol image) further includes a special symbol (third symbol image) of the medium decorative symbol 8C having a character symbol (decorative image) and no numerical symbol (numerical image). The special symbol (third symbol image) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the third stop mode, and the special symbol (third symbol image) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped in the third stop mode. When displayed, the symbol (decorative image) of the character in the form of a wing person in the special symbol (third symbol image) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C jumps out of the special symbol (third symbol image) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and operates. You can do it. According to this configuration, when the special symbol (third symbol image) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol of the character in the form of a wing person in the special symbol (third symbol image) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed. The (decorative image) suddenly jumps out from the special symbol (third symbol image) of the medium decorative symbol 8C and operates with a video that the player cannot imagine, so it has an impact. It can be provided to the player.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variation effect in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first When the symbol image of No. It is possible to return to the design (decorative image) of the character (full color). According to this configuration, by returning from the silhouette like a shadow picture (shadow picture image) to the original (full color) character design (decorative image), it is possible to easily determine what character's design is. , By making the silhouette like a shadow picture (shadow picture image), the effect of the production can be further enhanced.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first symbol image. The size of the numerical symbol (numerical image) in the second symbol image is smaller than the size of the numerical symbol (numerical image) in the second symbol image. In the first symbol image, the character symbol (decorative image) is included in the numerical symbol (numerical image), so that the character symbol (decorative image) is mainly enlarged in the first symbol image. The number pattern is smaller than the size of the character pattern (decorative image). Further, the second symbol image becomes a numerical symbol (numerical image), and the numerical symbol itself becomes large as a main body. That is, the player is made to pay attention to the character symbol (decorative symbol) that is displayed large in the first symbol image, and the player is focused on the numerical symbol (numerical image) that is displayed large in the second symbol image. It seems that it can be made to pay attention to different things. This can contribute to making it difficult for the decorative symbol to be the first symbol image and the decorative symbol to be the second symbol image to be monotonous with respect to the variable effect (variable display).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol are displayed when the temporary stop is displayed. The 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R were aligned in a row at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L. However, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged at a position slightly above the center line, the middle decorative symbol 8C is arranged further at the rear position, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged. It may be arranged in a triangular shape as the base. In this case, the size of the middle decorative symbol 8C is made smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged on the front side, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is arranged on the depth side, so that a three-dimensional arrangement can be realized.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, as a special symbol, the character in the form of a wing person is a symbol, and the character in the form of a wing person jumps forward from the middle decorative symbol 8C and is further displayed on the display screen 7a in a large size. A moving image of a humanoid character design was being performed. However, as a special symbol, in addition to the symbol of the character in the form of a wing man, a character symbol may be used. For example, the symbol of the character performing the pseudo-ream (the symbol of the character "pseudo-ream") may be used, or the variable icon 9C or the hold icon 9A may be changed (the symbol of the character "change"). By doing this, it is possible to create an effect in which the character symbol jumps forward from the middle decorative symbol 8C to activate the content of the character symbol, and by increasing the variation of the special symbol, it depends on the special symbol. The effect of the production can be further enhanced.

[Modification 4]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A in FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B in FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C in FIG. 121 may not include a part of the described effects, and others. The effect of may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C10-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
Among the plurality of symbol images, it is possible to execute a variable effect in which the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first stop mode, and the second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second stop mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C10-1.
The first symbol image and the second symbol image are numerical images, and are
The first design image further includes a decorative image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C10-2.
In the variation effect, as the first stop mode, the decorative image is rotated without rotating the numerical image in the first symbol image, and then the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second is displayed. As a stop mode, the numerical image in the second symbol image is rotated, and then the second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C10-2 or the aspect C10-3.
The numerical image in the first symbol image may have a first color and a second color.
Some of the numerical images in the second symbol image have a third color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-4.
The plurality of symbol images further include a third symbol image having the decorative image and not the numerical image.
In the variation effect, the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the third stop mode.
In the third stop mode, when the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative image in the third symbol image jumps out of the third symbol image and can operate.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-5.
In the variation effect, when the first symbol image starts to fluctuate, a part of the decorative image in the first symbol image is changed to imitate a shadow picture image, and the original in the first stop mode is described. Return to decorative image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-6.
The size of the numerical image in the first symbol image is smaller than the size of the numerical image in the second symbol image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The expected degree numerical display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. This expected degree numerical display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the expected degree numerical display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Expectation number display effect A]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree numerical display effect A. The expectation number display effect is an effect in which an image representing the expectation level at the time of reach development is displayed by a number during the reach effect. First, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2 ↓ 2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. When a predetermined period elapses after this reach effect, the black doll character CRA1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a character image of "chance of probable change jackpot rush" is displayed together with the character CRA1.

The character image of this "chance of probable change jackpot rush" is a hit type suggestion image suggesting the jackpot type at the time of jackpot. In other words, it is suggested that when it hits in the fluctuation, it will be a probable change jackpot. Here, it is suggested that if the jackpot becomes a jackpot after the fluctuation, the jackpot will be 16R (round) V passing planned jackpot (substantially 15R or 13R). In this character image, the jackpot in the fluctuation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning, and the jackpot type is the jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV, and it is changing when it is selected in the lottery to display this character image when the fluctuation pattern is selected. Is displayed in. Further, it is selected that this character image is displayed by the lottery even when the loss in the fluctuation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning. In addition, this character image may be set so as to be displayed only when the jackpot type is the 16RV non-passing jackpot at the time of the jackpot, or when another jackpot (for example, 16RV non-passing jackpot) at the jackpot. May also be set to be displayed.

The character image of "chance of probable change jackpot rush" is displayed for a predetermined period and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the character image of "chance of probable change jackpot rush" disappears, the character CRA1 is displayed below the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation as shown in FIG. 122 (B). The character CRA1 is an image showing the same object (black person) as in FIG. 122 (A), but the display position is different (changes) from that in FIG. 122 (A). In addition, a character image of "expectation 40% in smile reach development" is displayed together with the character CRA1. The character image of "expectation 40% in smile reach development" is displayed as a balloon of the character CRA. The reach of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

The character image of "expectation degree 40% in smile reach development" is a hit expectation degree suggestion image which numerically represents the expectation degree of a big hit when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the reach of the fluctuation. That is, it is suggested that the expectation of the big hit is 40% when the smile reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this character image is executed both when the jackpot in the fluctuation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning and when the loss is confirmed. When the display of this character image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selecting to display this character image is set to be 4: 6 between the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss.

The character image of "expectation 40% in smile reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the character image of "expectation 40% in smile reach development" disappears, the character image of "smile reach development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation as shown in FIG. 122 (C). Will be done. This is an image that informs that the reach has been developed in the reach production. After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the reach development effect is executed. Here, a plurality of smile face images are displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the definite stop is made in the mode of the loss of "282".

FIG. 122 (F) is a variation different from FIGS. 122 (A) to (E), and the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of “6 ↓ 6”). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a to execute a special reach effect. Here, first, a battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. During the display of this battle video, a character image of "expectation degree 30% in smile reach development" is displayed. The character image of "expectation degree 30% in smile reach development" is displayed in a rectangular frame below the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB.

The character image of "expectation degree 30% in smile reach development" is a hit expectation degree suggestion image which numerically represents the expectation degree of a big hit when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the reach of the fluctuation. That is, it is suggested that the expectation of the big hit is 30% when the smile reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this character image is executed both when the jackpot in the fluctuation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning and when the loss is confirmed. When the display of this character image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selecting to display this character image is set to be 3: 7 between the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss.

Comparing this "expectation degree 30% with smile reach development" and the character image with "expectation degree 40% with smile reach development" in Fig. 122 (B), the same reach development production (smile reach development) is executed. While it is an image showing the degree of expectation when it is done, a different numerical value is displayed as the degree of expectation. In this way, since the numerical values of different expectations may be displayed in the same reach development effect (smile reach development), it is possible to make the player pay attention to the numerical values. Further, the character image of "expectation degree 30% in smile reach development" is displayed together with the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, while the character image of "expectation degree 40% in smile reach development" in FIG. 122 (B). Is displayed with the black doll character CRA1. In this way, the character image of "expectation degree 30% in smile reach development" and the character image of "expectation degree 40% in smile reach development" in FIG. 122 (B) display images representing different objects. NS. As a result, it is difficult to understand what image the character image of "expectation degree 〇〇% in smile reach development" is displayed with, and it is possible to raise the expectation degree of display for the player.

The character image of "expectation degree 30% in smile reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the character image of "expectation degree 30% in smile reach development" disappears, as shown in FIG. 122 (H), the character image of "smile reach development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation. Will be done. This is an image that informs that the reach has been developed in the reach production. After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (I), the reach development effect is executed. Here, the ally character CRA throws a plurality of smiley face images toward the enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, along with the image in which the ally character CRA is defeated, the confirmation is stopped in the form of a loss of "686".

[Expectation number display effect B]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree numerical display effect B. The expectation number display effect is an effect in which an image representing the expectation level at the time of reach development is displayed by a number during the reach effect. First, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2 ↓ 2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. When a predetermined period elapses after this reach effect, a battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While displaying this battle image, the smile character CRA1 is displayed. In addition, the character image of "Chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" is displayed together with the smile character CRA1.

The character image of this "chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" is a hit type suggestion image suggesting the jackpot type when the ally character CRA wins in the battle production. That is, it is suggested that when it hits in the fluctuation, it becomes a big hit with RUSH. Here, it is suggested that if the jackpot becomes a jackpot after the fluctuation, the jackpot will be 16R (round) V passing planned jackpot (substantially 15R or 13R). In this character image, the jackpot in the fluctuation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning, and the jackpot type is the jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV, and it is changing when it is selected in the lottery to display this character image when the fluctuation pattern is selected. Is displayed in. Further, it is selected that this character image is displayed by the lottery even when the loss in the fluctuation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning. In this case, an image in which the ally character CRA is defeated is displayed. This character image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is 16RV scheduled to pass the jackpot at the time of the jackpot, or is displayed when another jackpot (for example, 16RV non-passing scheduled jackpot) is displayed at the time of the jackpot. It may be set to be.

After a predetermined period of time has passed after the text image of "Chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" is displayed, the text image of "Chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 123 (B). In the state, the smile character CRA2 is further displayed. The smile character CRA2 is an image showing the same object (smile face) as the smile character CRA1, but the display position is different (arranged vertically). In addition, a character image of "expectation 60% in smileman participation reach development" is displayed together with the smile character CRA2. The character image of "expectation degree 60% in smileman participation reach development" is displayed as a balloon of smile character CRA2. The reach of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

The character image of "expectation degree 60% in smileman participation reach development" is a hit expectation degree suggestion image which numerically expresses the expectation degree of a big hit when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the reach of the fluctuation. That is, it is suggested that the expectation of the big hit is 60% when the smileman participation reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this character image is executed both when the jackpot in the fluctuation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning and when the loss is confirmed. When the display of this character image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selecting to display this character image is set to be 6: 4 between the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss.

The character image of "Expectation 60% in smileman participation reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period and then disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the text image of "Chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" also disappears. After the text images of "Expectation 60% for Smileman participation reach development" and "Chance to enter RUSH with battle victory" disappear, as shown in Fig. 123 (C), during the same fluctuation, the center of the display screen 7a. The text image of "Smileman participation!" Is displayed in the vicinity. This is an image that informs that the reach has been developed in the reach production. Along with this notification image, Smileman CRC will participate in the battle video in which the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the reach development effect is executed. Here, an image in which the ally character CRA and the Smileman CRC are defeated by the enemy character CRB is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the definite stop is made in the mode of the loss of "282".

FIG. 123 (F) is a variation different from FIGS. 123 (A) to 123 (E), and the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of “6 ↓ 6”). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and a special reach effect is executed. Here, first, a battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While displaying this battle image, a rectangular striped image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 123 (H) to 123 (I), when the striped pattern in the rectangular striped pattern image slides to the left, the characters "Expectation 60% in smileman participation reach development" from the inside. The image is displayed. The text image of "Expectation 60% in Smileman participation reach development" is displayed inside the rectangular frame.

The character image of "expectation degree 60% in smileman participation reach development" is a hit expectation degree suggestion image which numerically expresses the expectation degree of a big hit when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the reach of the fluctuation. That is, it is suggested that the expectation of the big hit is 60% when the smileman participation reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this character image is executed both when the jackpot in the fluctuation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning and when the loss is confirmed. When the display of this character image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selecting to display this character image is set to be 6: 4 between the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss.

The character image of "Expectation 60% in Smileman participation reach development" in FIGS. 123 (G) to (I) and the character image of "Expectation 60% in Smileman participation reach development" in Fig. 123 (B). By comparison, it is an image showing the degree of expectation when the same reach development effect (smileman participation reach development) is executed, and the same numerical value is displayed as the degree of expectation. On the other hand, the character image of "Expectation 60% in Smileman participation reach development" in FIGS. 123 (G) to 123 (I) is displayed from the inside when the striped pattern in the rectangular striped pattern image slides to the left. On the other hand, the character image of "Expectation degree 60% in smileman participation reach development" in FIG. 123 (B) is displayed as a balloon of the smile character CRA2. In this way, even if the contents are the same, the display mode is different. Further, the character image of "Expectation 60% in smileman participation reach development" in FIGS. 123 (G) to 123 is displayed together with the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, while the "smile" in FIG. 123 (B) is displayed. The character image of "Expectation 60% in the development of man participation reach" is displayed together with the smile character CRA2. In this way, the text images of "Expectation 60% for Smileman participation reach development" in FIGS. 123 (G) to (I) and "Expectation 60% for Smileman participation reach development" in Fig. 123 (B). With the character image, images representing different objects are displayed. This makes it difficult to understand how and with what image the text image of "Expectation 60% in Smileman participation reach development" is displayed, and raises the expectation of display to the player. can.

The character image of "Expectation 60% in smileman participation reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period and then disappears from the display screen 7a. If the reach development effect is not executed after the character image of "Expectation 60% in smileman participation reach development" disappears (when Smileman CRC in FIG. 123 does not appear), as shown in FIG. 123 (J). In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, along with the image in which the ally character CRA is defeated, the confirmation is stopped in the form of a loss of "686".

[Expectation number display effect C]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree numerical display effect C. 124 (A) to (C) are the same as FIGS. 123 (A) to (C) of the expectation degree numerical display effect B. After FIG. 124 (C), as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the reach development effect is executed. Here, a video is displayed in which the ally character CRA and the smileman CRC defeat the enemy character CRB and win. After that, due to this victory, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, since the ally character CRA has won, the confirmation has stopped in the mode of hitting "222".

124 (F) to (G) are the same as FIGS. 123 (F) to (H) of the expectation degree numerical display effect B. After the character image of "Expectation 60% in smileman participation reach development" shown in FIG. 124 (G) disappears, "Smileman participation!" Near the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 124 (H). Character image is displayed. This is an image that informs that the reach has been developed in the reach production. Along with this notification image, Smileman CRC will participate in the battle video in which the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (I), the reach development effect is executed. Here, a video is displayed in which the ally character CRA and the smileman CRC defeat the enemy character CRB and win. After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, since the ally character CRA has won, the confirmation is stopped in the mode of hitting "666".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the expected degree numerical display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122 (B), 123 (B), and 124 (B), the first effect of numerically expressing the degree of expectation at the time of reach development is executed at the time of reach. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122 (A), 123 (A), and 124 (A), the first effect is in the same variation as the first effect is executed. Prior to the effect, a second effect that suggests the hit type at the time of hit can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122 (A) (B), 123 (A) (B), and 124 (A) (B), the first effect and the second effect Then, an image representing the same object is displayed, and in the first effect and the second effect, the images representing the same object are displayed at different positions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122 (B) and 122 (G), in the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed numerically, and the reach is expressed. Occasionally, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed by a number different from the numerical value in the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122 (B) and 122 (G), an image representing an object different from each other is displayed in the first effect and the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 (B) (G) to (I) and FIGS. 124 (B) (G), in the first effect, a specific reach development effect is executed. The degree of expectation of the case is expressed by a number, and the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed at the time of reach is expressed by the same number as the numerical value in the first effect, but is different from the first effect. The fourth effect displayed in the embodiment can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the expected degree numerical display effect.
[Modification 1]

Expectation degree In FIG. 122 (G) of the numerical display effect A, the expectation degree represented by the character image of "expectation degree 30% in smile reach development" is "expectation degree 40% in smile reach development" in FIG. 122 (B). It may be the same numerical value as the expectation degree represented by the character image. In this case, at the time of reach, the effects expressing the expected degree when a specific reach development effect is executed are executed in different modes from each other, so that the interest can be improved. Further, in FIGS. 123 (G) to (I) of the expectation degree numerical display effect B, the expectation degree represented by the character image of "expectation degree 60% in smileman participation reach development" is "smileman" in FIG. 123 (B). It may be a numerical value different from the expectation degree represented by the character image of "expectation degree 60% in the participation reach development". In this case, at the time of reach, the effect of expressing the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is executed by different numerical values, so that it is possible to improve the interest.
[Modification 2]
In the expectation degree numerical display effect A, the effect of displaying the character image of "expectation degree 〇〇% in smile reach development" may be executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation. That is, the degree of expectation may change during one fluctuation. In this case, the expectation displayed later may be higher or lower than the expectation displayed earlier.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
A gaming machine characterized in that it can perform the first effect that numerically expresses the degree of expectation at the time of reach development at the time of reach.
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
A gaming machine characterized in that a second effect suggesting a hit type at the time of hit can be executed before the first effect during the same fluctuation as the variation in which the first effect is executed. ..
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2.
In the first effect and the second effect, an image representing the same object is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that images representing the same object are displayed at different positions in the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
In the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed numerically.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a third effect in which the degree of expectation when the specific reach development effect is executed at the time of reach is expressed by a number different from the numerical value in the first effect.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 4.
A gaming machine characterized in that images representing different objects are displayed in the first effect and the third effect.
◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
In the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed numerically.
At the time of reach, the expectation level when the specific reach development effect is executed is expressed by the same numerical value as the numerical value in the first effect, while the fourth effect displayed in a mode different from that of the first effect. A gaming machine characterized by being feasible.

Hereinafter, specific effect execution suggestion effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. This specific effect execution suggestion effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific effect execution suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L.

[Specific effect execution suggestion effect A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the specific effect execution suggestion effect A. The specific effect execution suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the specific effect will be executed in the fluctuation. First, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L continues. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the fluctuation, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suggesting that the specific effect will be executed in the fluctuation is displayed. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is a character image of "Smile-kun large set!", And notifies that the special reach effect (SP reach effect) is executed. At the time of appearance, the character image of "Smile-kun Daishuu!" Is enlarged and displayed over three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. In addition, the effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed outside the three screens. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has not been displayed yet. That is, in this effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed after the start of the variation and before the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. Therefore, the player who sees the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suddenly executes the specific effect such as the special reach effect without knowing the state of the decorative pattern at all, such as whether or not the decorative pattern is reachable. Be informed. As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the interest can be improved. A part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed so as to overlap with the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is reduced and displayed, and the entire specific effect execution suggestion image ESG has three three screens: the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. It fits inside the screen. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not been displayed yet. A part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is further reduced and displayed, and the entire specific effect execution suggestion image ESG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed on the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. NS.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is specified. Temporarily stop at a position that overlaps with the effect execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative symbol 8L is “7” here, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is above the display screen 7a while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative symbol 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a. It moves downward from and temporarily stops at a position overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative symbol 8R is the same “7” as the left decorative symbol 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a reach of "7 ↓ 7" is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (G), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and the special reach effect as the specific effect is started. The right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L are stopped in the reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and a plurality of smile face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIGS. 125 (H) and 125 (I), a specific effect (special reach effect) using a plurality of smile face images is executed. That is, the character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. Here, in the specific production, a production with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of the jackpot of "777".

[Specific effect execution suggestion effect B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. The specific effect execution suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the specific effect will be executed in the fluctuation. First, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L continues. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 126 (B) and 126 (C), a specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suggesting that the specific effect is to be executed in the change is displayed. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is a character image of "Smile-kun large set!", And notifies that the special reach effect (SP reach effect) is executed. The character image of "Smile-kun Daishuu!" Appears while moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has not been displayed yet. That is, in this effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed after the start of the variation and before the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. Therefore, the player who sees the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suddenly executes the specific effect such as the special reach effect without knowing the state of the decorative pattern at all, such as whether or not the decorative pattern is reachable. Be informed. As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the interest can be improved. When the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 126 (C), a part thereof is displayed overlapping with the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is enlarged and displayed, and the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. It is displayed across. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not been displayed yet. A part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is reduced and displayed, and the entire specific effect execution suggestion image ESG fits inside the display screen 7a again. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed on the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. NS.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is specified. Temporarily stop at a position that overlaps with the effect execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative symbol 8L is “7” here, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is above the display screen 7a while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative symbol 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a. It moves downward from and temporarily stops at a position overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative symbol 8R is the same “7” as the left decorative symbol 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a reach of "7 ↓ 7" is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (H), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and the special reach effect as the specific effect is started. The right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L are stopped in the reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and a plurality of smile face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (I), a specific effect (special reach effect) using a plurality of smile face images is executed. That is, the character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. Here, in the specific production, a production with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of the jackpot of "777".

[Specific effect execution suggestion effect C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the specific effect execution suggestion effect C. In the specific effect execution suggestion effect C, the specific effect execution suggestion effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed in combination. First, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L continues. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen. The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed in any of the 64L continues. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below the hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the fluctuation, the effects shown in FIGS. 127 (B) to 127 (D) are executed. The effects shown in FIGS. 127 (B) to 127 (D) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 126 (B) to (H) of the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. As shown in FIG. 127 (D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and the special reach effect (SP reach effect) as the specific effect is started. The right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L are stopped in the reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and a plurality of smile face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, a specific effect (special reach effect) using a plurality of smile face images is executed. That is, the character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Here, the temporary stop is performed in the mode of the loss of "767". After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the character image of "one more time!" Is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started to start the re-variation of the decorative pattern. 127 (G) to (I) are the same as FIGS. 127 (B) to (D). After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the fixed stop is made in the mode of the jackpot of "777".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the specific effect execution suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, the specific effect is executed in the variation in the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is not continuously displayed after the variation starts. The first effect in which the suggested specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, and the second effect in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG after the first effect. Can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a reach state so as to overlap with the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, after the second effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is cracked in a state where the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are overlapped, and the SP reach effect is produced. The third effect to be executed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the third effect, the character (smile face image) corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suggests the specific effect execution. A character (smile face image) appears in the SP reach production by destroying the image ESG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the first effect, the hold icon (the hold icon (variable icon) 9C) is displayed overlapping on the front surface of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Will be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG has the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R, and the display screen 7a and the left sub. Display screen 64L Displayed across the sub-display means. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific effect execution suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the specific effect execution suggestion effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, but may be stopped in a mode other than reach. For example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at "567" on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Further, for example, after the temporary stop at "567", the change may be performed again by the pseudo continuous effect, and the specific effect may be executed at that time.

[Modification 2]
The content of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG may suggest that an effect other than the special reach effect is executed. For example, it may be suggested that a jackpot confirmation effect or a loss confirmation effect is executed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
A first effect in which a specific effect execution suggestion image suggesting that a specific effect is executed in the change is displayed in a state where the change display of the decorative symbol is not continuously displayed after the start of the change.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second effect in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped so as to overlap with the specific effect execution suggestion image after the first effect.
◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1.
In the second effect, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state so as to overlap with the specific effect execution suggestion image.
◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2.
After the second effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image is cracked in a state where the decorative symbols are overlapped, and the third effect in which the SP reach effect is executed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3.
In the third effect, the character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image, and in the SP reach effect, the character appears. Machine.
◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
In the first effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the hold icon is superimposed and displayed on the front surface of the specific effect execution suggestion image.
◇ [Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5 is further described.
It has a sub-display means that can display multiple types of images.
In the first effect, the game machine characterized in that the specific effect execution suggestion image is displayed straddling the display means and the sub-display means.

The special direction suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. This special direction suggestion effect can be executed during a variable effect of a special symbol, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, it is realized by analyzing the variation effect start command and the jackpot game start command received from the sub control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a. It is a production.

[Special direction suggestion production A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestion effect A. In this special direction suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), a time-saving medium-time effect is executed. This time-saving and medium-sized effect is performed when the time-saving game state is relatively advantageous to the player, and the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time-saving number display XF3 are displayed. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11 which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit right and the character "right hit" in the arrow. The time reduction number display XF3 is a display indicating the number of remaining time reductions, and is indicated as "50 more times" in the example of FIG. 128 (A). Further, in this time-saving and medium-time effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Further, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), the direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is a continuation of the time-saving and medium-time effect, and is performed during the time-saving game. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2 and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged on the arrow handle (arrow trunk) portion of the arrow of the direction display XF21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), the direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of the direction display effect 1 and is performed during the time-saving game. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time reduction number display XF3 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 moves the arrowhead portion of the direction display XF21. It is carried out.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the end of the time-saving game or until the big hit.

[Special direction suggestion effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestion effect B. In this special direction suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), a normal medium effect is executed. This normal middle effect is performed in a normal gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and displays the ally character XF1 and the direction suggestion display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11 which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit right and the character "right hit" in the arrow. Further, in this normal middle effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Further, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. After that, the following will be explained as a big hit and entering a time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), the direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is performed during a time-saving game that is relatively advantageous to the player. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2 and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged on the arrow handle (arrow trunk) portion of the arrow of the direction display XF21. Further, in the direction suggestion display effect 1, the time saving number display XF3 is displayed. The time reduction number display XF3 is a display indicating the number of remaining time reductions, and is indicated as "50 more times" in the example of FIG. 129 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (C), the direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of the direction suggestion display effect 1, and is performed in the time-saving gaming state. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time reduction number display XF3 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 moves the arrowhead portion of the direction display XF21. It is carried out.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the end of the time-saving game or until the big hit.

[Special direction suggestion effect C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestion effect C. In this special direction suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), a normal medium effect is executed. This normal middle effect is performed in a normal gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and displays the ally character XF1 and the direction suggestion display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11 which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow suggesting the player to hit right and the character "right hit" in the arrow. Further, in this normal middle effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Further, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. After that, the following will be described as the fact that the jackpot has entered the jackpot game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is performed during the jackpot game. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2 and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged on the arrow handle (arrow trunk) portion of the arrow of the direction display XF21. Further, in the direction suggestion display effect 1, the acquired ball output display XF4 is displayed. The acquired ball output display XF4 is a display representing the acquired ball output during the jackpot, and in the example of FIG. 130 (B), it is indicated as “acquired ball output: 1860”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (C), the direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of the direction suggestion display effect 1, and is performed in the jackpot game state. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the acquired ball output display XF4 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 moves the arrowhead portion of the direction display XF21. Is done.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the jackpot game is completed.

[Modification example]
In the special direction suggestion effects A to C, the display position of the direction suggestion display XF2 is fixed, but the display position is not limited to this, and the direction suggestion display XF2 may be moved while the belt item XF11 is moving. ..
Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may also be moved. Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may blink. Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 may be moved to a position where it overlaps with the direction display XF21. In this case, the belt item XF11 may be in front of the direction display XF21. Further, the belt item XF11 may be behind the direction display XF21. When the direction suggestion display XF2 moves to a position where another image (a character or the like (may be a ally character XF1)) is superimposed, the direction suggestion display XF2 is displayed in front of the other images. In other words, the other image moves behind the direction suggestion display XF2. In the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 which is a part of the ally character XF1 is included, but other parts (for example, a sword) of the ally character XF1 may be included, or the entire ally character XF1 may be included. , Other characters or parts of other images may be included.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned special direction suggestion effect B, a normal medium effect is performed in which the ally character XF1 is displayed in a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and then right-handed is suggested in a time-saving game state that is relatively advantageous to the player. The direction suggestion display XF2 including the direction display XF21 and the XF11 representing a part of the ally character XF1 is performed. According to this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a part of the ally character XF1 displayed in the normal gaming state which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 when hitting right , You can feel the mysterious atmosphere by recognizing the ally character XF1 that appeared in the normal game state despite the time saving, and you can enjoy the time saving more. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the special direction suggestion effect C, a time-saving and medium-time effect of displaying the ally character XF1 in a normal game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, is performed, and then, during the jackpot game, the direction display XF21 suggesting the launch direction of the game ball is performed. And the direction suggestion display XF2 including XF11 representing a part of the ally character XF1 are performed. According to this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a part of the ally character XF1 displayed in the normal gaming state which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 when hitting right , You can feel the mysterious atmosphere by recognizing the ally character XF1 that appeared in the normal game state even during the big hit game, and you can enjoy the big hit game more. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XF-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, the first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the first image.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a direction suggestion display.
The direction suggestion display includes a direction display suggesting the launch direction of the game ball and a second image showing a part of the first image.
After the first display effect, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-1.
The second display effect is performed in the second gaming state of the first gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and the second gaming state, which is relatively advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-2.
The first display effect is performed in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-1.
The second display effect is performed during the jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XF-2 to XF-4.
The first image is a character.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the effect sound effect effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In FIGS. 131 to 133, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. It is omitted from the above.

This effect sound effect effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by decorative symbols. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command and a preliminary determination command) and includes an instruction to execute an effect sound effect effect, the ROM 103. The corresponding image data is read from from and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image (referred to as "specific background image") used in the effect sound effect effect is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image, and is, for example, a specific image such as a moon surface image, a space image, or an image inside a spacecraft. It has become. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, and an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a moving image.

Here, the effect sound effect effect A will be described first, and then the effect sound effect effect B and the effect sound effect effect C will be described in order.

[Direction sound effect production A]
The effect sound effect effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the effect sound effect effect A. The effect sound effect effect A is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the third hold icon 9A is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there are only two stocked icons.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). The icon also includes a specific icon having various characters. Various characters appear in the white spherical icon and are used in the production sound effect production. In the production sound effect production, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, and a smiling sphere are used. Change to either the icon or the white spherical icon.

In FIG. 131 (A), when the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the figure is subsequently displayed during the variation effect (variation display). As shown in 131 (B), a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad (a look-ahead effect is displayed in connection with this entry. Although it was done, there was no change from the white spherical hold icon 9A to other icons, resulting in a white spherical hold icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound of "piyon" is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. That is, the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the holding icon 9A displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable effect (during the variable display) and the effect sound effect effect A is started by the look-ahead effect, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), the fourth A hold icon 9A (hereinafter, referred to as “specific hold icon 9A”) having a ally character CRA as a specific icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, a second winning sound called "Kurukuru", which is different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and then the second winning sound is followed by an ally. The first production sound "OARO", which is the name of the character CRA, flows from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound flows from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific holding icon 9A displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, the first effect sound subsequently flows from the speaker 67.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

After that, due to the hold digestion, the change effect (variation display) continues, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in FIGS. 131 (A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, the variable effect (variable display) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed with the number "2". , And the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". When the display is off, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second production sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, starts to flow from the speaker 67.

Then, when the variable effect (variable display) is started and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. 131 ( As shown in F), the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, and the name "OARO" of the ally character CRA flashes as the name image TIL. It is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with FH for only the first display period (for example, 1 second). When switching from the city image THG1 which is a normal background image to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the period in which the space image THG2 is displayed is short and the space image THG2 is half. The city image THG1 may be seen through behind the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flash FH, and the visibility is not impaired.

After the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a and are displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with this, as shown in FIG. 131 (G). The space image THG2, which is a specific background image, is gradually switched back to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a. Continue variable production (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". When the display is stopped and the display is off, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display). At this time, the second production sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, does not flow from the speaker 67. That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131 (I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRA The second production sound, which is a song, begins to flow from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second production sound is stopped immediately before the stop, it is not started again from the place where it has progressed until just before the stop, but returns to the beginning and is started again.

Then, when the variable effect (variable display) is started and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. 131 ( As shown in J), the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, and the name "OARO" of the ally character CRA is used as the name image TIL. A second display period (for example, 4 seconds), which is large and longer than the first display period, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash FH. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the space image THG2 Is displayed for a long period of time, so that the space image THG2 does not become translucent but becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 cannot be seen through behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIM and the flash FH, and the visibility is not impaired.

In the state where the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the third production sound "OARO" which is the name of the ally character CRA. Flows from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. This third effect sound is the same as the content transmitted by the first effect sound (“OARO”, which is the name of the ally character CRA), but the intonation is different. The first production sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third production sound is impressive in that it has excessive intonation. In addition, the volume of the third production sound is higher than the volume of the first production sound, and the content transmitted by the first production sound and the third production sound (“OARO”, which is the name of the ally character CRA) is Even if they are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound are transmitted to the player as different impressions.

After the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 131 (K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed. The space image THG2 is switched to the moon image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and the visibility is not impaired.

Then, in FIG. 131 (I), the lyrics image TG of the second production sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA) as a specific image related to the second production sound which is the theme song of the ally character CRA that started to flow from the speaker 67. ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as a part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA, the lyrics image TG is for the part "start from here on a certain day ..." (13 characters in plain pseudonym). , The lyrics image TG1 "One day" is first displayed at the first position (left side of the ally character CRA) on the display screen 7a, and then the lyrics image TG2 "Ni" is displayed according to the rhythm of the second production sound. It is displayed at the second position of the display screen 7a (upper left of the ally character CRA), then the lyrics image TG3 "from here" is displayed at the third position of the display screen 7a (to the right of the ally character CRA), and then next. The lyrics image TG4 "Start" is displayed at the 4th position of the display screen 7a (upper right of the ally character CRA).

After that, when the output of the second effect sound is completed, as shown in FIG. 131 (L), the moon image THG3, which is a specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is changed to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image again. Switching and fluctuation effect (variation display) are continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is fired toward the variable icon 9C in an arc, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C and has the ally character CRA from the variable icon 9C in the shape of a yellow (gold) star. It changes to 9C. As a result, the effect sound effect effect A ends.

The size of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon is the same as the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C in FIGS. 131 (A) to (G). After the effect sound effect effect A, various effects may be continued. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then. While the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is out of order.

[Direction sound effect production B]
Next, the effect sound effect effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the effect sound effect effect B. The effect sound effect effect B is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). The icon also includes a specific icon having various characters. Various characters appear in the white spherical icon and are used in the production sound effect production. In the production sound effect production, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, and a smiling sphere are used. Change to either the icon or the white spherical icon.

In FIG. 132 (A), when the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the figure is subsequently displayed during the variation effect (variation display). As shown in 132 (B), a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad (a look-ahead effect is displayed in connection with this entry. Although it was done, there was no change from the white spherical hold icon 9A to other icons, resulting in a white spherical hold icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound of "piyon" is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. That is, the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the holding icon 9A displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable effect (during the variable display) and the effect sound effect effect B is started by the look-ahead effect, as shown in FIG. 132 (C), the third A hold icon 9A (hereinafter, referred to as “specific hold icon 9A”) having a ally character CRB as a specific icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, a second winning sound called "Kurukuru", which is different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and then the second winning sound is followed by an ally. The first production sound "OARO-B", which is the name of the character CRB, flows from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound flows from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific holding icon 9A displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad, the first effect sound subsequently flows from the speaker 67.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

After that, due to the hold digestion, the change effect (variation display) continues, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in FIGS. 132 (A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, the variable effect (variable display) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 132 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed with the number "2". , And the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". When the display is off, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second production sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, starts to flow from the speaker 67.

Then, when the variable effect (variable display) is started and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start fluctuating at high speed, FIG. 132 ( As shown in F), the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, and the name "OARO-B" which is the name of the ally character CRB is the name image TIL. It is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash FH for only the first display period (for example, 1 second). When switching from the city image THG1 which is a normal background image to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the period in which the space image THG2 is displayed is short and the space image THG2 is half. The city image THG1 may be seen through behind the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flash FH, and the visibility is not impaired.

After the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a and are displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with this, as shown in FIG. 132 (G). The space image THG2, which is a specific background image, is gradually switched back to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a. Continue variable production (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". When the display is stopped and the display is off, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display). At this time, the second production sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, does not flow from the speaker 67. That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 132 (I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRB The second production sound, which is a song, begins to flow from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second production sound is stopped immediately before the stop, it is not started again from the place where it has progressed until just before the stop, but returns to the beginning and is started again.

Then, when the variable effect (variable display) is started and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, FIG. 132 ( As shown in J), the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, and the name "OARO-B" which is the name of the ally character CRB is the name image. Although it is accompanied by a flash FH as TIL, it is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a only for a second display period (for example, 4 seconds) which is large and longer than the first display period. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the space image THG2 Is displayed for a long period of time, so that the space image THG2 does not become translucent but becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 cannot be seen through behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIM and the flash FH, and the visibility is not impaired.

In the state where the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, a third name "OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB. The production sound flows from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. This third effect sound is the same as the content transmitted by the first effect sound (“OARO-B” which is the name of the ally character CRB), but the intonation is different. The first production sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third production sound is impressive in that it has excessive intonation. Further, the volume of the third effect sound is higher than the volume of the first effect sound, and the content transmitted by the first effect sound and the third effect sound (“OARO-B” which is the name of the ally character CRB”. ) Is the same, but the first effect sound and the third effect sound are transmitted to the player as different impressions.

After the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 132 (K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed. The space image THG2 is switched to the moon image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRB is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRB is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRB, and the visibility is not impaired.

Then, in FIG. 132 (I), the lyrics image TG of the second production sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRB) as a specific image related to the second production sound which is the theme song of the ally character CRB that started to flow from the speaker 67. ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as a part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRB, the lyrics image TG is the second for the part (12 characters in plain pseudonym) that says "I still have a hot passion ...". According to the rhythm of the production sound, the lyrics image TG1 "hot" is first displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a (upper left of the ally character CRB), and then the lyrics image TG2 "passion" is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the second position (lower right of the ally character CRB), then the lyrics image TG3 "o" is displayed in the third position of the display screen 7a (right side of the ally character CRB), and then "still". The lyrics image TG4 is displayed at the 4th position of the display screen 7a (upper right of the ally character CRB).

After that, when the output of the second effect sound is completed, as shown in FIG. 132 (L), the moon image THG3, which is a specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is changed to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image again. Switching and fluctuation effect (variation display) are continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is released toward the variable icon 9C in an arc, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C and from the variable icon 9C having the ally character CRB to the variable icon 9C of a smiling sphere having a blue color. Change. As a result, the effect sound effect effect B ends.

The size of the icon of the smiling sphere having blue is the same as the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C in FIGS. 132 (A) to 132 (G). After the effect sound effect effect B, various effects may be continued. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then. While the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is out of order.

[Direction sound effect production C]
Next, the effect sound effect effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the effect sound effect effect C. The effect sound effect effect C is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, respectively, and the third hold icon 9A is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there are only two stocked icons.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). The icon also includes a specific icon having various characters. Various characters appear in the white spherical icon and are used in the production sound effect production. In the production sound effect production, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, and a smiling sphere are used. Change to either the icon or the white spherical icon.

In FIG. 133 (A), when the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the figure is subsequently displayed during the variation effect (during the variation display). As shown in 133 (B), a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad (a look-ahead effect is displayed in connection with this entry. Although it was done, there was no change from the white spherical hold icon 9A to other icons, resulting in a white spherical hold icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound of "piyon" is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. That is, the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the holding icon 9A displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable effect (during the variable display) and the effect sound effect effect C is started by the look-ahead effect, as shown in FIG. 133 (C), the fourth A hold icon 9A (hereinafter, referred to as “specific hold icon 9A”) having a ally character CRA as a specific icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, a second winning sound called "Kurukuru", which is different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and then the second winning sound is followed by an ally. The first production sound "OARO", which is the name of the character CRA, flows from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound flows from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific holding icon 9A displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, the first effect sound subsequently flows from the speaker 67.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

After that, due to the hold digestion, the change effect (variation display) continues, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in FIGS. 133 (A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, the variable effect (variable display) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 133 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed with the number "2". , And the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3". When the display is off, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the second hold icon 9C is accompanied by this. The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second production sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, starts to flow from the speaker 67.

Then, when the variable effect (variable display) is started and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start fluctuating at high speed, FIG. 133 ( As shown in F), the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, and the name "OARO" of the ally character CRA flashes as the name image TIL. It is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with FH for only the first display period (for example, 1 second). When switching from the city image THG1 which is a normal background image to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the period in which the space image THG2 is displayed is short and the space image THG2 is half. The city image THG1 may be seen through behind the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flash FH, and the visibility is not impaired.

After the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a and are displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with this, as shown in FIG. 133 (G). The space image THG2, which is a specific background image, is gradually switched back to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a. Continue variable production (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". When the display is stopped and the display is off, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the variation effect (variation display). At this time, the second production sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, does not flow from the speaker 67. That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133 (I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRA The second production sound, which is a song, begins to flow from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second production sound is stopped immediately before the stop, it is not started again from the place where it has progressed until just before the stop, but returns to the beginning and is started again.

Then, when the variable effect (variable display) is started and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start fluctuating at high speed, FIG. 133 ( As shown in J), the city image THG1 which is a normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, and the name "OARO" of the ally character CRA is used as the name image TIL. A second display period (for example, 4 seconds), which is large and longer than the first display period, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash FH. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as a specific background image, the space image THG2 Is displayed for a long period of time, so that the space image THG2 does not become translucent but becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 cannot be seen through behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIM and the flash FH, and the visibility is not impaired.

In the state where the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the third production sound "OARO" which is the name of the ally character CRA. Flows from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. This third effect sound is the same as the content transmitted by the first effect sound (“OARO”, which is the name of the ally character CRA), but the intonation is different. The first production sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third production sound is impressive in that it has excessive intonation. In addition, the volume of the third production sound is higher than the volume of the first production sound, and the content transmitted by the first production sound and the third production sound (“OARO”, which is the name of the ally character CRA) is Even if they are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound are transmitted to the player as different impressions.

After the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 133 (K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed. The space image THG2 is switched to the moon image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and the visibility is not impaired.

Then, as a specific image related to the second production sound which is the theme song of the ally character CRA that started to flow from the speaker 67 in FIG. 133 (I), the lyrics image TG of the second production sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA). ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, here, as part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA, instead of the part "Start here one day ..." (13 characters in plain pseudonym), "Soon. The lyrics image TG is replaced with the part "Hit is coming ..." (13 characters in plain pseudonym), and the lyrics image TG first displays the lyrics image TG1 "Soon" in accordance with the rhythm of the second production sound. Display on (left side of ally character CRA), then display the lyrics image TG2 "hit" at the second position of the display screen 7a (upper left side of the ally character CRA), and then display the lyrics image TG3 "ga". Is displayed at the third position of the display screen 7a (to the right of the ally character CRA), and then the lyrics image TG4 "come" is displayed at the fourth position of the display screen 7a (upper right of the ally character CRA). Even if the content of the lyrics is partially replaced, the hiragana has the same number of characters (13 characters), so it can be displayed according to the rhythm, and it is difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, it is possible to suggest the occurrence of a big hit to the player by this replaced content.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound is completed, as shown in FIG. 133 (L), the moon image THG3, which is a specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is changed to the city image THG1 which is a normal background image again. Switching, fluctuation effect (variation display) is continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is released toward the variable icon 9C in an arc, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C and the variable icon 9C having the ally character CRA to the smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow). Change to icon 9C. As a result, the effect sound effect effect C ends.

The size of the icon of the smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow) is about twice the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C in FIGS. 133 (A) to 133 (G). When the variable icon 9C of a smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow) is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, the jackpot is rich, and various effects may be further continued after the effect sound effect effect C. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it becomes a big hit and then the big hit game (big hit effect) is started.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect sound effect effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, the first start port into which the game ball can enter. The first starting port 20 (ball entry port) is provided with 20 (ball entry port), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker 67 capable of outputting a plurality of types of production sounds. Of the hold icons 9A displayed in connection with the entry of the game ball into the mouth), the first effect sound corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A (in the effect sound effects A and C, the name of the ally character CRA and the effect sound effect). The first effect (FIG. 131 (C) in the effect sound effect effect A, FIG. 132 (C) in the effect sound effect effect B, and FIG. 133 in the effect sound effect effect C) capable of outputting the ally character CRB in the effect B. (C)) and after the first effect, the specific hold icon 9A is displayed as the variable icon 9C, and the second effect sound (in the effect sound effect effects A and C, the theme song and effect sound effect of the ally character CRA). In the production B, the second production (FIGS. 131 (I) to (K) in the production sound effect production A and FIGS. 132 (I) to (K) in the production sound effect production B) capable of outputting the theme song of the ally character CRB). In the effect sound effect effect C, FIGS. 133 (I) to (K)) can be executed. According to this configuration, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (entrance) and the specific hold icon increases as the hold icon, the first effect sound is played from the speaker, and the specific hold icon is the variable icon. Then, since the second effect sound flows from the speaker, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect by the first effect sound and the second effect sound. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, before the second effect in the effect sound effect effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C in FIG. 133, the second effect sound 3rd effect (FIG. 131 (E) for effect sound effect effect A, FIG. 131 (E) for effect sound effect effect B, FIG. 132 (E), FIG. 133 (E) can be executed in the effect sound effect effect C. According to this configuration, the second effect sound that is played when the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon is played as a notice before the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon, so that the player can play the effect that will be developed from now on. The expectation of hitting is increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the effect sound effect effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C in FIG. 133, the output of the second effect sound is output. Further, it is possible to output a third effect sound (the name of the ally character CRA in the effect sound effect effects A and C, and the name of the ally character CRB in the effect sound effect effect B). According to this configuration, when the second effect sound is flowing, the third effect sound overlaps and flows, so that each effect is compared with the case where the second effect sound and the third effect sound flow independently. It is possible to provide the player with an impactful production sound that combines the impressions of the sound, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the second effect of the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, the second effect sound is further added. It is possible to display the lyrics image TG (specific image) related to. According to this configuration, when the second effect sound is played, a specific image related to the second effect sound is displayed, so that the player imagines the specific image displayed by imagining the progress of the second effect sound. It is possible to imagine the progress of a specific image and imagine a second effect sound that flows, and it is possible to provide the player with an attractive effect that mutually enhances the second effect sound and the specific image. ..

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the effect sound effect effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C in FIG. 133, the rhythm of the second effect sound. The lyrics image TG (specific image) can be displayed according to the above. According to this configuration, the relationship between the second production sound and the lyrics image TG (specific image) can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the lyrics image TG (specific image) in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 is single or It is composed of multiple character images. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation in the expression method of the lyrics image TG (specific image), and it is also possible to individually emphasize the character image of the lyrics image TG (specific image) that the player wants to pay attention to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the second effect in the effect sound effect effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C in FIG. 133, the variable icon 9C is displayed. The fourth effect to be changed (FIG. 131 (L) in the effect sound effect effect A, FIG. 132 (L) in the effect sound effect effect B, and FIG. 133 (L) in the effect sound effect effect C) can be executed. It has become. According to this configuration, the change of the variable icon may occur after the end of the second effect sound, so that the expectation for the change of the variable icon can be maintained when the second effect sound is flowing. ..

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect sound effect effect.
[Modification 1]
The effect sound effect effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C in FIG. 133 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, the lyrics image TG was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the lyrics image TG, the image may be related to the second production sound (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the production sound effect productions A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the production sound effect production B). For example, a movie, a video broadcast on a television, a scene of these, and the like, in which a second production sound is played, can be mentioned.

[Modification 3]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIGS. 131 (I) to (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIGS. 132 (I) to (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIGS. 133 (I) to (K), the first 2 The effect sound (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the effect sound effect effects A and C, the theme song of the ally character CRB in the effect sound effect effect B) flows from the speaker 67 until the end, and then the change of the variable icon 9C occurs. Was there. However, if the second effect sound ends in the middle, the change of the variable icon 9C may not occur. In this case, the white spherical variable icon 9C has the lowest expectation of hitting.

[Modification 3]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131 (C), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132 (C), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 (C), the first start port is displayed during the variable effect (during the variable display). The game ball enters 20 and the specific hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a by the look-ahead effect. At this time, the first effect sound (in the effect sound effect effects A and C, the name of the ally character CRA and the effect sound effect effect). In B, the name of the ally character CRB) was flowing from the speaker 67. However, the specific hold icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a so that the first effect sound does not flow from the speaker 67. In this case, the second winning sound called "curcul", which is different from the first winning sound, may or may not flow from the speaker 67.

[Modification 4]
The lyrics image TG (specific image) in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131 (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132 (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 (K) is single or plural. It was composed of a character image and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lyrics image TG (specific image) may be rotated, and the size may be increased or decreased. By doing so, the variation can be increased by the expression method of the lyrics image TG (specific image), and the character image of the lyrics image TG (specific image) that the player wants to pay attention to can be individually emphasized.

[Modification 5]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131 (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132 (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 (K), the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variation. The icon 9C was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variation icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, when the hold icon 9A exists, it may of course disappear from the display screen 7a. This does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a because the variable icon 9C is used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) for the variable effect (during the variable display). Because. Further, since the variable display position 9Cd also indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hold display position 9Ad is also the hold icon. This is because it indicates the position (display position) where 9A is displayed, so that it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a in order to indicate the number of hold balls that have not been used for the game yet, but as described above, the game ball to the first starting port 20. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the ball and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers not shown. The hold icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a because it is displayed. As a result, in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131 (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132 (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 (K), the display is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the second effect sound. It can contribute to attracting attention to the lyrics image TG to be performed.

[Modification 6]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131 (L), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132 (L), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 (L), the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variation. The icon 9C was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, when the hold icon 9A exists, it may of course disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A, only the variation icon 9C may be displayed on the display screen 7a. This can contribute to the fact that when a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C and pays attention to the change of the variable icon 9C. Since the variable display position 9Cd indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the reserved display position 9Ad is also reserved. Since the icon 9A indicates the display position (display position), it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are deleted from the display screen 7a. be able to. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a in order to indicate the number of hold balls that have not been used for the game yet, but as described above, the game ball to the first starting port 20. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the ball and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers not shown. The hold icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a because it is displayed.

[Modification 7]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIGS. 131 (I) to (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIGS. 132 (I) to (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIGS. 133 (I) to (K), the first Two production sounds (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the production sound effect productions A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the production sound effect production B) were played from the speaker 67. However, the second effect sound may not be emitted from the speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIGS. 131 (I) to (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIGS. 132 (I) to (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIGS. 133 (I) to (K), the first During the output of the 2 production sounds (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the production sound effect productions A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the production sound effect production B), the third production sound (production sound effect production A, In C, the name of the ally character CRA, and in the effect sound effect effect B, the name of the ally character CRB) was played from the speaker 67. However, the third effect sound may not be emitted from the speaker 67.

[Modification 9]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131 (L), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132 (L), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 (L), the variable icon 9C was changed. However, the variable icon 9C may not be changed. In this case, the white spherical variable icon 9C has the lowest expectation of hitting.

[Modification 10]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131 (L), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132 (L), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 (L), the game ball enters the first starting port 20. The first special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). Was there. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is intuitively easy to understand. Further, since the other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and displayed behind the frontmost image of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, when the effect sound effect effect is started, the specific hold icon 9A having the ally character CRA as the specific icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. As a result, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the number (the number of holding balls) displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a as a countdown until the specific holding icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, the sub display screen 64U) is used. The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number displayed with the number of reserved balls described above as a numerical value. By doing so, there is no possibility that the number displayed as the number of reserved balls is misunderstood by the player as a countdown until the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, and the number of reserved balls is further reduced. The numerical value displayed as a numerical value can be made difficult to discriminate by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be intuitively understood.

[Modification 11]
The effect sound effect effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C in FIG. 133 do not have to include a part of the described effects, and other effects are added. You may.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D4-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with an entrance where a gaming ball can enter, a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker capable of outputting a plurality of types of production sounds.
Among the hold icons displayed in connection with the entry of the game ball into the entrance, the first effect capable of outputting the first effect sound corresponding to the specific hold icon and the first effect.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the specific hold icon is displayed as the variable icon and the second effect sound can be output.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1.
Prior to the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect of outputting the second effect sound and stopping the output of the second effect sound until the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D4-1 or aspect D4-2.
In the second effect, the third effect sound can be further output during the output of the second effect sound.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3.
In the second effect, a specific image related to the second effect sound can be further displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-4.
In the second effect, the specific image can be displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the second effect sound.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-5.
The specific image is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6.
After the second effect, a fourth effect that changes the variable icon can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The lyrics image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. This lyric image effect can be performed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the lyrics image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Lyrics image production A]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the lyrics image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three holding images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three holding images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 134 (D), (E), and (F), the lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect of displaying a lyrics image on the display screen 7a according to the music played during the battle effect. As the music progresses, multiple lyrics images will be displayed in sequence. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are sequentially displayed in a plurality of lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), the lyrics display effect (first term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first half year), the lyrics image KG1 "romantically" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Since the battle effect is also continued, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies to the following).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), the lyrics display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (mid-term), the lyrics image KG2 "raw" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the lyrics image KG2 "raw" is a one-character lyrics image, which is larger than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG1 of the lyrics display production (first half year). Further, the lyrics image KG2 "raw" is displayed in a rotated state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (late stage), the lyrics image KG3 "Let's try" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters constituting the lyrics image KG3 "Let's try" are smaller than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG2 of the lyrics display effect (mid-term).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG "victory" is displayed. When the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4". In the case of loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at "5".

[Lyrics image production B]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the lyrics image effect B. The lyrics image production B is another example of the lyrics image production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three holding images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three holding images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 135 (D), (E), and (F), the lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect of displaying a lyrics image on the display screen 7a according to the music played during the battle effect. As the music progresses, multiple lyrics images will be displayed in sequence. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are sequentially displayed in a plurality of lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), the lyrics display effect (first term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first half year), the lyrics image KG1 "Roman" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters "ro" and "ma" constituting the lyrics image KG1 are transparent except for the outline, and the ally character CRA as a background image can be visually recognized. Since the battle effect is also continued, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies to the following).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), the lyrics display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (mid-term), the lyrics image KG2 "tickly" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, the lyrics image KG3 "raw" is displayed. Here, in particular, the characters constituting the lyrics image KG2 "tick ni" are smaller than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG1 in the lyrics display effect (previous term), and the lyrics image KG2 is displayed by the arrow Y1. Move to the left side of the display screen 7a as shown by. In addition, the lyrics image KG3 "raw" is a one-character lyrics image, which is larger than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG1 of the lyrics display production (previous term), and the lyrics image KG3 "raw" is. After the display, it rotates counterclockwise as indicated by the arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (late stage), the lyrics image KG4 "Let's try" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters constituting the lyrics image KG4, "Let's try", are larger than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG2 in the lyrics display effect (mid-term), and smaller than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG3. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG "victory" is displayed. When the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4". In the case of loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at "5".

[Lyrics image production C]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the lyrics image effect C. The lyrics image production C is another example of the lyrics image productions A and B.
First, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three holding images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "4". At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three holding images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure holding are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle production, the ally character CRA wins and wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 136 (D), (E), and (F), the lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect of displaying a lyrics image on the display screen 7a according to the music played during the battle effect. As the music progresses, multiple lyrics images will be displayed in sequence. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are sequentially displayed in a plurality of lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the lyrics display effect (first term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first half year), the lyrics image KG1 "romantically" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Since the battle effect is also continued, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies to the following).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the lyrics display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (mid-term), the lyrics image KG2 "Let's live" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (late stage), the lyrics image KG3 "Let's live" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the lyrics image KG2 "Let's live" displayed in the lyrics display effect (mid-term) is gradually enlarged and displayed to become the lyrics image KG3. That is, the lyrics image KG3 is enlarged after being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG "victory" is displayed. When the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (hit), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are fixedly stopped at "4". In the case of loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the lyrics image production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when displaying the lyrics "Let's live romantically" as a plurality of lyrics images, it is possible to display the lyrics images that are sequentially displayed in various modes (Fig.). 134 (D) (E) (F), FIGS. 135 (D) (E) (F), FIGS. 136 (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the output music can be enjoyed more and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyrics image "raw" in a rotated state (FIG. 134 (E)). According to this configuration, the display of the lyrics image is changed, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the lyrics image can be displayed in various sizes (FIGS. 134 (D) (E) (F), FIGS. 135 (D) (E) (F)). ). According to this configuration, the display of the lyrics image is changed, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display a lyrics image composed of one character (FIGS. 134 (E) and 135 (E)). According to this configuration, the display of the lyrics image can be made to have an impact, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyrics image in a transparent or semi-transparent manner so that the background image can be visually recognized (FIG. 135 (D)). According to this configuration, the background image can be enjoyed together with the lyrics image, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, it is possible to change the aspect of the lyrics image (FIGS. 135 (E), 136 (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the lyrics image after display is changed, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, the lyrics image can be moved (FIG. 135 (E)). According to this configuration, the display of the lyrics image can be made to have an impact, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, the lyrics image can be rotated (FIG. 135 (E)). According to this configuration, the display of the lyrics image can be made to have an impact, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, the size of the lyrics image can be changed (FIGS. 136 (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the display of the lyrics image can be made to have an impact, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the lyrics image production.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the display color of the lyrics image may be changed after the lyrics image is displayed. For example, it is conceivable to change the display color of the lyrics image according to the output of the music.

[Modification 2]
In the above, an example of rotating the displayed lyrics image about the front-back direction is given (FIG. 135 (E)), but for example, a three-dimensional lyrics image is prepared and rotated about the vertical direction or the left-right direction. You may.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the effect of the second special figure hold is given as an example, but the effect of the first special figure hold may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D5-1]
It is a gaming machine that displays the lyrics of the song as multiple lyrics images according to the output of the song.
In order to sequentially display the plurality of lyrics images, it is possible to execute an aspect display effect of displaying the sequentially displayed lyrics images in various modes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1.
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image in a rotated state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-1 or aspect D5-2.
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image in various sizes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-3.
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image composed of one character.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-4.
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image in a transparent or semi-transparent manner so that the background image can be visually recognized.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-6]
It is a gaming machine that displays the lyrics of the song as multiple lyrics images according to the output of the song.
In displaying the plurality of lyrics images in sequence, it is possible to execute a mode change effect that changes the mode of the lyrics image after displaying the lyrics images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-5.
In displaying the plurality of lyrics images in sequence, it is possible to execute a mode change effect that changes the mode of the lyrics image after displaying the lyrics images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-8]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-6 or aspect D5-7.
The aspect change effect includes an effect of moving the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-8.
The aspect change effect includes an effect of rotating the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-9.
The aspect change effect includes an effect of changing the size of the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-11]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-10.
The aspect change effect includes an effect of changing the display color of the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the specific region variable effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. In FIGS. 137 to 139, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to read in the drawing. Some are omitted from the above.

This specific area variable effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a specific area variable effect, the corresponding image is taken from the ROM 103. The data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position and light emission mode of 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the specific area variable effect A will be described, and then the specific area variable effect B and the specific area variable effect C will be described in order.

[Specific area variable production A]
The specific area variable effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect A. The specific area variable effect A is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. In each variation region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 137 (A), a flash FH is subsequently emitted from the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 137 (B). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A also disappear. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8L, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be in the displayed state. The flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash FH and visibility is not impaired.

After that, when the flash FH gradually disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are the image display devices 7, respectively. Advance (move) from the home position toward the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a. The left side decoration part, which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the right side decoration part, which is half the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The portions are combined to form one decorative member (combined accessory) in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”). The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region. At this time, the variable icon 9C is maintained in the state displayed on the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory The 14R moves backward (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, suddenly, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a large size while approaching from the rear to the front of the display screen 7a in a state where the number "1" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 137 (D). Temporary stop display is performed and reach is formed at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in each fluctuation region. At this time, the variable icon 9C is maintained in the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is maintained in the state of disappearing from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed starts to move below its own fluctuation region, the number "2" is displayed from behind the left decorative symbol 8L. The left decorative symbol 8L of "" appears, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" starts to move above its own variable region. On the other hand, when the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed starts to move above its own fluctuation area, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" appears from behind the right decorative symbol 8R, and the number is displayed. The right decorative digit 8R of "2" starts to move below its own fluctuation region.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" is completely moved to the lower part of its own fluctuation area, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the number "2" is displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L has been moved to the upper part of its own fluctuation area and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a, the normal size in which each appears independently (hereinafter, "normal size"). It is smaller (for example, about one size smaller) than that. On the other hand, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" has been moved to the upper right of its own variable region and is temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" is the own variable region. When the movement to the bottom is completed and the temporary stop is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, the size is compared with the normal size as in the case of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2". It is small (for example, about one size smaller). As a result, the first reach is formed on the upward-sloping line by the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right. , The second reach is formed on the downward-sloping line by the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped in the upper left and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped in the lower right, and double. Become reach.

In FIG. 137 (F), a double reach is formed by the two left decorative symbols 8L and the two right decorative symbols 8R, and if the two left decorative symbols 8L and the two right decorative symbols 8R are the vertex images, respectively, there are four. A first specific region in the shape of a quadrangle connecting the vertex images is formed. In other words, a first specific region surrounded by the four vertex images is formed. When the first specific area is formed, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed again from the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) is performed in the first specific area. Since the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, it will be visually recognized as an unclear image in the first specific area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc. When the movement is started, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" appears from behind the left decorative symbol 8L, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" stays in place and is temporarily stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right part jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, the right decorative symbol 8R The right decorative symbol 8R with the number "3" appears from behind, and the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "3" stays in place and is temporarily stopped.

In FIG. 137 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left is switched to the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3", and the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right. Since the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" was switched to the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3", the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left and the number "1" temporarily stopped displayed in the lower left. The left decorative symbol 8L of ", the right decorative symbol 8R of the number" 3 "temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number" 1 "temporarily displayed in the upper right are the apex image. Then, a square-shaped second specific region connecting the four vertex images is formed. In other words, a first specific region surrounded by the four vertex images is formed. The second specific area has the same size as the first specific area.

The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" displayed as a temporary stop in the upper left jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, and starts moving, and the temporary stop is displayed in the lower right. Since the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, the left decorative symbol of the number "2" that has started to move has started. When the second specific area includes 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" that has started to move, the size of the second specific area is compared with the size of the first specific area. Will grow.

Since the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is performed in the first specific area, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued even in the second specific area. .. Since the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, it will be visually recognized as an unclear image even within the second specific area. In the second specific area, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued, but instead of this, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be erased from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" jumps out of its own fluctuation area, completes moving to the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, and is provisionally moved toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a. In the stopped display state, the left decorative symbol 8L with the number "3" temporarily stopped in the upper left, the left decorative symbol 8L with the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center of the left side, and the temporary stop displayed in the lower left. The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" is smaller than the normal size (for example, about the size of the lid). In other words, it's smaller than it was when it was double reach. On the other hand, when the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" jumps out of its own fluctuation area, moves to the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, it is displayed in the lower right. The right decorative symbol 8R with the number "3" temporarily stopped, the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center of the right side, and the right decorative symbol with the number "1" temporarily stopped at the upper right. 8R is smaller than the normal size (for example, about the size of the lid). In other words, it's smaller than it was when it was double reach. As a result, the first reach is formed on the upward-sloping line by the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right. , The second reach is formed on the downward-sloping line by the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped in the upper left and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped in the lower right, and the left side. A third reach is formed on the horizontal line by the left decorative symbol 8L with the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center and the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center of the right side, and triple reach. It becomes.

In FIG. 137 (H), a triple reach is formed by the three left decorative symbols 8L and the three right decorative symbols 8R, and if the three left decorative symbols 8L and the three right decorative symbols 8R are used as vertex images, there are six. A third specific region of hexagonal shape connecting the vertex images is formed. In other words, a third specific region surrounded by the six vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of the first specific area (second specific area) and the third specific area, in FIG. 137 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed forms an arc. As if drawing, it jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a and starts moving, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" appears from behind this left decorative symbol 8L, and the left of the number "3". The decorative symbol 8L stays in place and is temporarily stopped, while the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" that is temporarily stopped is displayed so as to draw an arc toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R with the number "3" appears from behind the right decorative symbol 8R, and the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "3" stays in place and is displayed as a temporary stop. The size of the specific area 3 is larger than the size of the first specific area (second specific area). The third specific region has a hexagonal shape when the six vertex images are connected, but actually has a substantially circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape) passing through the six vertex images.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" is approaching while increasing from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a in the third specific area. Appears as a clear image and is displayed as a temporary stop. The size of the clear image displayed as a temporary stop is larger than the normal size (for example, the size of the lid is larger than the normal size). Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "2" is approaching while increasing from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a in the third specific area. Appears as a clear image and is displayed as a temporary stop. The size of the clear image displayed as a temporary stop is larger than the normal size (for example, the size of the lid is larger than the normal size). Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (K), the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is approaching while increasing from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a in the third specific area. Appears as a clear image and is displayed as a temporary stop. The size of the clear image displayed as a temporary stop is larger than the normal size (for example, the size of the lid is larger than the normal size).

When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a, it is removed and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific area variable effect A ends. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is used, a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Following FIG. 137 (K), as shown in FIG. 137 (L), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are each on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Advance (move) again from the home position toward the (forward) center advance position (in a direction close to each other), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the left movable role. The left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the object 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are By combining, one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. At this time, the three left decorative symbols 8L, the three right decorative symbols 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C disappear from the display screen 7a, while the variable icon 9C is maintained in the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a. ing.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, an image display corresponding to the circular region formed in the annular shape is formed. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. With the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, it is possible to inform the player that it is a big hit.

When a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory The 14R moves backward (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific area variable effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are larger than the normal size (for example, the size of the lid is larger than the normal size). ) It becomes a size and is arranged at the center position of each fluctuation area, and the number "3" is lined up on the horizontal line and temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "3", and when it is stopped and displayed, it is removed and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is used, a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Following FIG. 137 (M), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "3", a big hit occurs and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. .. When the big hit game (big hit effect) is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed on the first hold display position 9Ad. Moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

In addition, in FIG. 137 (H), a quadruple reach may be formed after the triple reach is formed. In this case, when the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left corner jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, this left The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" appears from the back of the decorative symbol 8L, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stays in place and is displayed as a temporary stop, and the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side. "Starts moving toward the bottom center of the left side. On the other hand, when the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right part jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, this right decoration The right decorative symbol 8R with the number "4" appears from the back of the symbol 8R, the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "4" stays in place and is displayed as a temporary stop, and the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side. Starts moving toward the upper center of the right side.

When the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" jumps out of its own fluctuation area and moves to the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The movement to the lower center of the left side of is completed and a temporary stop is displayed. In this state, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" temporarily stopped in the upper left, the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped in the upper center of the left side, and the temporary stop displayed in the lower center of the left side. The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower left are smaller than the normal size (for example, about half the size of the lid). There are. In other words, it's smaller than it was when it came to triple reach. On the other hand, when the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" jumps out of its own fluctuation area, moves to the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and is temporarily stopped, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" is displayed. The movement to the upper center of the right side of the screen 7a is completed and a temporary stop is displayed. In this state, the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "4" temporarily stopped at the lower right, the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "3" temporarily stopped at the bottom center of the right side, and the temporary stop displayed at the top center of the right side. The right decorative symbol 8R with the number "2" and the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "1" temporarily stopped at the upper right are smaller (for example, about half the size of the lid) than the normal size. There is. In other words, it's smaller than it was when it came to triple reach. As a result, the first reach is on the first right-up line by the left decorative symbol 8L with the number "1" temporarily stopped in the lower left and the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "1" temporarily stopped in the upper right. The second reach is on the first right-down line by the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" that is formed and temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right. On the second rising line by the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" formed and temporarily stopped near the center of the left side and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side. The second reach is formed by the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed toward the upper center of the left side and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed toward the lower center of the right side. A fourth reach is formed on the downward-sloping line, which becomes a quadruple reach.

In this way, a quadruple reach is formed by the four left decorative symbols 8L and the four right decorative symbols 8R, and if the four left decorative symbols 8L and the four right decorative symbols 8R are used as vertex images, eight vertex images are obtained. When the above are connected, a fourth specific region having an octagonal shape is formed. In other words, a fourth specific region surrounded by the eight vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of this fourth specific area and the third specific area formed by the triple reach described above, the display screen so that the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed draws an arc. It jumped out of its own fluctuation area toward the upper center of the left side of 7a and started moving, and the left decorative symbol 8L with the number "4" appeared from behind this left decorative symbol 8L, and was temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side. The number "2" starts moving toward the lower center of the left side, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped, while the right decorative symbol of the number "3" temporarily stopped is displayed. As 8R draws an arc, it jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a and starts moving, and the right decorative symbol 8R with the number "3" appears from behind this right decorative symbol 8R. The number "2" displayed as a temporary stop near the center of the right side starts moving toward the upper center of the right side, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" stays in place and is displayed as a temporary stop. The size is larger than the size of the third specific area. That is, the size is in the order of the first specific region (second specific region) formed by double reach, the third specific region formed by triple reach, and the fourth specific region formed by quadruple reach. Is getting bigger.

Expectations for winning are higher in the order of double reach, triple reach, and quadruple reach. In other words, the double reach has 4 vertex images, the triple reach has 6 vertex images, and the quadruple reach has 8 vertex images. Therefore, as the number of vertex images increases, the expectation of winning increases.

In addition, also in the fourth specific region formed by the quadruple reach, the variation effect (variation display) by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C shown in FIGS. 137 (I) to 137 (K) is performed, and is shown in FIG. 137 (L). The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are used for the production.

[Specific area variable production B]
Next, the specific area variable effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect B. The specific area variable effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. In each variation region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 138 (A), as shown in FIG. Three effect image EGs having a shape (hereinafter referred to as "round effect image EG") appear, are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, in the three round effect image EGs, the positions where the three round effect image EGs are arranged are maintained as they are, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2) are counterclockwise toward the positions of the adjacent round effect image EGs. The movement is started only once to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. When the effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is displayed as a temporary stop, the three round effect image EGs emit light only once at the same time. As a result, the first specific region having a triangular shape is formed by the three straight line RGs connecting the apex images of the three round effect images EG.

Immediately before the three round effect images EG emit light all at once in the first specific region, the ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). The straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of a clear image (focused image (out-of-focus image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the first specific region is easy to understand. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the first from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on a specific area of.

After that, when the three round effect image EGs disappear from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the three straight line RGs, which are unclear images, gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), an effect image EG having a triangular shape (hereinafter, referred to as “triangular effect image EG”) has a triangular shape in a display mode in which it penetrates into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Four appear, are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the triangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the round effect image EG, which can contribute to raising the expectation of the player to hit.

Then, the positions where the four triangular effect image EGs are arranged are maintained as they are in the four triangular effect image EGs, and this time, clockwise toward the position of the adjacent triangular effect image EG, a predetermined number of times (for example, for example). The movement is started only 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the four triangular production image EGs are used as the vertex images, and a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images is formed, and the four triangles are formed. When the type effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is displayed as a temporary stop, the four triangular effect image EGs emit light only once at the same time. As a result, a second specific region having a quadrangular shape is formed by the four straight line RGs connecting the apex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific region is larger than the size of the first specific region formed in FIG. 138 (C). In this respect as well, it can contribute to raising the expectation of the player to win.

Immediately before the four triangular effect images EG emit light all at once in the second specific area, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of a clear image (focused image (out-of-focus image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the second specific region is easy to understand. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the second from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on a specific area of. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green, which is different from the blue color in FIG. 138 (C), can also contribute to raising the expectation of the player to hit.

After that, when the four triangular effect image EGs disappear from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the four straight line RGs, which are unclear images, gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), an effect image EG having a quadrangular shape (hereinafter referred to as “square effect image EG”) in a display mode in which the image penetrates into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Five appear, are arranged in the center of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the square-shaped effect image EG is larger than the size of the triangular-shaped effect image EG, which can contribute to further increasing the expectation of the player to hit.

Then, the positions where the five square effect image EGs are arranged are maintained as they are in the five square effect image EGs, and this time, counterclockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, toward the positions of the adjacent square effect image EGs). The movement is started only (2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 138 (G), five square-shaped effect image EGs are used as vertex images, and a straight line RG connecting the five vertex images is formed. When the square effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the five square effect image EGs emit light all at once. As a result, a third specific region having a pentagonal shape is formed by the five straight line RGs connecting the vertex images of the five square effect images EG. The size of the third specific region is larger than the size of the second specific region formed in FIG. 138 (E). In this respect as well, it can contribute to raising the expectation of the player to win.

In this embodiment, FIGS. 138 (B) and (C) have three vertex images, FIGS. 138 (D) and (E) have four vertex images, and FIGS. 138 (F) and (G) have five vertex images. As the number of vertex images increases, the size of the first specific region to the third specific region increases.

Immediately before the five square effect images EG emit light all at once in the third specific area, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a red color, and in the case of a clear image (focused image (out-of-focus image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the third specific region is easy to understand. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the third from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on a specific area of. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, which is different from the green color in FIG. 138 (E), can also contribute to raising the expectation of the player to hit.

After that, when the five square effect image EGs disappear from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the five straight line RGs, which are unclear images, gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the third specific area disappears. As a result, the specific area variable effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "6", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "5". The stop display is displayed, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific area variable production C]
Next, the specific area variable effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect C. The specific area variable effect C is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. In each variation region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 139 (A), as shown in FIG. Three effect image EGs having a shape (hereinafter referred to as "round effect image EG") appear, are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, in the three round effect image EGs, the positions where the three round effect image EGs are arranged are maintained as they are, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2) are counterclockwise toward the positions of the adjacent round effect image EGs. The movement is started only once to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 139 (C), the three round-shaped effect images EG are used as the vertex images, and a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images is formed, and the three round shapes are formed. When the effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is displayed as a temporary stop, the three round effect image EGs emit light only once at the same time. As a result, the first specific region having a triangular shape is formed by the three straight line RGs connecting the apex images of the three round effect images EG.

Immediately before the three round effect images EG emit light all at once in the first specific region, the ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). The straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of a clear image (focused image (out-of-focus image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the first specific region is easy to understand. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the first from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on a specific area of.

After that, when the three round effect image EGs disappear from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the three straight line RGs, which are unclear images, gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), an effect image EG having a triangular shape (hereinafter, referred to as “triangular effect image EG”) has a triangular shape in a display mode in which it penetrates into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Four appear, are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the triangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the round effect image EG, which can contribute to raising the expectation of the player to hit.

Then, the positions where the four triangular effect image EGs are arranged are maintained as they are in the four triangular effect image EGs, and this time, clockwise toward the position of the adjacent triangular effect image EG, a predetermined number of times (for example, for example). The movement is started only 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 139 (E), the four triangular production image EGs are used as the vertex images, and a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images is formed, and the four triangles are formed. When the type effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is displayed as a temporary stop, the four triangular effect image EGs emit light only once at the same time. As a result, a second specific region having a quadrangular shape is formed by the four straight line RGs connecting the apex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific region is larger than the size of the first specific region formed in FIG. 139 (C). In this respect as well, it can contribute to raising the expectation of the player to win.

Immediately before the four triangular effect images EG emit light all at once in the second specific area, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of a clear image (focused image (out-of-focus image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the second specific region is easy to understand. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the second from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on a specific area of. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green, which is different from the blue color in FIG. 139 (C), can also contribute to raising the expectation of the player to hit.

After that, when the four triangular effect image EGs disappear from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the four straight line RGs, which are unclear images, gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), the effect image EG (hereinafter referred to as “square effect image EG”) having a square shape in a display mode in which the display screen 7a penetrates into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Five appear, are arranged in the center of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the square-shaped effect image EG is larger than the size of the triangular-shaped effect image EG, which can contribute to further increasing the expectation of the player to hit.

Then, the positions where the five square effect image EGs are arranged are maintained as they are in the five square effect image EGs, and this time, counterclockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, toward the positions of the adjacent square effect image EGs). The movement is started only (2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 139 (G), the five square-shaped effect image EGs are used as the vertex images, and a straight line RG connecting the five vertex images is formed. When the square effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the five square effect image EGs emit light all at once. As a result, a third specific region having a pentagonal shape is formed by the five straight line RGs connecting the vertex images of the five square effect images EG. The size of the third specific region is larger than the size of the second specific region formed in FIG. 139 (E). In this respect as well, it can contribute to raising the expectation of the player to win.

In this embodiment, FIGS. 139 (B) and (C) have three vertex images, FIGS. 139 (D) and (E) have four vertex images, and FIGS. 139 (F) and (G) have five vertex images. As the number of vertex images increases, the size of the first specific region to the third specific region increases.

Immediately before the five square effect images EG emit light all at once in the third specific area, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a red color, and in the case of a clear image (focused image (out-of-focus image)), the boundary line between the inside and the outside of the third specific region is easy to understand. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the third from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on a specific area of. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, which is different from the green color in FIG. 139 (E), can also contribute to raising the expectation of the player to hit.

After that, the five square-shaped effect image EGs do not simply disappear from the display screen 7a, but the length and direction of the straight line RG change due to the action of flying away in all directions toward the outside of the display screen 7a, and the length and direction of the straight line RG change. The shape changes. When the five square-shaped effect image EGs fly away, as shown in FIG. 139 (H), the five straight line RGs forming the third specific region become one substantially circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape). A fourth specific region having a substantially circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape) is formed. The size of the fourth specific region is larger than the size of the third specific region formed in FIG. 139 (G), which contributes to further increasing the expectation for the player to hit. can do.

In the fourth specific area, the ally character CRA appears as a clear image (focused image (out-of-focus image)). The color of the straight line RG is inherited as it is and becomes red, but it may have yellow (gold). In this way, it is possible to contribute to further increasing the expectation of the player to win.

After that, the ally character CRA, which is a clear image, and the line RG having an almost circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape) gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the fourth specific area disappears. FIG. 139 (I). As shown in, before the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "6" and the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1", the five square-shaped effect images EG that flew away in all directions. One of the square-shaped effect images EG becomes larger (about four times as large as when it is displayed in FIGS. 139 (F) and 139 (G)) and appears near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a. do. Then, when the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", a lightning bolt is emitted from the square effect image EG to the right decorative symbol 8R, and the right decorative symbol 8R is forcibly changed (variable display). ), The temporary stop is displayed by the number "6", and the reach is formed. As a result, the specific area variable effect C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (K), the battle effect is started. In the battle production, two characters (friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big hit is high. In the battle effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappeared from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C was displayed. The state is maintained. During the battle production, the sword of the ally character CRA is swung down and changes from the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (L), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively advanced positions in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Re-advance (move) from the home position toward (close to each other), and attach to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a. The left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left movable accessory. A decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the left decorative portion of 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, an image display corresponding to the circular region formed in the annular shape is formed. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. With the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, it is possible to inform the player that it is a big hit.

When a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory The 14R moves backward (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged at the center positions of each variable region, and the numbers "6" are lined up on the horizontal line to temporarily stop the display. Will be done. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "6", and if it is stopped and displayed, it will be off. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is used, a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Following FIG. 139 (M), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "6", it becomes a big hit. When the big hit game (big hit effect) is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed on the first hold display position 9Ad. Moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the variable production in a specific area.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, an image display device capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. 7 (display means) is provided, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second) is provided in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area) surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images). The first effect (FIGS. 137 (E) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, FIGS. 138 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect B, the specific area) capable of displaying the effect image). In the variable effect C, FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G), (H)) can be executed. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display means) purposely forms a first specific area to a third specific area (specific area) surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images). By displaying the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) in the formed first specific area to the third specific area (specific area), the unprecedented novelty gives the player an effect. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. ) Increases the size of the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area). Even if the number of multiple vertex images (plural first effect images) is the same, if the positions where the plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images) are arranged are different, the size of the specific area may become smaller. , May grow. Therefore, even if the number of the plurality of vertex images (plurality of first effect images) increases, the size of the specific region may become smaller, which may reduce the expectation for the effect. Therefore, as the number of the plurality of vertex images (plurality of the first effect images) increases, the size of the specific region becomes larger, which can contribute to suppressing the decrease in the expectation for the effect. ..

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. As the number of) increases, the expectation of winning becomes higher. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the degree of expectation of a hit in an easy-to-understand manner by paying attention to the number of a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (in the specific area variable effect A, FIG. 137 (F) to (K), FIGS. 138 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect B, and FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect C). , Medium decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second effect image) is displayed in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area) in an unclear (out of focus image (out of focus image)). You can do it. According to this configuration, as an indistinct image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area), the intermediate decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (first). (2) Since the effect image) can be displayed and attracted attention, the player can imagine what the unclear image looks like, and if another effect is performed after that, it is unclear. The player himself can find the relationship or rule between the image and other effects.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 (in the specific area variable effect A, FIGS. 137 (H) to (K), In FIG. 139 (H) in the specific area variable effect C, after being surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images), a specific area (a third specific area and a specific area variable in the specific area variable effect A) are formed. When the fourth specific area in the effect C is formed into a shape similar to the circular shape, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is clearly defined (the image is out of focus (the image is not out of focus). )) Can be displayed in a specific area. According to this configuration, when a specific region surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images) is formed as a polygonal region, it is subsequently formed into a shape similar to a circular shape. Focusing the player on the change from a straight line to a smooth curve due to the polygon, the image change (for example, indistinct) of the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) displayed in a specific area. It is possible to make it easier to recognize an image (a change from an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) to a clear image (a change from an in-focus image (out-of-focus image)).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (in the specific area variable effect A, FIG. 137 (E), (G), FIG. 138 (B), (D), (F) in the specific area variable effect B, and FIGS. 139 (B), (D), (F) in the specific area variable effect C). , A plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) can be temporarily stopped and displayed after being moved in a predetermined direction. According to this configuration, after a plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images) appear, the first effect image is surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images) by moving in a predetermined direction. It is possible to suggest a specific region to a third specific region (specific region).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, the first movable accessory that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means). 14 (movable body), the first effect (FIGS. 137 (E) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect C, After (H)), a second effect (specific area variable) in which the movable body is operated by erasing the plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images) and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image). FIG. 137 (L) can be executed in the effect A, and FIG. 139 (L) can be executed in the specific area variable effect C. According to this configuration, it is a big hit due to the movement of the first movable accessory 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area. Can be told to the player.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific area variable effect.
[Modification 1]
The specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 138 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect B, and FIG. In 139 (C), (E), (G)), the ally character CRA (second production image) is obscured (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) in the first specific area to the third. It was displayed in a specific area (specific area). However, it may be another image instead of the ally character CRA. For example, when there are a plurality of enemy characters, the first specific area to the third specific area are displayed in a step-up display mode based on the expectation of hitting the enemy character that fights against the ally character CRA. It may be displayed in order. Further, instead of the ally character CRA, the image of the icon that can change the variable icon 9C, the image of the icon that can change the hold icon 9A, the image of the icon that announces the occurrence of the pseudo-ream, and the advance notice effect. It may be an image of an icon that announces the occurrence. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 3]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 137 (F) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, specific area). In FIG. 138 (C), (E), (G) in the variable effect B, and in FIG. 139 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (No. 1). (2) The effect image) is displayed in an indistinct (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area). However, a specific part of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) and the other part is clear (focused image (out-of-focus image)). Image)) may be used. Further, when the sub control board 90 draws a lot independently and wins, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be made clear. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 4]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 137 (H) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, FIG. 139 (H) in the specific area variable effect C). In), after being surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images), a specific area (a third specific area in the specific area variable effect A and a fourth specific area in the specific area variable effect C) becomes a circle. When formed into a shape similar to the shape, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) was clearly displayed in a specific area (focused image (unfocused image)). However, a specific part of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) and the other part is clear (focused image (out-of-focus image)). Image)) may be used. Further, when the sub control board 90 draws a lot independently and wins, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be obscured. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 5]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. In FIG. 138 (B), (D), (F) in the variable effect B, and in FIGS. 139 (B), (D), (F) in the specific area variable effect C, a plurality of vertex images (plural first effects). The image) was temporarily stopped after being moved in a predetermined direction. However, the plurality of vertex images (plurality of first effect images) may be temporarily stopped and displayed as they are after appearing on the display screen 7a without moving in a predetermined direction. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production. The planned direction may be one that moves in one direction, one that moves in one direction and then moves in the opposite direction, or one that rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (clockwise). It may rotate in a direction and rotate counterclockwise again, or it may rotate counterclockwise and rotate clockwise again), it may move in a zigzag manner, or it may be a combination of these. It may be. It should be noted that the sub-control board 90 can independently draw a lottery, move in a predetermined direction when winning, and then temporarily stop and display, or when losing, the temporary stop can be displayed as it is.

[Modification 6]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, the first movable accessory 14 that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means) ( It has a movable body), and has a first effect (FIGS. 137 (F) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, and FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G), (H) in the specific area variable effect C. After)), a second effect (specific area variable effect A) in which the movable body is operated by erasing the plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images) and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image). In FIG. 137 (L), in the specific area variable effect C, FIG. 139 (L)) was executed. However, since the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) appears on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are the image display devices 7, respectively. When advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advancing position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, it does not appear in the front (front) of the display screen 7a and is in the middle. You may try to return to the home position again. In this case, the variable effect (variable display) proceeds without the plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images) and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) disappearing from the display screen 7a. Become. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 7]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is intuitively easy to understand. Further, since the other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and displayed behind the frontmost image of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, when the specific area variable effect is started, a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As a result, the player may misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a as the number of the plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images). Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, the sub display screen 64U) is used. The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number displayed with the number of reserved balls described above as a numerical value. By doing so, there is no risk that the number displayed as the number of reserved balls as a numerical value will be misunderstood by the player as the number of a plurality of vertex images (plural first effect images), and the number of reserved balls will be further reduced. The numerical value displayed as a numerical value can be made difficult to discriminate by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be intuitively understood.

[Modification 8]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. It may be present or it may be a stereoscopic image. Further, the straight line RG may be a planar image or a stereoscopic image. Further, the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be a flat image or a stereoscopic image. Further, the sub-control board 90 may independently draw a lottery for these images and determine either a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 9]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 137 (F) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, specific area). In FIG. 138 (C), (E), (G) in the variable effect B, and in FIG. 139 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (No. 1). (2) The effect image) is displayed in an indistinct (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area). However, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all, or the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, the second effect image). It may not be displayed on the display screen 7a only for 3 seconds). Further, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery to determine the display or non-display of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image). By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 10]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image) was used as an unclear image. As a method of expressing an image that is out of focus, it may be undulating and swaying like a wave, or it may be swaying like a heat haze. In this case, it may be a still image or a moving image. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 11]
The specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 do not have to include a part of the described effects, and other effects are added. You may.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
It is possible to execute a first effect capable of displaying a second effect image in a specific area surrounded by a plurality of first effect images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1.
As the number of the plurality of first effect images increases, the size of the specific area increases.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2.
As the number of the plurality of first effect images increases, the degree of expectation of winning increases.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-3.
In the first effect, the second effect image may be obscuredly displayed in the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-4.
In the first effect, when the specific area is formed into a shape similar to a circular shape after being surrounded by the plurality of first effect images, the second effect image is clearly displayed in the specific area. In some cases,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-5.
In the first effect, the plurality of first effect images may be temporarily stopped and displayed after being moved in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-6.
It has a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect of erasing the plurality of first effect images and the second effect image to operate the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The reliability change effects A and B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. In FIGS. 141 and 142, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. It is omitted from the above.

This reliability change effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, the variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the reliability change effect, the corresponding image is taken from the ROM 103. The data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the reliability in single appearance and double appearance by each character appearing in the reliability change effect will be described, and the reliability change effect A and the reliability change effect B will be described in order.

[Reliability in single appearance and double appearance by each character]
The reliability in single appearance and double appearance by each character will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the reliability in single appearance and double appearance by each character.

In the reliability change effect, multiple balloons covering the card displaying the winning result can be defeated by a character that appears alone, or a specific character appears in addition to the character that appears alone and doubles (jointly). ), And the reliability, which is the expectation of a big hit, is different.

First, the "character" includes symbols such as a cross mark, a circle mark, a square mark, a heart mark, and a star mark, as well as balloons, characters, and the like. Here, as a character belonging to the first group, It is a cross mark, a circle mark, a square mark, a heart mark, and a star mark, and is a balloon as a character that does not belong to the first group.

Further, the above-mentioned characters appearing independently are characters belonging to the first group, and are a cross mark, a circle mark, a triangle mark, a square mark, and a heart mark, and the star mark does not appear independently and is a single character as a specific character. Destroy multiple balloons (characters that do not belong to the first group) by double (jointly) with the characters that appear in.

The reliability (that is, the reliability at the time of a single attack) when the cross mark, the circle mark, the triangle mark, the square mark, and the heart mark, which are the characters belonging to the first group, appear independently is as shown in FIG. 140 (A). In addition, the cross mark is 8%, the circle mark is 16%, the triangle mark is 12%, the square mark is 15%, and the heart mark is 50%. If the heart mark appears alone, the reliability is already high. There is as much as 50%.

In addition to the single appearance of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark, which are characters belonging to the first group, the reliability in the case of double appearance by the star mark, which is a specific character (that is, at the time of double attack). As shown in FIG. 140 (B), the cross mark is 18% (up 10% from the stand-alone state), the circle mark is 23% (up 7% from the stand-alone state), and the triangle mark is 42% (when stand alone). The square mark is 55% (up 40% from the stand-alone), and the heart mark is 47% (down 3% from the stand-alone). When the star mark, which is a specific character, appears in double (jointly), the reliability is 7% to 40% higher than when it appears alone.

On the other hand, when only the heart mark and the star mark, which is a specific character, appear in double (jointly), the reliability is 3% lower than when the star mark appears alone. Furthermore, when the heart mark appears alone, it is the most reliable, and when the square mark appears alone, it is the second most reliable, but it is double (jointly) with a specific character. When it appears, the reliability of the square mark and the star mark, which is a specific character, is the highest, and the reliability of the heart mark and the star mark, which is a specific character, is the second highest. , The order of high reliability is reversed between the case of double (joint) appearance with a specific character and the case of appearing.

In this way, in addition to the single appearance of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark, when the star mark, which is a specific character, appears in double (jointly), the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark appear. The reliability is higher than when it appears alone, with the exception of the case where only the heart mark and the star mark, which is a specific character, appear in double (joint). The reliability is low compared to. As a result, the reliability is basically increased when the star mark, which is a specific character, appears, so the player can expect the reliability of the production to increase with the appearance of the star mark, which is a specific character. It is possible to find out the relationship and the rule of expectation in the single appearance of the mark, the triangle mark, the square mark and the heart mark, and the star mark which is a specific character.

[Reliability change effect A]
Next, the reliability change effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change effect A. The reliability change effect A is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variation region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 141 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are provisionally the same symbol (for example, the number “5”), although not shown thereafter. Stop is displayed and reach is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), the reliability change effect A is started, and the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears independently. The message MS "X" is displayed. The reliability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is 8% due to the appearance of the cross mark GZ1 alone. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A also disappear. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be in the displayed state. Here, the variable icon 9C remains as a white spherical icon, and there is no change to another icon.

After that, when the cross mark GZ1 and the message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG having a character of double attack chance flashes in the center of the display screen 7a. It emits FH and is displayed and appears in a manner of approaching from the rear to the front while blinking. At this time, the flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash FH and the visibility is not impaired. This double attack chance icon TG suggests the appearance of a star mark, which is a specific character, in addition to the cross mark GZ1.

When the double attack chance icon TG flashes and disappears from the display screen 7a while approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L. Is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "5". At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

On the other hand, following FIG. 141 (C), when the double attack chance icon TG blinks from the rear to the front again, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed. Advance (move) from the home position toward the advance position (advance) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and advance (move) from the home position to the front (front) center position (advance) of the display screen 7a. In the position (deployment position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion, which is half of the portion, is united, and one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. NS.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”). A smile image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region. At this time, the white spherical variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the smile image was displayed on the display screen 7a, the smile image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction of The object 14R retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a by emitting a flash FH, and is called a "star mark" to the right of the star mark GZ2. Message MS is displayed. With the appearance of this star mark GZ2, the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2 become double (joint), and the reliability shown in FIG. 140 (B) is 18% (up 10% from the stand-alone state).

As shown in FIG. 141 (G), when the second predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), which is longer than the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), elapses after the star mark GZ2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Appears when a plurality of balloons GZ4 are arranged and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the reliability image KDG indicating the reliability is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG shows the reliability that the winning result displayed on the card by defeating the balloon by double (jointly) the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2 which is a specific character is a hit. The reliability image KDG ranks and suggests this reliability in five stages, and out of the five white circle images, the number of black circle images and half black circles and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as "half black circles"). Suggests by. Here, as the reliability image KDG, "expectation" is shown in the figure, but it means "reliability", there are three black circle images, and the expectation (after reliability) is five levels. Of these, it suggests that it is level 3.

Subsequently, when the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, first emits lightning bolts toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 and starts defeating them, the cross mark GZ1 also emits lightning bolts toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 as shown in FIG. 141 (H). And start defeating.

When multiple balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke from the blast gradually disappears, the card appears, and the winning result displayed on the card is a hit, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol (number "5"), and it becomes a big hit. As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started. When the jackpot game (big hit effect) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, and hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen when the variable effect (variable display) ends. It disappears from 7a. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

On the other hand, when the winning result displayed on the card is out of order, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. Is stopped and displayed at the number "5", so that it is out of order. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

In this way, in the reliability change effect A, the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears independently. At this point, the reliability is 8%. After that, the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears in the center of the display screen 7a by emitting a flash FH. With the appearance of this star mark GZ2, it becomes a double (joint) between the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2. As a result, the reliability is 18% (up 10% from the stand-alone state).

[Reliability change effect B]
Next, the reliability change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change effect B. The reliability change effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variation region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there is only one stocked icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 142 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are provisionally the same symbol (for example, the number “5”), although not shown thereafter. Stop is displayed and reach is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), the reliability change effect B is started, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears independently, and the heart mark GZ3 is independent. The reliability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is 50% by appearing in. The message MS "heart mark" is displayed on the right side of the heart mark GZ3. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A also disappear. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be in the displayed state. Here, the variable icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to a smiling sphere icon having a red color.

After that, when the heart mark GZ3 and the message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 142C, a double attack chance icon TG having a diamond shape having the character double attack chance appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It emits a flash FH and is displayed and appears in a mode of approaching from the rear to the front while blinking. At this time, the flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash FH and the visibility is not impaired. This double attack chance icon TG further suggests the appearance of a star mark, which is a specific character, in addition to the heart mark GZ3.

When the double attack chance icon TG flashes and disappears from the display screen 7a while approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L. Is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "5". At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

On the other hand, following FIG. 142 (C), when the double attack chance icon TG blinks from the rear to the front again, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed. Advance (move) from the home position toward the advance position (advance) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and advance (move) from the home position to the front (front) center position (advance) of the display screen 7a. In the position (deployment position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L, and the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion, which is half of the portion, is united, and one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. NS.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”). A smile image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region. At this time, the variable icon 9C of the smiling sphere having red color disappears from the display screen 7a.

After the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the smile image was displayed on the display screen 7a, the smile image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction of The object 14R retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a by emitting a flash FH, and is called a "star mark" to the right of the star mark GZ2. Message MS is displayed. With the appearance of this star mark GZ2, the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2 become double (joint), and the reliability shown in FIG. 140 (B) is 47% (down 3% from the stand-alone state).

As shown in FIG. 142 (G), when the second predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), which is longer than the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), has elapsed after the star mark GZ2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Appears when a plurality of balloons GZ4 are arranged and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the reliability image KDG indicating the reliability is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG shows the reliability that the winning result displayed on the card by defeating the balloon by double (jointly) the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2 which is a specific character is a hit. The reliability image KDG ranks and suggests this reliability in five stages, and out of the five white circle images, the number of black circle images and half black circles and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as "half black circles"). Suggests by. Here, as the reliability image KDG, "expectation" is shown in the figure, but it means "reliability", and there are three black circle images and one half black circle, and the expectation (after reliability). ) Is level 3.5 out of the five stages, suggesting that it is an intermediate level between level 3 and level 4.

Subsequently, when the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, first shoots lightning bolts toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 and starts defeating them, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), the heart mark GZ3 also shoots lightning bolts toward the plurality of balloons GZ4. Fire and start defeating.

When multiple balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke from the blast gradually disappears, the card appears, and the winning result displayed on the card is a hit, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol (number "5"), and it becomes a big hit. As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started. When the jackpot game (big hit effect) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, and hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen when the variable effect (variable display) ends. It disappears from 7a. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

On the other hand, when the winning result displayed on the card is out of order, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. Is stopped and displayed at the number "5", so that it is out of order. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is produced by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

In this way, in the reliability change effect B, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears independently. At this point, the reliability is 50%. After that, the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears in the center of the display screen 7a by emitting a flash FH. With the appearance of this star mark GZ2, the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2 become double (joint). As a result, the reliability is 47% (down 3% from the stand-alone state).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the reliability change effect.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142. When the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed after GZ1 (first image) is displayed, the expectation of hitting is high (reliability is 18% (up 10% from the single image)). , When the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is displayed and then the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation of hitting is low (reliability is 47% (3% down from single). )) The first effect (FIGS. 141 (A) to (C) and (D) in the reliability change effect A and FIGS. 142 (A) to (C) and (D) in the reliability change effect B) is executed. You can do it. According to this configuration, even if the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation of hit may be changed to be high or low, so that the expectation of hit is a star. It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of being changed by the combination with the mark GZ2 (second image). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third). Image), the variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is hidden, and the variation is further displayed. Of the icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd can be hidden. According to this configuration, the variable icon 9C is displayed even when the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) changes from the displayed state to the hidden state. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the variable icon 9C changes to another icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142, the star mark GZ2 (second image) is doubled as a suggestion of display. The attack chance icon TG (specific image) can be displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the double attack chance icon TG (specific image), it is possible to contribute to increasing the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the first movable accessory that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means). It has 14 (movable body), and in the first effect, the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) can be operated as a suggestion of the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). .. According to this configuration, the movement of the first movable accessory 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed. Can contribute to the enhancement of.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142, a plurality of other than the star mark GZ2 (second image). The second effect (in the reliability change effect A) is to display the balloon GZ4 (fourth image) and further display the reliability image KDG (image of the expected degree of hit) by the star mark GZ2 (second image). In FIG. 141 (E) and the reliability change effect B, FIG. 142 (E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to clearly emphasize to the player the suggestion that the effect of the star mark GZ2 (second image) and the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) is started. Further, since the reliability image KDG (image of the expected degree of winning) is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the reliability for this effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142, in addition to the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image), a cross mark is used. When GZ1 (first image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) are displayed, or when heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) are displayed. In some cases. According to this configuration, the double (joint) effect of the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image) is developed, so that the cross mark GZ1 (first image) is added to the effect. Furthermore, by being involved in the production by the star mark GZ2 (second image), it is possible to contribute to mutually complementing the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image). , Heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) will be doubled (jointly), so in addition to heart mark GZ3 (third image), star mark will be added. By participating in the production by GZ2 (second image), it is possible to contribute to mutually complementing the heart mark GZ3 (third image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) belongs to the first group, and the cross mark and the circle mark belong to the first group. , Triangle mark, square mark, heart mark and star mark (multiple characters), excluding the star mark (first character) and heart mark (second character), cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark and square mark (others) The star mark GZ2 (second image) is the star mark (first character), and the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is the heart mark (second character). The plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group. According to this configuration, before the star mark (first character), which is the second image, is displayed, the cross mark, the circle mark, the triangle mark, and the square mark (other characters) are displayed as the first image. When any character is displayed, the expectation of winning is changed to a high level, whereas the star mark (first character), which is the second image, is displayed before the third image is displayed. When a certain heart mark (second character) is displayed, the expectation of winning is changed to be low, and the first character, the second character, and other characters belong to the same first group. Although it is a thing, before the star mark (first character) which is the second image is displayed, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of winning depending on what kind of character is displayed. There is. Further, although the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group, they can contribute to finding the relationship with the characters that belong to the first group by themselves.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the reliability change effect.
[Modification 1]
The reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the characters belonging to the first group were a cross mark, a circle mark, a triangle mark, a square mark, a heart mark, and a star mark. Alternatively, it may be a character. For example, as characters belonging to the first group, the cross mark is replaced with the ally character A, the circle mark is replaced with the ally character B, the triangle mark is replaced with the ally character C, the square mark is replaced with the ally character D, and the heart mark is replaced. Let the ally character E and the star mark be the ally character F. If the reliability in this case is the same as in FIGS. 140 (A) and 140 (B), the ally character A (first image) replaced with the cross mark GZ1 is displayed and then the ally replaced with the star mark GZ2. When the character F (second image) is displayed, the expectation of hitting is high (reliability is 18% (up 10% from the stand-alone state)), and the ally character E (third) replaced with the heart mark GZ3. When the ally character F (second image) replaced with the star mark GZ2 is displayed after the image) is displayed, the expectation of hitting is low (reliability is 47% (3% down from the single state)). .. By doing this, the variation of the production can be increased.

Further, the character that does not belong to the first group is a balloon, but instead of this, a different character belonging to the first group may be used. In this case, it may be a plurality of characters. For example, the characters that do not belong to the first group are enemy character A, enemy character B, enemy character C, enemy character D, and enemy character E. Then, an effect of associating the ally character A with the enemy character A is performed, an effect of associating the ally character B with the enemy character B is performed, and an effect of associating the ally character C with the enemy character C is performed. An effect of associating the ally character D with the enemy character D is performed, and an effect of associating the ally character E with the enemy character E is performed. If the reliability in this case is the same as in FIGS. 140 (A) and 140 (B), the ally character F appears as a double (joint) with the ally character A to the ally character E and repels the enemy character. Therefore, after the ally character A (first image) replaced with the cross mark GZ1 is displayed, the effect of associating the ally character A (first image) with the enemy character A (fourth image) is performed. When the ally character F (second image) replaced with the star mark GZ2 is displayed, the expectation of hitting is high (reliability is 18% (up 10% from the single time)), and from the heart mark GZ3. After the replaced ally character E (third image) is displayed, an effect of associating the ally character E (third image) with the enemy character E (fourth image) is performed, and the star mark GZ2 is used. When the replaced ally character F (second image) is displayed, the expectation of hitting is low (reliability is 47% (down 3% from the single state)). By doing this, the variation of the production can be increased.

[Modification 3]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 (C) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142 (C), the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is displayed as a suggestion of the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). Was. However, the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is not displayed, and in the reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 (D) and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142 (D), the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L is used. One decorative member (combined accessory) may be formed in which the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R has an annular shape. It can be determined whether or not this is performed by an original lottery by the sub control board 90. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 4]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 (D) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142 (D), the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape1. Two decorative members (combined accessories) were formed. However, the decorative member (combined accessory) may not be formed. It can be determined whether or not this is performed by an original lottery by the sub control board 90. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 5]
In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142 (B), the variable icon 9C changed from a white spherical icon to a smiling sphere icon having a red color. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, about 5 to 8 times) as compared with the size of the white spherical icon. By doing so, the change of the variable icon 9C can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Modification 6]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the sphere was arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is intuitively easy to understand. Further, since the other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and displayed behind the frontmost image of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, when the reliability change effect is started, the reliability image KDG showing the reliability in which the winning result displayed on the card by defeating the balloon is a hit is displayed below the display screen 7a. It was displayed on the side. As a result, the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a may be misunderstood by the player as the reliability shown in these five stages. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, the sub display screen 64U) is used. The right sub-display screen 64R)) may display a number displayed with the number of reserved balls described above as a numerical value. By doing this, there is no risk that the player will misunderstand the number displayed as the number of reserved balls as a numerical value as the reliability shown in the stage, and the number displayed as the number of reserved balls as a numerical value will be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the screen 7a, and it is possible to make it intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 7]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 (H) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142 (H), the variation icon 9C disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed again on the display screen 7a to appear. In this case, lightning is emitted from the character star mark GZ2 toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start defeating, and further, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 (H), the cross mark GZ1 is also lightning toward the plurality of balloons GZ4. In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142 (H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning bolts toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 and starts defeating. For example, it may be a moving image display mode in which the ball contracts or expands up and down so as to bounce up and down, or a moving image display mode in which the ball rotates round and round. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the effect of the effect depending on the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 (H) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142 (H), the variation icon 9C disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed again on the display screen 7a to appear. In this case, a lightning bolt is emitted from the character star mark GZ2 toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start defeating, and further, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 (H), the cross mark GZ1 also emits lightning bolts toward the plurality of balloons GZ4. In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142 (H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning bolts toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start defeating, so that the variable icon 9C is the plurality of balloons GZ4. It may collide with and explode toward, contributing to the destruction of a plurality of balloons GZ4. In this way, in addition to the two characters, the variable icon 9C can be used to destroy a plurality of balloons GZ4, so that the effect of destroying a plurality of balloons GZ4 is provided to the player as more powerful. In addition, the variable icon 9C can contribute to the defeat of a plurality of balloons GZ4, thereby giving the player the impression that the reliability has been further improved, which contributes to the improvement of the effect. Can be done.

[Modification 9]
The reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142 may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
When the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed, the expectation of hit is high, and when the third image is displayed and then the second image is displayed, the hit is said. It is possible to carry out the first production that lowers the expectation of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-1.
In the first effect, when the first image or the third image is displayed, the variation icon is displayed at the variation display position, and then the first image or the third image is hidden. Further, the variable display position of the variable icon and the variable display position is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D7-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect D7-1 or the aspect D7-2.
In the first effect, a specific image can be displayed as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A pachinko machine that features this.

◇ [Aspect D7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-3.
It has a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
In the first effect, the movable body can be operated as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-4.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect of displaying a fourth image in addition to the second image and further displaying an image of the expected degree of hit by the second image. be,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-5.
In the second effect, in addition to the fourth image, the first image and the second image are displayed, or the third image and the second image are displayed. May be done,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-6.
The first image is a plurality of characters belonging to the first group, and is another character excluding the first character and the second character.
The second image is the first character.
The third image is the second character.
The fourth image is a character that does not belong to the first group.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The item superimposition effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. This item superimposition effect can be executed during a variable effect of a special symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, moves the third movable accessory 13, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. It is a production that is realized by this.

[Item superimposition effect A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect A. In this item superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display is omitted. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (B), the item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, the face image XG1 is displayed. The face image XG1 includes a spectacle image XG11 representing spectacles as a predetermined item. In each of the glasses image XG11, the portion corresponding to the lens is transmitted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), the item accessory movable effect is performed. In this item accessory movable effect, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R are moved from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent the glasses. 3 The movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be one size larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item accessory movable effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13 is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed, but in the face image XG1, the glasses image XG11 is erased and the image of the eyes hidden behind the glasses image XG11 is displayed.

[Item superimposition effect B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect B. In this item superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display is omitted. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), the item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, the face image XG1 is displayed. The face image XG1 includes a spectacle image XG11 representing spectacles as a predetermined item. In the glasses image XG11, the portion corresponding to the lens is transmitted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), the item accessory movable effect is performed. In this item accessory movable effect, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R are moved from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent the glasses. 3 The movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be one size larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item accessory movable effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13 is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the character XG2 is displayed at the position where the face image XG1 was displayed.

[Item superimposition effect C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the item superimposition effect C. In this item superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display is omitted. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), the item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, the face image XG1 is displayed. The face image XG1 includes a spectacle image XG11 representing spectacles as a predetermined item. In each of the glasses image XG11, the portion corresponding to the lens is transmitted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), the item accessory movable effect is performed. In this item accessory movable effect, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R are moved from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent the glasses. 3 The movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be one size larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item accessory movable effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13 is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), the item accessory transmission effect 1 is performed. In this item transmission effect 1, on the main display screen 7a, the eyes are displayed on the portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13, and the lens portion of the third movable accessory 13 is transmitted to the player. 3 The eyes of the face image XG1 are made visible through the movable accessory 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), the item accessory transmission effect 2 is performed. In this item transmission effect 2, on the main display screen 7a, the characters "extreme" and "heat" are displayed on the portion corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13, and the lens portion of the third movable accessory 13 is transmitted. The characters are made visible to the player through the third movable accessory 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the character XG2 is displayed at the position where the face image XG1 was displayed.

[Modification example]
In the above item superimposition effect, glasses are used as an item, and the third movable accessory 13 representing the glasses is moved to the position of the glasses image XG11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other items are used. You may. For example, a mask may be used as an item, and the third movable accessory 13 representing the mask may be moved to the position of the mask image to perform the same effect as the item superimposition effect.
In the above item superimposition effect, in the item image display effect, the portion corresponding to the lens of the spectacle image XG11 is displayed so as to be transmitted, and a predetermined image (for example, an eye image or "extreme""heat" is displayed in the transmitted portion. Characters such as) may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the item superimposition effect, the glasses image XG11 representing the glasses as an item is displayed, and then the third movable accessory 13 representing the glasses is moved to the unfolded position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11, and then predetermined. Production (super reach production) is performed. According to this configuration, the glasses image XG 11 and the third movable accessory 13 can deliver a three-dimensional glasses image to the player, and a dynamic display effect can be realized. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above item superimposition effect, the glasses image XG11 is displayed, after that, the third movable accessory 13 representing the glasses is moved to the unfolded position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11, and then the third movable accessory 13 is displayed. After returning to the retracted position (home position), the character XG2 that performs a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is displayed at the position where the glasses image XG11 is displayed. According to this configuration, the glasses image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13 can deliver a three-dimensional glasses image to the player, and a dynamic display effect can be realized, and the third movable accessory can be realized. After the 13 returns to the evacuation position, the character XG2 that performs the super reach effect is displayed instead of the glasses image XG11, so that it is possible to provide a good tempo effect and give the player a feeling of exhilaration. .. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the item superimposition effect, the third movable accessory 13 includes the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R, and in the item accessory movable effect, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13L are provided. It moves to the unfolded position with the object 13R and merges on the glasses image XG11. According to this configuration, the glasses image XG 11 and the third movable accessory 13 can deliver a more three-dimensional glasses image to the player, and a dynamic display effect can be realized. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XG-1]
It is a gaming machine that can execute multiple effects,
As one of the plurality of effects, the first effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed.
The first effect is an effect of displaying a first image representing a predetermined item on a display means.
The second effect is an effect of moving a movable accessory representing the predetermined item to a development position on the first image.
The third effect is an effect of performing a predetermined display effect by the display means.
A combination effect including the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XG-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XG-1.
In the combination effect, the first effect is performed, then the second effect is performed, and then the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XG-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XG-2.
As one of the plurality of effects, a fourth effect may be performed.
The fourth effect is an effect of moving the movable accessory from the deployed position to the basic position.
The combination effect may include the fourth effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth effect is performed after the second effect, the third effect is performed after the fourth effect, and in the third effect, the display means is used. A second image in the predetermined effect is displayed in place of the first image displayed at a position corresponding to the deployed position of the movable accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XG-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XG-3.
The movable accessory has a first accessory and a second accessory.
The movable accessory represents one accessory by combining the first accessory and the second accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XG-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XG-4.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the first accessory and the second accessory of the movable accessory are moved to the development position on the first image, and the first accessory is moved. And the second character are united at the unfolded position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148. In FIGS. 146 to 148, for example, the second movable accessory 15 and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

This movable accessory decorative light emitting effect can be executed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a movable accessory decorative light emission effect, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and changes the position and the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2.

Here, the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate will be described, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect by the first movable accessory 14 will be described in order.

[Game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate]
First, the game board 2 formed of the transparent acrylic plate will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining a game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate. FIG. 147 is a continuation diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed by the transparent acrylic plate of FIG. 146.

As shown in FIG. 146 (A), the game board 2 is composed of a transparent acrylic plate 2z which is a transparent acrylic plate, and a plurality of game nails or the like project into the game area 3 in front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z. It is (planted), and the first movable accessory 14, the image display device 7, and the like are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. A through hole is formed substantially in the center of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the image display device 7 is arranged at a position corresponding to the through hole. The first movable accessory 14 is arranged in the space between the transparent acrylic plate 2z and the image display device 7, and the front is covered with the transparent acrylic plate 2z when the first movable accessory 14 is in a standby state at the home position. When the display screen 7a is in a state of advancing and moving toward the center, it appears in front (front surface) of the image display device 7 and is not covered with the transparent acrylic plate 2z due to the opening of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Although the first movable accessory 14 is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z, since the transparent acrylic plate 2z is transparent, even when the first movable accessory 14 is in the home position, it is in the center of the display screen 7a. It is said that it is easy to see even when moving toward. The game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate 2z has the same configuration as the game board 2 described above except that the game board 2 has the transparent acrylic board 2z, and the description thereof is omitted here.

Although not shown, the first movable accessory 14 includes a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted, an inner lens covering the front of the decorative substrate is arranged, and the inner lens and the decorative substrate are housed by decorative members. It is composed of. An opening is formed in the decorative member, and the inner lens is exposed from this opening. The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from a plurality of full-color LEDs, and makes it difficult to recognize the existence of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. Therefore, even when all the plurality of full-color LEDs are turned off, it is difficult to see the plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. The light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate is emitted forward through the inner lens (hereinafter, referred to as "the first movable accessory 14 emits light").

Since the transparent acrylic plate 2z is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14, when the first movable accessory 14 emits light, the light passes through the transparent acrylic plate 2z and goes to the front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z. It will be irradiated. As a result, the game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14 and the game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 not corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14. By comparison, the game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14 is brightly illuminated and easily visible.

Further, a plurality of game nails and the like are projected (planted) on the front surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and when the first movable accessory 14 emits light, the game nails are brightly illuminated by the light, so that the game ball It is possible to emphasize the passage through which the light flows down to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Here, a state in which the first movable accessory 14 is in standby at the home position will be described. As described above, the first movable accessory 14 includes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. .. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape.

The first movable accessory 14 is in a state of being stationary at a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the left movable accessory 14L, which stands by in the home position, has a left decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape, and rotates with the center point of the vertical distance dimension of the arc on the arc. The center point is LKP, and at the rotation center point LKP on the arc, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD are further divided, and the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU is counterclockwise. Rotating in the direction, the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD rotates clockwise, and the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD are opened at approximately 180 degrees.

When the left movable accessory 14L starts advancing toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, at the rotation center point LKP on the arc, the upper arc shape left movable accessory 14LU rotates clockwise, and the lower arc shape left side. The movable accessory 14LD rotates counterclockwise to form a left decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape, and then moves forward toward the center of the display screen 7a.

As shown in the figure, in the right movable accessory 14R that stands by in the home position, the right decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape takes the center point of the vertical distance dimension of the arc on the arc and the rotation center point RKP. Then, at the rotation center point RKP on the arc, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD are further divided, and the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU rotates clockwise. , The lower arc shape right side movable accessory 14RD rotates counterclockwise and is in an open state of approximately 180 degrees.

When the right movable accessory 14R starts advancing and moving toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, at the rotation center point RKP on the arc, the upper arc shape right movable accessory 14RU rotates counterclockwise and the lower arc shape. The right movable accessory 14RD rotates clockwise to become a right decorative portion having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape, and then moves forward toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the left movable accessory 14L standing by in the home position emits light, the light is approximately 180 degrees between the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, as shown in FIG. 146 (C). In the open state, the front of the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD is brightly illuminated.

When the right-hand movable accessory 14R waiting in the home position emits light, as shown in the figure, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD open approximately 180 degrees. In this state, the front side corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD is brightly illuminated.

As described above, the game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing is called "left-handed", and the method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed".

In the state where the left movable accessory 14L is on standby in the home position, as shown in FIGS. 147 (D) and 147 (E), when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc shape, the left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc shape. When the left movable accessory 14LD emits light, the light is emitted from the front region (hereinafter, "left-handed") corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD in the left game area 3A. It illuminates the side light emitting area 3AF ") brightly. As a result, when comparing the game ball flowing down the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF in the left game area 3A and the game ball flowing down the other area in the left game area 3A excluding the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF, The game ball flowing down the left-handed side light emitting region 3AF is brightly illuminated so that it is easy to see.

In addition, since a plurality of game nails (indicated by small "○" in the figure) are projected (planted) in the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF, that is, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, When the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, the light illuminates the game nail in the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF brightly, so that the player walks through the passage through which the game ball flows. Can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner. In the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF, when the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emits light, a so-called windmill is arranged in addition to the game nail in the area brightly illuminated by the light. The rotation can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The wind turbine is as important to the player as the game nail because the rolling of the game ball to the first starting port 20 changes depending on the direction of rotation and the speed of rotation.

In the state where the right movable accessory 14R is on standby in the home position, as shown in the figure, when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD are When the light is emitted, the light is referred to as a front region (hereinafter, "right-handed side light emitting region 3BF") corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD in the right gaming area 3B. ) Will be illuminated brightly. As a result, when comparing the game ball flowing down the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF in the right game area 3B and the game ball flowing down the other area in the right game area 3B excluding the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF, The game ball flowing down the right-handed side light emitting region 3BF is brightly illuminated so that it is easy to see.

In addition, since a plurality of game nails (indicated by small "○" in the figure) are projected (planted) in the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF, when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, the right-handed movable accessory 14R emits light. Since the game nail in the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF is brightly illuminated by the light, the passage through which the game ball flows can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU emits light in the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF, the game nail is not projected (planted) in the area brightly illuminated by the light, and the center is decorated. The passage through which the game ball flows down along the right outer shell of the body 10 can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Of the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF, when the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emits light, a plurality of game nails and the like are projected (planted) in the area brightly illuminated by the light, so that the game nails are used. Is brightly illuminated and the passage through which the game ball flows down can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In FIG. 147 (E), in the home position, the left movable accessory 14L emits light and the right movable accessory 14R can emit light. The side light emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated, as if the illuminated decorative member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the illuminated decorative member is placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z). (Fixed), it is possible to realize the expression that the light emission effect is performed by the illuminated decorative member. That is, it is possible to perform the same light emission effect as the illuminated decorative member without providing the illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Of course, the light emitting mode in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light includes lighting, gradation lighting, blinking, and the like. In addition, the left movable accessory 14L emits light, the right movable accessory 14R is turned off, and only the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF is brightly illuminated. There is an effect that only the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF is brightly illuminated when the object 14R emits light, and the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF and the right are in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are turned off. There is an effect that the light emitting area 3BF on the striking side is turned off.

[Movable accessory decoration light emission effect by the first movable accessory 14]
Next, a movable accessory decorative light emitting effect by the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory decorative light emitting effect (hereinafter, referred to as “movable accessory decorative light emitting effect”) by the first movable accessory 14. The decorative light emitting effect of the movable accessory is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

In the state where the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 148 (A) and the decorative light emitting effect of the movable accessory is started, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R stand by at the home position, respectively. In the state, when playing a game by hitting left or playing a game by hitting right, for example, as shown in the figure, the left movable accessory 14L emits light and the right side. When the movable accessory 14R is turned off, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, and the light is emitted from the left game. Of the area 3A, the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, is brightly illuminated, and the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF is excluded. The left game area 3A is not brightly illuminated and is darker than the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF. On the other hand, since the right movable accessory 14R is turned off, the entire right game area 3B is not brightly illuminated by the right movable accessory 14R and becomes dark.

Further, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in the standby state at the home position, when the game is played by left-handed or when the game is played by right-handed. For example, in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light. The light illuminates the left-handed side light emitting region 3AF, which is the front region corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, in the left gaming area 3A. Therefore, the left game area 3A excluding the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF is not brightly illuminated, and is darker than the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF. When the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emit light, and the light is movable in the upper arc shape right side in the right game area 3B. The right-handed side light emitting area 3BF, which is the front area corresponding to the accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, is brightly illuminated, and the right game area 3B excluding the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF is not brightly illuminated and is on the right. It is darker than the light emitting area 3BF on the striking side.

Further, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in the standby state at the home position, when the game is played by left-handed or when the game is played by right-handed. For example, in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are turned off, the entire left game area 3A is not brightly illuminated by the left movable accessory 14L and becomes dark. The entire right game area 3B is not brightly illuminated by the right movable accessory 14R and becomes dark.

In this way, when playing a left-handed game or a right-handed game, the left movable accessory 14L can emit light and the right movable accessory 14R can emit light at the home position. Therefore, the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated, as if the illuminated decorative member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the transparent acrylic plate). An illumination decoration member is fixed behind 2z), and it is possible to realize an expression in which the illumination decoration member is used to produce light emission. That is, it is possible to perform the same light emission effect as the illuminated decorative member without providing the illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Next, from the state in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are each waiting at the home position, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are each on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward the central advance position (in a direction close to each other), when playing a left-handed game or playing a right-handed game, FIG. 148 ( As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advanced position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, the left side decoration which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The part and the right decorative part which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R are united, and the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right side of the right movable accessory 14R are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the decorative portion is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape (a region having a circular shape). Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”). A smile image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region.

At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are already in a state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advancing position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other). It has become. Therefore, even if the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, the light is emitted from the left gaming area 3A. The left-handed light emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, is not brightly illuminated and is transparent at the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. It is irradiated forward without passing through the acrylic plate 2z. Further, even if the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emit light, the light is emitted from the upper of the right gaming area 3B. The arc-shaped right-side movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable accessory 14RD do not brightly illuminate the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF, which is the front area corresponding to the arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD. It is irradiated forward without passing through the plate 2z.

In the present embodiment, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) from the home position toward the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other). Since the production suggests the start of the production with high expectation of a big hit, the player can see that the left movable character 14L and the right movable character 14R are in the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a. Seeing (moving) from the home position toward (close to each other) raises expectations for the ongoing production.

In this way, when playing a game by hitting the left side or playing a game by hitting the right side, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R stand by at the home position, respectively, and then the left movable accessory. When the 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, they are movable on the left side. Even if the accessory 14L and the right-side movable accessory 14R emit light, the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF are not brightly illuminated.

If the illuminated decorative member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, if the illuminated decorative member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), the illuminated decorative member Even when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) from the home position toward the advance position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other). However, in this case, there is a possibility that the attention to the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R cannot be emphasized by shifting to the light emission effect by the illuminated decorative member.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed from the state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are each waiting at the home position. In the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advancing position in the center of the front (front) of the screen 7a (in the direction close to each other), even if the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, the left Since the striking side light emitting area 3AF and the right striking side light emitting area 3BF are not illuminated brightly, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are directed toward the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. It is possible to emphasize the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R by paying the player attention to the state of advancing (moving) from the home position (in a direction close to each other).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect by the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate and the first movable accessory 14.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plates of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent) on which the game area 3 is formed is formed. The game board 2 is provided with a game board 2 in which a plurality of game nails are projected in front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part), and the game board 2 emits light behind the transparent acrylic board 2z (transparent part). A plurality of possible left movable accessories 14L (movable bodies) are arranged (in addition to the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R), and the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is a transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). When the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light while the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is on standby at the home position, the game area corresponding to the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is emitted. The first effect (FIGS. 147 (E) and 148 (A)) for illuminating the left-handed side light emitting region 3AF (specific region) of 3 can be executed. According to this configuration, the left-handed side light emitting region 3AF (specific region) is brightly illuminated, so that the illumination decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the electric decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z). The decorative decoration member is fixed), and it is possible to realize an expression in which the illumination decoration member is used to produce light emission. That is, it is possible to perform the same light emission effect as the illuminated decorative member without providing the illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having the transparent acrylic plates of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, when the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light, The gaming ball flowing down the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) flows down the left game area 3A (area) excluding the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF that is not illuminated by the light emission of the left movable accessory 14L (movable body). It is easier to see than the game ball. According to this configuration, the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is brightly illuminated by the light emitted from the left movable accessory 14L (movable body), so that the game ball flowing down the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area). It can contribute to emphasizing the turning trend. Further, when adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball, when the player operates the handle 60, it is possible to easily see the rolling direction of the game ball depending on the strength of the launch intensity, which makes it easier to adjust the launch intensity. Can contribute to.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having the transparent acrylic plates of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, when the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light, The game nails that are projected (planted) in the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) are illuminated. According to this configuration, the passage through which the game ball flows can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having the transparent acrylic plates of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, the left side of the gaming area 3 is played in the gaming area 3. The game board 2 has a left game area 3A (first flow area) in which the ball flows down and a right game area 3B (second flow area) in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 3. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R (movable body) to be arranged illuminate the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow area) and the right game. There is one that illuminates the right-handed side light emitting region 3BF (specific region) in the region 3B (second flow region). According to this configuration, the game ball flowing down the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF in the left game area 3A can be brightly illuminated for easy visibility, and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF in the right game area 3B can be easily seen. It is possible to illuminate the flowing game ball brightly and make it easy to see.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having the transparent acrylic plates of FIGS. 146 and 147, and in the first effect of the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. When a movable body such as the left movable accessory 14L or the right movable accessory 14R emits light while performing a left-handed strike (first game) flowing down to the first flow area), the left game area 3A (first game) The left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right gaming area 3B (second flow area) may be illuminated. According to this configuration, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light during left-handed (first game), the left in the left game area 3A (first flow area). The right-handed light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right-handed light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) can be illuminated and brightened. Further, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light and the right movable accessory 14R is extinguished during left-handed hitting (first game), the left game area 3A (first flow area) is formed. The left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) can be illuminated and brightened, and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow area) can be darkened without being illuminated. Further, when the left movable accessory 14L is turned off and the right movable accessory 14R emits light during left-handed (first game), in the left game area 3A (first flow area). The left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) can be illuminated and brightened. In this way, when the left-handed (first game) is performed, the light-emitting mode of the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) is given a variation. be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having the transparent acrylic plates of FIGS. 146 and 147, and in the first effect of the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. When a movable body such as the left movable accessory 14L or the right movable accessory 14R emits light while performing a right-handed strike (second game) flowing down to the second flow area), the left game area 3A (first game) The left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right gaming area 3B (second flow area) may be illuminated. According to this configuration, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light during right-handed (second game), the left in the left game area 3A (first flow area). The right-handed light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right-handed light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) can be illuminated and brightened. Further, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light and the right movable accessory 14R is extinguished during right-handed (second game), the left game area 3A (first flow area). The left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) can be illuminated and brightened, and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) can be illuminated and darkened. Further, when the left movable accessory 14L is turned off and the right movable accessory 14R emits light during right-handed (second game), in the left game area 3A (first flow area). The left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) can be illuminated and brightened. In this way, when right-handed (second game) is performed, variations are given to the light-emitting modes of the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second flow area). be able to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, movable bodies such as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are displayed from the home position to the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. After moving to the advance position (effect position) of, the second effect (FIG. 148 (B)) that is combined into one decorative member (combined accessory) (combined movable body) can be executed. ing. According to this configuration, what was recognized by the player as the illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z suddenly became the left movable accessory 14L or the right movable accessory 14R, and the display screen 7a from the home position. When you move to the advance position (directing position) in the center of the front (front) of, it merges into one decorative member (combined accessory) (combined movable body), so the game changes from an illuminated decorative member to a movable body. It is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the person and provide an impactful effect, and further, a light emission effect equivalent to the light emission effect by the illuminated decorative member fixed in a predetermined position is performed on the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. It can be done with a movable body such as.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, one decorative member (combined accessory) (combined) by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. Even if the movable body) emits light, it does not illuminate the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L and the right side are in a state of advancing (moving) from the home position (in a direction close to each other) toward the advancing position (directing position) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. Even if a movable body such as the movable accessory 14R emits light, the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF are not brightly illuminated, so that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are not illuminated. The player is made to pay attention to the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advancing position (directing position) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable It is possible to emphasize a movable body such as the accessory 14R.

[Modification example]
Below, a modified example of a game board having a transparent acrylic plate and a movable accessory decorative light emitting effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, the effect was performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. However, it may be performed as part of a demo production for waiting for customers. In this way, before playing the game, it is possible to experience the movable character decorative light emitting effect that can be experienced when actually playing the game. The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed, and performs sub-control. Output to the board 90. When the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the customer waiting / waiting command received from the sub control board 90, and changes the position and the light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2.

[Modification 2]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, the transparent acrylic plate 2z, which is a transparent acrylic plate, was adopted as the transparent portion formed in the game area 2. However, instead of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, plywood (so-called veneer plate) is used as an opaque plate, and the part corresponding to the upper arc shape left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc shape left movable accessory 14LD, and the upper arc shape. A through hole is provided in the right side movable accessory 14RU and the part corresponding to the lower arc shape right side movable accessory 14RD, and a transparent part is provided at the position of the cell image to be attached to the front surface of the plywood (so-called veneer plate) corresponding to this through hole. (It may be transparent or translucent.) May be provided. Further, the through-hole may be configured to be closed by a transparent member (for example, a transparent acrylic member). The transparent member may be shaped.

[Modification 3]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, the left decorative portion having a half arc shape of the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L is on the upper side in the home position. It is divided into an arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD. It was divided into a movable accessory 14RD on the right side of the shape. However, the left decorative portion having an arc shape half of the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L may be in a state of standing by as it is without being divided into upper and lower parts at the home position, or half of the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion having the arc shape of the above may be in a state of standing by as it is without being divided into upper and lower parts in the home position.

When the left decorative part having a half arc shape of the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L overlaps with a part of the left decorative part in the front-rear direction with the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) even when the left decorative part has an arc shape as it is in the home position. Since it may overlap with the entire left-hand side decorative portion, this overlapped area is formed as the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF, and when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF can be brightly illuminated. Further, even when the right decorative portion having an arc shape half of the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R stands by in the home position as it is, the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) and a part of the right decorative portion in the front-rear direction. Since there are cases where they overlap or overlap with the entire right-hand side decorative portion, this overlapped area is formed as the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF, and when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF can be brightly illuminated. ..

[Modification 4]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, movable bodies such as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion), and the transparent acrylic plate 2z is arranged. No decorative member was placed in the space between the back surface of the (transparent part) and the front surface of the movable body. However, a decorative member having a transparent portion is arranged in the space between the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) and the front surface of the movable body, and the positional relationship between the decorative member and the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) changes. The decorative member may be fixedly configured so as not to prevent it. The decorative member having a transparent portion does not have a light emitting portion such as a full-color LED mounted at all, and is arranged on the back surface side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z via another member. The decorative member having the transparent portion may or may not be attached to the back surface side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

By arranging a decorative member having a transparent portion in front of the left movable accessory 14L at a position corresponding to the home position of the left movable accessory 14L, the existence of the left movable accessory 14L is hidden, and the left movable accessory 14L emits light. Then, the light is emitted forward through the transparent portion of the decorative member. The transparent portion of the decorative member is, for example, a transparent acrylic member, which may be shaped or may be an inner lens. The inner lens diffusely refracts the light incident from the rear, and when the left movable accessory 14L is arranged behind the inner lens, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the existence of the left movable accessory 14L. The inner lens in the decorative member makes it difficult to see the left movable accessory 14L. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. As a result, the illumination decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the illumination decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), and the light emission effect is performed by the illumination decoration member. It is possible to realize the expression that is present. That is, it is possible to perform the same light emission effect as the illuminated decorative member without providing the illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Further, in the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advancing position (directing position) in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction close to each other), even if the left movable accessory 14L emits light, Since the light does not already pass through the transparent portion of the decorative member, the light emitted from the decorative member having the transparent portion disappears, and the left movable accessory 14L is in the front (front) center advance position (directing position) of the display screen 7a. It is possible to emphasize the left movable accessory 14L by paying attention to the player in the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward (in the direction close to each other). In other words, since the existence of the left movable accessory 14L in the standby state at the home position is hidden by the decorative member, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, it is arranged in front of the left movable accessory 14L. While it is possible to emphasize the existence of a decorative member having a transparent portion, the left movable accessory 14L in a state of advancing (moving) from the home position has a transparent portion when the left movable accessory 14L emits light. It is not necessary to emphasize the existence of the decorative member to hide its own existence, and this time, it is possible to emphasize its own existence.

Further, by arranging a decorative member having a transparent portion in front of the right movable accessory 14R at a position corresponding to the home position of the right movable accessory 14R, the existence of the right movable accessory 14R is hidden (in other words, the right movable accessory 14R is movable). The accessory 14R becomes difficult to see due to the decorative member), and when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, the light is emitted forward through the transparent portion of the decorative member. The transparent portion of the decorative member is, for example, a transparent acrylic member, which may be shaped or may be an inner lens. The inner lens diffusely refracts the light incident from the rear, and when the right movable accessory 14R is arranged behind the inner lens, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the existence of the right movable accessory 14R. The inner lens in the decorative member makes it difficult to see the right movable accessory 14R. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. As a result, the illumination decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the illumination decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), and the light emission effect is performed by the illumination decoration member. It is possible to realize the expression that is present. That is, it is possible to perform the same light emission effect as the illuminated decorative member without providing the illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Further, in the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advancing position (directing position) in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction close to each other), even if the right movable accessory 14R emits light, Since the light does not already pass through the transparent portion of the decorative member, the light emitted from the decorative member having the transparent portion disappears, and the right movable accessory 14R is placed in the front (front) center advance position (directing position) of the display screen 7a. It is possible to emphasize the right movable accessory 14R by paying attention to the player in the state of advancing (moving) from the home position toward (in the direction close to each other). In other words, since the existence of the right movable accessory 14R in the standby state at the home position is hidden by the decorative member, when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, it is arranged in front of the right movable accessory 14R. While it is possible to emphasize the existence of a decorative member having a transparent portion, the right movable accessory 14R in a state of advancing (moving) from the home position has a transparent portion when the right movable accessory 14R emits light. There is no need to emphasize the existence of the decorative member to hide its existence, and this time it is possible to emphasize its existence.

[Modification 5]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, the first movable accessory 14 includes a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted. An inner lens covering the front of the decorative substrate was arranged, and the inner lens and the decorative substrate were housed by decorative members. An opening was formed in this decorative member, and the inner lens was exposed from this opening. The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from a plurality of full-color LEDs, and it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the existence of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. Even when all the LEDs were turned off, it was difficult to see the plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. In other words, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, a plurality of mounted on the decorative substrate housed in the first movable accessory 14 through the inner lens. It was said that the full-color LED was difficult to see. However, an inner lens may be formed so that a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed in the first movable accessory 14 can be easily seen, or a design may be formed instead of the inner lens. It may be a transparent member to which is applied. This transparent member may be transparent or translucent.

[Modification 6]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at the home position, respectively. In some cases, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R may emit light when the left-handed game is being played or the right-handed game is being played. However, when changing from a left-handed game to a right-handed game, the left-handed movable accessory 14L may be turned off and the right-handed movable accessory 14R may emit light, or the right-handed game may be changed to a left-handed game. When it changes, the left movable accessory 14L may emit light and the right movable accessory 14R may be turned off. In this way, when switching between a left-handed game and a right-handed game, the player can decide which way to play the game by the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. Can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Modification 7]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIG. 147 (E) and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. No game nails were erected (planted) in the brightly illuminated area. However, the game nails may be projected (planted). By doing so, the game nails are illuminated brightly, so that the passage through which the game ball flows can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Modification 8]
The movable accessory decorative light emitting effect of FIG. 148 may not include a part of the described effect, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine having a transparent portion on which a gaming area is formed, and having a gaming board in which a plurality of gaming nails are projected from the front surface of the transparent portion.
A plurality of movable bodies capable of emitting light are arranged behind the transparent portion on the game board.
The movable body is visible through the transparent portion and is visible.
When the movable body emits light while the movable body is on standby at the home position, it is possible to execute the first effect of illuminating a specific area of the game area corresponding to the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E2-1.
When the movable body emits light, the game ball flowing down the specific area is easier to see than the game ball flowing down the area not illuminated by the light emission of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E2-1 or the aspect E2-2.
When the movable body emits light, the game nail projecting from the specific area is illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3.
The game area has a first flow area in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area, and a second flow area in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area.
A plurality of the movable bodies arranged on the game board include those that illuminate the specific area in the first flow area and those that illuminate the specific area in the second flow area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-4.
In the first effect, when the movable body emits light while the game ball is performing the first game of flowing down to the first flow-down region, the specific region in the first flow-down region and the first It may illuminate the specific area in the flow area of 2.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E2-4 or the aspect E2-5.
In the first effect, when the movable body emits light while the game ball is performing the second game of flowing down to the second flow-down region, the specific region in the first flow-down region and the first It may illuminate the specific area in the flow area of 2.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-6.
When the movable body moves from the home position to the effect position, it is possible to execute a second effect of coalescing into a united movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-8]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E2-7.
In the second effect, even if the united movable body emits light, it does not illuminate the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The W mode display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. This W mode display effect can be executed during a variable effect of a special symbol or the like. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a. In the W mode display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are actually displayed, but the display is omitted in the figure. Further, the left sub display screen 64L has a configuration in which the area of the display screen is smaller than that of the main display screen 7a.

[W mode display effect A]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display effect A. In this W mode display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 149 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are executed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing a mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing a mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing a mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, a sound effect, a predetermined character appearance frequency, a character type, a chance-up appearance frequency, a chance-up jackpot expectation, and the like are set. These settings are also different in modes A to C. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for urging the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing or the reach effect. In the example of FIG. 149 (A), mode A is selected, mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (shown by hatching in the figure), and mode A is displayed in the second mode image XH2. The mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, suggesting that the mode A is set. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at low speed and pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in front of the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, the portions are hidden by the decorative symbols and cannot be seen. Further, the player who sees the button image XH3 changes the mode from mode A to mode B by operating the select button 68. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden behind the decorative symbols and cannot be seen in the portion where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in front. In FIG. 149 (C), the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, that is, the mode B remains.
After this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R display the jackpot symbol array in the case of a jackpot, and display the missed symbol array in the case of a miss.

[W mode display effect B]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display effect B. In this W mode display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 150 (A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are executed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing a mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing a mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing a mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, a sound effect, a predetermined character appearance frequency, a character type, a chance-up appearance frequency, a chance-up jackpot expectation, and the like are set. These settings are also different in modes A to C. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for urging the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing or the reach effect. In the example of FIG. 150 (A), mode A is selected, mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (shown by hatching in the figure), and mode A is displayed in the second mode image XH2. The mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, suggesting that the mode A is set. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (B), the character appearance effect 1 is performed. In the character appearance effect 1, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the character image XH4 moves on the main display screen 7a and moves on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13. pass. In this case, in the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, when the character image XH4 is in front, the portion thereof is hidden by the character image XH4 and cannot be seen. Further, the player who sees the button image XH3 changes the mode from mode A to mode B by operating the select button 68. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (C), the character appearance effect 2 is performed. In this character appearance effect 2, the character image XH4 moves to the left sub-display screen 64L and moves to the position of the second mode image XH2. In this case, the character image XH4 moves behind the second mode image XH2, and the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are always visible. In FIG. 150 (C), the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, that is, the mode B remains.
After the character appearance effect 2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display the jackpot symbol array in the case of a jackpot, and display the missed symbol array in the case of a miss.

[W mode display effect C]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display effect C. In this W mode display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are executed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing a mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing a mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing a mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, a sound effect, a predetermined character appearance frequency, a character type, a chance-up appearance frequency, a chance-up jackpot expectation, and the like are set. These settings are also different in modes A to C. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for urging the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing or the reach effect. In the example of FIG. 151 (A), mode A is selected, mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (shown by hatching in the figure), and mode A is displayed in the second mode image XH2. The mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, suggesting that the mode A is set. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the player who sees the button image XH3 changes the mode from mode A to mode B by operating the select button 68. Therefore, in this mode change effect, the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly in the first mode image XH1 (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top in the second mode image XH2. NS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the "7" symbol, and the decorative symbols 8C are variablely displayed to form a reach state. Further, in this reach effect, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the character image XH4 moves on the main display screen 7a and moves on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13. pass. In this case, in the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, when the character image XH4 is in front, the portion thereof is hidden by the character image XH4 and cannot be seen. In this reach effect, mode B is continuously selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (D), a button pressing effect is performed. In this button pressing effect, the button image XH5 is displayed together with the character image XH4. This button image XH5 represents the effect button 63, and is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63. In this button pressing effect, mode B is continuously selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (E), a chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, the character image XH6 is displayed when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player who has seen the button image XH5. This character image XH6 is described as "super hot", which is a chance up suggesting that the expectation for a big hit is relatively high. In this chance-up effect, mode B is continuously selected.
After this chance-up effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R display the jackpot symbol array in the case of a jackpot, and display the missed symbol array in the case of a miss.

[Modification example]
In the W mode display effect, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the second mode image XH2 of the left sub display screen 64L, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the one-mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. Further, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 may be arranged in parallel so as not to overlap each other.
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 are composed of a mode A image, a mode B image, and a mode C image, respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto. .. For example, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 may be composed of different mode images. For example, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed as the first mode image XH1, and the mode D image and the mode representing the mode D different from the modes A to C are displayed as the second mode image XH2. A mode E image different from A to D and a mode F image different from modes A to E may be displayed. Further, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed as the first mode image XH1, and the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the modes A to C are used as the second mode image XH2. Different mode D images may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 is performed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 is displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. According to this configuration, since the mode display is performed on each of the two display devices, the player can easily recognize which mode the player is currently in, and can enjoy the mode effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 displayed on the main display screen 7a and the second mode image XH2 displayed on the left sub display screen 64L suggest the same mode. According to this configuration, since the same mode display is performed on each of the two display devices, the player can easily recognize one mode and enjoy the mode effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above W mode display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed on the main display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may overlap with the first mode image XH1, in which case the first mode image XH1 is arranged behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C. , 8R hides at least part. According to this configuration, on the main display screen 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is prioritized over the mode display, and on the left sub display screen 64L, the mode is prioritized over the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Since the display has priority, the player can easily grasp the mode while enjoying the game production, and can also enjoy the mode production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the character image XH4 is displayed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed, and the character image XH4 and the first mode image are displayed. There is a case where it overlaps with XH1, in which case the first mode image XH1 is arranged behind the character image XH4, and at least a part thereof is hidden by the character image XH4. According to this configuration, on the main display screen 7a, the variable display of the character image XH4 is prioritized over the mode display, and on the left sub display screen 64L, the mode display is prioritized over the variable display of the character image XH4. , The player can easily grasp the mode while enjoying the game production, and can also enjoy the mode production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XH-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
As one of the plurality of display effects, the first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first mode suggestion display suggesting a mode on the first display means.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second mode suggestion display suggesting a mode on the second display means.
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XH-1.
The mode represented by the first mode suggestion display and the mode represented by the second mode suggestion display are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XH-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying a decorative pattern in the first display means.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XH-3.
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is performed, the first mode suggestion display and the decorative symbol are displayed in the first display means. In the case of overlapping, the first mode suggestion display is arranged behind the decorative symbol and hidden by the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XH-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image different from the decorative pattern in the first display means.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and when the first mode suggestion display and the predetermined image overlap, the first display effect is performed. The mode suggestion display of 1 is arranged behind the predetermined image and is hidden by the predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
The following aspects may be used.
The first mode suggestion display (first mode image XH1) and the second mode suggestion display (second mode image XH2) are displayed at the same time.
The first mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and the plurality of mode displays are displayed so as not to overlap each other.
The second mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and the plurality of mode displays are displayed so as to overlap each other.
The first display means (main display screen 7a) has a larger display screen area than the second display means (left sub display screen 64L).
A predetermined image (character image XH4, decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) may be displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and the predetermined image overlaps with the second mode suggestion display. When in position, the second mode suggestion display is located in front of the predetermined image and is visible, and when the predetermined image is in a position overlapping the first mode suggestion display, the first mode suggestion is displayed. The display is located behind the predetermined image, and the overlapping portion cannot be visually recognized.
In the second display means, the second mode suggestion display corresponds to the first operation unit image (for example, button image XH3) representing the first operation unit (for example, select button 68) for changing the mode. A second operation unit image (for example, button image XH5) representing the second operation unit (for example, the effect button 63) is displayed in the first display means, and the second operation unit is played. A predetermined effect (for example, display of the character image XH6) different from the mode change is performed by a person's operation (see W mode display effect C).

Hereinafter, the movable portion operation warning effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154. In FIGS. 152 to 154, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawing. It is omitted from the above.

This movable portion operation warning effect can be executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and can also be executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command) and includes an instruction to execute a movable portion operation warning effect, the ROM 103 responds. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

Here, the method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61 will be described, and the movable portion operation warning effect A and the movable portion operation warning effect B will be described in order.

[How to lock the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61]
First, a method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining a method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that allows the player to push the entire sword member 65 downward. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword. This sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production, which is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword button is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. The sword member 65 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button at the tip.

The sword portion and the handle portion of the sword member 65 are decorative members capable of emitting light, and can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode according to the progress of the production. In other words, the sword member 65 has a decorative member, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the light emission of the decorative member.

To lock the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61, first, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), the sword member 65 is inserted into an insertion slot (not shown) provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 61 and pushed downward. While rotating in the counterclockwise direction HTY. Then, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), the sword member 65 and the upper plate 61 are completely locked by continuing to rotate until there is a “click” response.

In the state where this lock is completed, when the vertical direction of the sword member 65 is the axis for the player sitting on the front surface of the game machine 1, the sword member 65 is slightly rotated around this axis. The player holds the handle of the sword member 65 with both hands so that the sword member 65 can be easily pushed downward.

A lock completion sensor (not shown) for detecting the lock completion of the sword member 65 is provided inside the upper plate 61, and a detection signal from the lock completion sensor is input to the sub control board 90. The detection signal from the lock completion sensor is a lock completion logic when the sword member 65 is locked to the upper plate 61 (hereinafter referred to as “lock completed”), and the sword member 65 is locked to the upper plate 61. When there is no state (hereinafter referred to as "lock incomplete"), the electric circuit is constructed so that the lock incomplete logic is reversed from the lock incomplete logic.

If the wiring to which the detection signal from the lock completion sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the detection signal from the lock completion sensor will be sent. As for the logic, an electric circuit is pre-assembled so as to be a lock incomplete logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 warns of this trouble. It can be notified by an image or a warning sound (specific sound).

In addition to the sword member 65 that can be operated by the player, the upper plate 61 is also provided with an effect button 63 and a select button 68 that can be operated by the player. The effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player during an effect that is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the effect button 63 is a movable portion that can be operated (pressed) by the player. Further, the select button 68 may be operated (pressed) by the player during an effect executed as the game progresses, or may be operated (pressed) by the player when a predetermined setting of the gaming machine 1 is changed. do. Therefore, the select button 68 is a movable portion that can be operated (pressed) by the player. As described above, the upper plate 61 is provided with a sword member 65, a sword button of the sword member 65, an effect button 63, and a select button 68 as a plurality of movable parts that can be operated (pressed) by the player. Further, since all the movable parts are arranged on the upper plate 61 which is easy to see, all the movable parts are arranged in a position which is easy for the player to see.

Further, in the effect button 63, the pressing member operated (pressed) by the player is formed of a transparent member, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member. When the decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, and the effect button 63 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

In the select button 68, the pressing member operated (pressed) by the player is formed of a transparent member, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member. When the decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, and the select button 68 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode. The pressing member of the select button 68 may be formed of an opaque member (for example, a member having black color). In this case, the decorative member capable of emitting light is not provided inside the pressing member of the select button 68, and the select button 68 does not emit light.

[Moveable part operation warning effect A]
Next, the movable portion operation warning effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the movable portion operation warning effect A. The movable portion operation warning effect A can be executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and can also be executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbol. Here, the movable portion operation warning effect A executed during the variation effect (during the variation display) by the decorative symbol will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the black spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold icon 9A is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 153 (A), as shown in FIG. 153 (B), the effect button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a. An arrow image YBG that is displayed in a large size and moves in the vertical direction is displayed above the effect button image BG, and a message MG1 urging the operation (pressing) of the effect button 63 is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and rotates the sword member 65 in the direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. 152 (A), that is, in the clockwise direction, FIG. 153 (C). As shown in the above, the image shown in FIG. 153 (B) is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, and the right sub display screen 64R of the sub display screen 64 is displayed. Alternatively, a warning image is displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. That is, a warning is issued when the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates clockwise). Here, the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates in the statistical direction), so that the player does not get any benefit and no sense of accomplishment is obtained, and a warning is issued.

This warning image is a warning image that conveys that the sword member 65 has not been locked, and is an image that conveys how to release the warning. In other words, the warning image is an image for notifying that the sword member 65 has not been locked, and further, an image for notifying the method of completing the lock of the sword member 65.

In the center of the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, the sword member 65 is imitated, and the locked uncompleted sword image has the same posture as the sword member 65 when the lock is not completed. KG is displayed. Locked incomplete The message MG2 "Warning" is displayed below the sword image KG, and the message "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" below the message MG2. MG3 is displayed, and an arrow image YG in the counterclockwise direction indicating the rotation direction is displayed around the center of the unlocked sword image KG.

While the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, the voice of the message MG3 "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks" to complete the lock. Is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning. In other words, in the present embodiment, the dedicated sound for notifying the warning is not provided, and the voice of the message MG3 which conveys the method of canceling the warning is also used as the sound for notifying the warning. That is, the warning sound has a function of both a sound for notifying the warning and a voice of the message MG3 for telling the method of canceling the warning.

Subsequently, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 153 (D), the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a due to the operation (press) by the player. The production condition is achieved. At this time, the warning image shown in FIG. 153 (C) is continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L of the sub display screen 64.

In the present embodiment, when the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, it suggests the start of an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the player can see the display screen 7a. Seeing the large ally character CRA displayed in the center raises expectations for the ongoing production.

Here, a sense of accomplishment can be obtained for the player that the ally character CRA appears when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the ally character CRA may not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (for example, the number "7"), it becomes a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, while the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol (for example, the number "7"). It will be off. When the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

After FIG. 153 (D), the player mistakenly rotates the sword member 65 in the clockwise direction to return it to the original state. Therefore, when the sword member 65 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, Of the sub-display screens 64, the warning image disappears on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and the message "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" message MG3. Sound does not flow from the speaker 67.

[Moveable part operation warning effect B]
Next, the movable portion operation warning effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the movable portion operation warning effect B. The movable portion operation warning effect B can be executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and can also be executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative symbol. Here, the movable portion operation warning effect B executed during the variation effect (during the variation display) by the decorative symbol will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Here, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, respectively. It is displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the hold icon is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. It is arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a numerical value and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Since these numbers are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost surface of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. It has become like.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 154 (A), as shown in FIG. 154 (B), the sword member 65 is imitated and the sword member 65 is locked. The lock complete sword image PG that has the same posture as the posture when it is being held is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the arrow image YPG that moves vertically is displayed to the right of the lock complete sword image PG, and the display screen. A message MG1 prompting the operation (pushing downward) of the sword member 65 is displayed near the upper side of 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the player does not operate (push downward) the sword member 65, but rotates the sword member 65 in the direction opposite to the counterclockwise HTY shown in FIG. 152 (A), that is, in the clockwise direction. As shown in (C), the image shown in FIG. 154 (B) is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a to prompt the player to operate the sword member 65 (push downward), and the sub display screen 64 is displayed. A warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. That is, a warning is issued when the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates clockwise). Here, the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates in the statistical direction), so that the player does not get any benefit and no sense of accomplishment is obtained, and a warning is issued.

This warning image is a warning image that conveys that the sword member 65 has not been locked, and is an image that conveys how to release the warning. In other words, the warning image is an image for notifying that the sword member 65 has not been locked, and further, an image for notifying the method of completing the lock of the sword member 65.

In the center of the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, the sword member 65 is imitated, and the locked uncompleted sword image has the same posture as the sword member 65 when the lock is not completed. KG is displayed. Locked incomplete The message MG2 "Warning" is displayed below the sword image KG, and the message "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" below the message MG2. MG3 is displayed, and an arrow image YG in the counterclockwise direction indicating the rotation direction is displayed around the center of the unlocked sword image KG.

While the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, the voice of the message MG3 "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks" to complete the lock. Is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning. In other words, in the present embodiment, the dedicated sound for notifying the warning is not provided, and the voice of the message MG3 which conveys the method of canceling the warning is also used as the sound for notifying the warning. That is, the warning sound has a function of both a sound for notifying the warning and a voice of the message MG3 for telling the method of canceling the warning.

Subsequently, when the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65, as shown in FIG. 154 (D), the player operates (presses) the sword member 65, and the ally character CRA is placed in the center of the display screen 7a. The production condition that appears is achieved. At this time, the warning image shown in FIG. 154 (C) is continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L of the sub display screen 64.

In the present embodiment, when the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, it suggests the start of an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the player can see the display screen 7a. Seeing the large ally character CRA displayed in the center raises expectations for the ongoing production.

Here, the player feels a sense of accomplishment that the ally character CRA appears when the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65. Even if the player operates the sword member 65 (pushes it downward), the ally character CRA may not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (for example, the number "7"), it becomes a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, while the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same symbol (for example, the number "7"). It will be off. When the big hit or the loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

After FIG. 154 (D), the player mistakenly rotates the sword member 65 in the clockwise direction to return it to the original state. Therefore, when the sword member 65 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, Of the sub-display screens 64, the warning image disappears on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and the message "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" message MG3. Sound does not flow from the speaker 67.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the moving part operation warning effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the movable portion operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable portion operation warning effect B of FIG. The first effect (FIG. 153 (D) in FIG. 153 (D) in the movable part operation warning effect A, in which the effect condition can be achieved by the player's operation, is movable. In the part operation warning effect B, FIG. 154 (D), and in the second effect in which a warning is issued by the player's operation (in the movable part operation warning effect A, FIGS. 153 (C), (D), the movable part operation. In the warning effect B, FIGS. 154 (C) and 154 (D)) can be executed. According to this configuration, there are cases where the effect condition is achieved by the player's operation and a sense of accomplishment can be obtained, and cases where the player's operation cannot obtain the sense of accomplishment and a warning is issued. , And the effect obtained by the movable part operated by the player can be different, so that a sense of accomplishment can be obtained when there are multiple movable parts that can be operated by the player. It is possible to clearly emphasize which movable part is possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, when the first effect is in progress, the second effect is simultaneously performed. It is designed to be able to be executed. According to this configuration, even if the effect condition is achieved and a sense of accomplishment can be obtained by the player's operation, the player can be warned by always maintaining the situation where the warning can be issued. It can contribute to deterring such operations.

[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has, for example, a sub-display screen 64 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images in the movable portion operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable portion operation warning effect B of FIG. 154. However, in the second effect, a warning image (specific image) telling how to cancel the warning is displayed. According to this configuration, since the warning image (specific image) telling the method of canceling the warning is displayed on the sub display screen 64 (display means), it is possible to respond promptly by knowing the procedure for canceling the warning. In addition, the player can easily notice that there is a problem with the operation of the movable portion of the player, and can contribute to prevent the player from operating the movable portion for which a warning is issued.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect of the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying the warning is output. You can do it. According to this configuration, the notification sound (specific sound) first causes the player to recognize the point where the warning is issued, and the action performed by the player immediately before the notification sound (specific sound) is emitted is not good. You can tell that it is an act.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. 154 emit light. You can do it. According to this configuration, the movable part that can be operated by the player is emitted to be further decorated and emphasized, so that the player is encouraged to operate the movable part. Can contribute to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. 154 are decorative members. Is to have. According to this configuration, the movable portion that can be operated by the player can be decorated with a decorative member to be emphasized, and the existence of the movable portion can be made conspicuous to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. 154 are easy to see. It is designed to be placed in various positions. According to this configuration, the arrangement of the movable parts can be made easy for the player to understand.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the moving part operation warning effect.
[Modification 1]
The movable portion operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the movable portion operation warning effect B in FIG. 154 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 (C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 (C), a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning can be output. However, the notification sound (specific sound) may not be output. That is, the warning image may be displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. Further, as the output of the notification sound (specific sound), the volume of the notification sound (specific sound) may be lower than the volume of the production sound for the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By doing so, the effect sound for the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not hindered, and the winning result, which is most of interest to the player, is produced on the display screen 7a for the time being and derived. Can be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 (C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 (C), the first special figure hold and the second start based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 The second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 21 was arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a number (not shown). Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is intuitively easy to understand. Further, since the other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and displayed behind the frontmost image of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other images. rice field. In the present embodiment, when the movable part operation warning effect is started, the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L of the sub display screen 64, so that the warning image is displayed on the right sub. When displaying on the display screen 64R, the number displayed as a numerical value of the number of reserved balls may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L, or the warning image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. In that case, a number displayed with the number of reserved balls as a numerical value may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. By doing this, the number displayed as a numerical value for the number of reserved balls can be displayed on another sub-display screen different from the warning image, and the number displayed as a numerical value for the number of reserved balls can be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the screen 7a, and it is possible to make it intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 4]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 (C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 (C), the movement was executed during the variation effect (during the variation display) by the decorative symbol. However, the movable portion operation warning effect can be executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, for example, waiting for a customer regardless of whether the variable effect is being produced (during the variable display). It can also be executed in the demo production for. That is, when the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines that the sword member 65 has not been locked based on the detection signal from the lock complete sensor, it notifies by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). be able to. By doing so, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound) when the lock of the sword member 65 is not completed regardless of the progress of the production and further regardless of the state of the game.

[Modification 5]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 (C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 (C), it is determined that the sword member 65 has not been locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, a special lever that can be operated by the player is arranged and provided in the vicinity of the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152 (A) and 152 (B)) in the front frame 53 at a position where it is easy to see. You may. When the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction and the special lever is operated (pushed downward), the front frame 53 is released from the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached. It has become. When this special lever is operated (pushed downward), it is detected by the special lever detection sensor, and the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is input to the sub control board 90. The detection signal from the special lever detection sensor becomes an open operation logic when the special lever is operated (pushed downward), and the open operation is performed when the special lever is not operated (pushed downward). The electric circuit is constructed so as to be a closed logic in which the logic is inverted.

Further, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the key is rotated in a predetermined direction, this operation is detected by the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is dispensed control. It is input to the board 110. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes an open logic when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotates in a predetermined direction. The electric circuit is constructed so that the closed logic is obtained by reversing the open logic when the operation is not performed. When the payout control board 110 is in a state where the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction, the payout control board 110 transmits a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80 receiving this command to that effect. Is sent to the sub-control board 90. As a result, the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can grasp that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction.

The sub CPU 92 operates the special lever based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor in a state where it is not possible to grasp that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the rotation operation is performed in a predetermined direction. When it is determined that the state is (pushed downward), the warning image may be displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, or a warning sound (specific sound) may be played from the speaker 67. can. The warning image is an image imitating a special lever instead of the lock incomplete sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D) and FIGS. 154 (C) and 154 (D). The message MG3 will be displayed, "Please raise until you click" in the direction of the arrow. Further, instead of the counterclockwise arrow image YG shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D) and FIGS. 154 (C) and 154 (D), the upward arrow image YG is displayed. ..

At least, if the wiring to which the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the special lever detection sensor will be used. As for the logic of the detection signal of, an electric circuit is preliminarily built so as to be an open operation logic. As a result, it is possible to inform the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 causes this trouble. It can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). In addition, if the wiring to which the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the cylinder lock detection sensor detects it. As for the signal logic, an electric circuit may be preliminarily built so as to be an open logic.

By the way, the open or closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached is detected by the front frame closure detection sensor, and is detected by the front frame closure detection sensor. The detection signal of is input to the payout control board 110. The detection signal from the front frame closure detection sensor has a closing logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are closed, and the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The electric circuit is constructed so that the frame and the closed logic are inverted when the frame is open.

If the wiring to which the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor will be , The electric circuit is pre-assembled so as to be an open logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the payout control board 110 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 sends this trouble as a command to the main control board 80. The main control board 80 that has received this command transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 90. As a result, the sub-control board 90 can be notified by a door opening image or a door opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in an open state.

Although the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened by a staff member or a worker, they may be opened by fraudulent acts, so the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The state of the inner frame (open state, closed state) is monitored. Therefore, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to make an image with higher notification that can be transmitted to the periphery of the game machine 1 as compared with the warning image. Further, it is necessary to make the sound more informative that can be transmitted to the periphery of the gaming machine 1 as compared with the warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, the sub CPU 92 is special based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor in a state where it cannot be grasped that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the key is rotated in a predetermined direction. When it is determined that the lever has been operated (pushed downward), a warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, and a warning sound (specific sound) is played from the speaker 67. On the other hand, the sub CPU 92 is in a state where the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is in a state of being rotated in a predetermined direction, and further, based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor. , When it is determined that the special lever is in the operated (pushed downward) state, the door opening image with high notification that can be transmitted to the periphery of the game machine 1 as compared with the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. Alternatively, the door opening sound that is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 instead of the left sub display screen 64L and can be transmitted to the periphery of the game machine 1 as compared with the warning sound (specific sound) is emitted. Sound from the speaker 67.

[Modification 6]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 (C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 (C), it is determined that the sword member 65 has not been locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, in order to fix other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2 to the specific decorative portion attached to the front frame 53 (the effect of illumination can also be performed). A movable portion having the function of the above may be provided. This movable portion is arranged at a position visible to the player and can be touched and operated. This movable portion is basically operated by a staff member or a worker when the gaming machine 1 is installed in the gaming field. By continuing to rotate the movable portion in the counterclockwise direction, for example, until there is a "click" response, it is possible to fix another member arranged on the front frame 53 or another member arranged on the game board 2. The lock is complete.

Inside the front frame 53 to which the specific decorative portion is attached, a specific decorative portion lock completion sensor for detecting the lock completion of the movable portion is provided, and a detection signal from the specific decorative portion lock complete sensor is sent to the sub control board 90. It has been entered. The detection signal from the specific decoration portion lock completion sensor is in a state in which another member arranged on the front frame 53 or another member arranged on the game board 2 is fixed and locked (hereinafter, "specific decoration portion lock completion"). When it is (), it becomes a specific decoration part lock completion logic, and the movable part is not rotated or fixed until it clicks, for example, in the counterclockwise direction. It is specified when it rotates in the direction and the other member arranged on the front frame 53 or the other member arranged on the game board 2 is not fixed (hereinafter, referred to as "specific decorative portion lock not completed"). An electric circuit is constructed so as to be a specific decoration part lock incomplete logic in which the decoration part lock completion logic is inverted. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines that the specific decoration unit lock is not completed based on the detection signal from the specific decoration unit lock completion sensor, the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. A warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67. The warning image is an image imitating a specific decorative portion instead of the lock incomplete sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D) and FIGS. 154 (C) and 154 (D). The message MG3 "Please turn the decoration part in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" will be displayed.

If the wiring to which the detection signal from the specific decoration part lock completion sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the specific decoration part lock is completed. In the logic of the detection signal from the sensor, an electric circuit is preliminarily built so that the specific decorative portion lock is not completed. As a result, it is possible to inform the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the specific decoration unit lock completion sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 is this. Trouble can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 7]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 (C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 (C), it is determined that the sword member 65 has not been locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, it may be possible to detect that an unauthorized device has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152 (A) and 152 (B)) and notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). In the cylinder lock CYK, when an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the key insertion slot, the internal cylinder (movable part) may rotate slightly (it may rotate halfway). That is, the internal cylinder (movable part) may be operated by the player.

When an unauthorized device is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) rotates a little, the cylinder lock detection sensor detects the state in which the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is input to the payout control board 110. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes an illegal release logic when an illegal instrument is inserted in the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (moving part) is not completely rotated, and the illegal instrument is in the cylinder lock CYK. The electric circuit is constructed so that the normal closing logic is obtained by reversing the illegal opening logic when the cylinder (moving part) inside is not rotated without being inserted. The payout control board 110 transmits a command to the main control board 80 and receives this command when an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (moving part) is not completely rotated. The main control board 80 sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 90. As a result, the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can grasp that the illegal device is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable portion) is not completely rotated. The warning image is an image imitating a cylinder lock instead of the lock incomplete sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D) and FIGS. 154 (C) and 154 (D). The message MG3 will be displayed, "Please lock by turning in the direction of the arrow until it clicks."

When the sub CPU 92 determines that an unauthorized device is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (moving part) is not completely rotated, the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen. It can be displayed on 64L or a warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67. The warning image is an image imitating a cylinder lock CYK instead of the lock incomplete sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D) and FIGS. 154 (C) and 154 (D).

If the wiring to which the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, it will be detected by the cylinder lock detection sensor. As for the signal logic, an electric circuit is preliminarily built so as to be an illegally open logic. As a result, it is possible to inform the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 causes this trouble. It can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

By the way, the open or closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached is detected by the front frame closure detection sensor, and is detected by the front frame closure detection sensor. The detection signal of is input to the payout control board 110. The detection signal from the front frame closure detection sensor has a closing logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are closed, and the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The electric circuit is constructed so that the frame and the closed logic are inverted when the frame is open.

If the wiring to which the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor will be , The electric circuit is pre-assembled so as to be an open logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the payout control board 110 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 sends this trouble as a command to the main control board 80. The main control board 80 that has received this command transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 90. As a result, the sub-control board 90 can be notified by a door opening image or a door opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in an open state.

Although the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened by a staff member or a worker, they may be opened by fraudulent acts, so the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The state of the inner frame (open state, closed state) is monitored. Therefore, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to make an image with higher notification that can be transmitted to the periphery of the game machine 1 as compared with the warning image. Further, it is necessary to make the sound more informative that can be transmitted to the periphery of the gaming machine 1 as compared with the warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, when the sub CPU 92 determines that the cylinder lock CYK has an unauthorized device inserted and the internal cylinder (moving part) is not completely rotated, the sub CPU 92 displays a warning image on the right sub display screen 64R or the left. It is displayed on the sub display screen 64L, and a warning sound (specific sound) is played from the speaker 67. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 92 determines that the internal cylinder (moving part) is in a completely rotated state due to an unauthorized device inserted in the cylinder lock CYK, the sub CPU 92 compares with the warning image and determines that the gaming machine 1 is in a state of being completely rotated. The door open image with high notification that can be transmitted to the surroundings is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 instead of the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, and further compared with the warning sound (specific sound). A highly informative door opening sound that can be transmitted to the periphery of the game machine 1 is transmitted from the speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. However, as a warning image, the message MG2 "Warning" is displayed, and below the message MG2, the message MG3 "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks" to complete the lock "and counterclockwise. The error code (for example, "warning: error code E4") may be displayed without displaying the arrow image YG of. Suddenly, the error code is displayed, the player feels uneasy, and it is possible to convey that the action performed by the player immediately before the error code is displayed is a bad action.

[Modification 9]
The movable portion operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the movable portion operation warning effect B in FIG. 154 may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of movable parts that can be operated by a player.
For the effect by the movable portion, a first effect in which the effect condition can be achieved by the player's operation and a second effect in which the warning is issued by the player's operation can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E4-1.
While the first effect is in progress, the second effect can be executed at the same time.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E4-1 or the aspect E4-2.
It has a display means that can display multiple types of images, and has a display means.
In the second effect, a specific image telling how to cancel the warning is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-3.
In the second effect, it is possible to output a specific sound for notifying the warning.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-4.
The movable part is capable of emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-5.
The movable part may have a decorative member,
A gaming machine characterized by that

◇ [Aspect E4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-65.
The movable portion is arranged at a position where it is easy to see.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from a gaming ball to a gaming medal.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an effect button 63, a sword member 65, and a select button 68 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the operation unit is not limited to these, and a lever or a lever or the like is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. , Triggers and the like may be used. Further, in the display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 65. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses a display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above.
Further, although the gaming machine 1 includes a sub display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub display screen 64. The display effect performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although this embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments described above are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalent.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The pending image (pending icon)
13 ... 3rd movable accessory 14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 17 ... Large winning opening open start opening 20 ... 1st start opening (1st entry opening)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd ball entry port)
64 ... Sub-display screen 66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that notifies the winning result by the effect symbols by changing and stopping the effect symbols in a plurality of rows.
The effect pattern is composed of numerical images.
In each of the plurality of columns, the variable display is performed with a special effect symbol in which the numerical image indicating an odd number is larger than the numerical image indicating an even number among the numerical images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images